Home

Teledyne GFC7001T User's Manual

1. 139 6 1 Data Terminal Communication Equipment DTE DCE sssssssseee eene 139 6 2 Communication Modes Baud Rate and Port Testing sse nennen 139 6 2 1 Communication Modes pendet pd RU RC CO BRI D FERE needs RUD RUBRO EAR RARE 139 6 2 2 COM Port Baud Rate nonae pta tete pie e 141 6 23 Com Port Testing rae nte 142 0 3 AME 143 6 2 RS 485 Option 2 tae mes oe Reb iod dra en ER uc Po Ree sh eeu 143 6 9 s Etliermet ss oie mena Lea Nat e ipe aaa nex 143 6 5 1 Configuring Ethernet Communication Manually Static IP 144 6 5 2 Configuring Ethernet Communication Using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 146 6 5 3 Changing the Analyzer s HOSTNAME ssssssseseeeee ener enne enne erinnern nennen 147 6 6 USB Port Option for Remote Access sssssssssssssssssss eene nennen nnne nnns 148 6 7 Commu hications Protocols ee Ha Dune RAE RUE boat adea erp ke Rodeo aae tenets E TAES 150 6c MODBU Ss 150 Gf 25 FIOSSOM MEM 152 6 7 2 1 Hessen COMM Port Configuration esssssseeeeenn nennen en
2. 70 NIST SRM s Available for Traceability of CO Calibration 71 Possible Warning Messages at 0 73 Possible Startup Warning Messages GFC7001T Analyzers with Options 74 Analyzer Operating Modes esci a abbas en he E a Rub LR exea 86 Test Functions Defined i ir eret rtm x ue tute aet tee Lena audeo acer dde 87 List of Warning Messages ir cnn nt eo hex es Hee xk DE ER o ctor ex xa oboe iva dco 88 Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions sse 91 Secondary Setup Mode SETUP gt MORE Features and 92 GFC7001T Family Physical Range by 96 Password Levels etd tate rade eet Ud na Re sedata 105 Variable Names VARS a eee ANE rae Rd RR OPERE E RT A eda knee 111 Diagnostic Mode DIAG Functions ssssene nemen ener 113 DIAG VO FUNCIONS e m 117 Analog Output Voltage Ranges c cece eerste 119 Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL 125 Current Loop Output Check rere e rap e
3. nennen nennt 23 Lele GEG O01 T Eamlily OVeryvIegW DR pete RE 23 1 2 Features ie edna ls 24 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Documentation 24 OPUOMS wars sts 24 2 SPECIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS 2 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeeeeeeeees 29 PAM LEAS PSCIIGALIONS eg LEE 29 2 2 EPA Equivalency Designation 31 2 3 Approvals and Certifications 31 2 9 1 Safety dette ade tant Hed RI dard pu en ctm tinte eee ene 32 2 3 2 EMG c nt rior tmd n He dn etta abi mifer iet re 32 2 3 3 Other Type Certifications rd rte e ER HE DOT ee cea HORE RR IE Te 32 3 GETTING STARTED 5 3 RrazRRATSE ERE AR a Aaaa EA ENEE aa RR KARACRIAE RACRMAXMRAME AQ CENE GNE E Enit 33 3 1 Unpacking the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer sse eene nennen nennen 33 3 11 Ventilation Clearance tee 34 3 2 Instrument Layout srka ip me den P Ir ER odoinn ste 35 3 2 T Front Panel iet Ree eei 35 3 2 2 Rear panel
4. 296 Electronic Block Diagram i nr RUBRA HR RR 298 CPU Board eddie E deemed 299 Ore Eight Mask oie Se adparet Mi 301 Segment Sensor and M R Sensor Output sssessssssseee eee enn 302 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Sync Demod Block 303 Sample L reor RR RR M Un 304 Location of relay board Status LEDS ssssssessseee ene 307 Power Distribution Block Diagram eene ener 311 Front Panel and Display Interface Block 312 Basic Software Operation esses a emen nnne 313 Triboelectric Gharglng tre de t RARE ERR SERRE RR rn RR Ro Fre e MPH ERR 315 Basic anti ESD Workbench euentu beaded etn E nee ul et bo nene a e Erneut 318 LIST OF TABLES Table 1 1 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Analyzer cia eer coed tees ee Ere e cee e ieu ete nup per ace evans det 25 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Basic Unit Specifications 29 Sensor Option Specifications eene nnne 30 Sensor Option Specifications eene nnne 30 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments xvii Table of ContentsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table
5. TIME To adjust see Section 5 6 Battery in clock chip on CPU board may be dead Incorrectly configured measurement range s could cause response problems with a Data logger or chart RANGE recorder attached to one of the analog output If the Range selected is too small the recording device will over range If the Range is too big the device will show minimal or no apparent change in readings STABIL Indicates noise level of instrument or CO concentration of sample gas see Section 12 4 2 for causes If the value displayed is too high the IR Source has become brighter Adjust the variable gain potentiometer on the sync demod board see Section 12 5 7 1 If the value displayed is too low or constantly changing and the CO REF is OK e Failed multiplexer on the motherboard e Failed sync demod board CO MEAS e Loose connector or wiring on sync demod board amp e If the value displayed is too low or constantly changing and the CO REF is bad CO REF e Wheel stopped or rotation is too slow e Failed sync demod board IR source e Failed IR source e Failed relay board e Failed lC bus e Failed IR photo detector When the analyzer is sampling zero air and the ratio is too low e reference cell of the Wheel is contaminated or leaking e The alignment between the Wheel and the segment sensor the M R sensor or both is incorrect MR Ratio e Failed sync demod board When the analyzer is sampling zero air and the r
6. lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT Toggle buttons to set SETUP X X DURATION 15 0MINUTES duration for each iteration of the sequence Set in Decimal minutes 3 o 0 ENTR EXIT from 0 1 60 0 gt 4 SETUP DURATION 30 0 MINUTES lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP X X CALIBRATE OFF lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP X X CALIBRATE OFF Toggle button between Off and ON ON ENTR EXIT SETUP X X CALIBRATE ON lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT Display show SEQ 2 ZERO SPAN 2 00 30 SETUP SEQ 2 ZERO SPAN 2 00 30 EXIT returns MODE Delta bee oe to the SETUP y PREV NEXT MODE SET EXIT gt Menu 9 4 1 1 AUTOCAL WITH AUTO OR DUAL REPORTING RANGES MODES SELECTED If the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer is set for either the Dual or Auto reporting range modes the following three steps will appear at the beginning of the AutoCal setup routine SETUP X X RANGE TO CAL LOW lt SET Eni SETUP X X RANGE TO CAL LOW LOW HIGH ENTR SETUP SETUP X X RANGE TO CAL HIGH lt SET EXIT SETUP SEQ 2 ZERO SPAN 2 00 30 aree bE PRIMARY SETUP PREV NEXT SET Menu In order to automatically calibrate both the HIGH and LOW ranges you must set up a separate sequence for each _ j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 213 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analy
7. ssessssssseeeene ene 62 3 3 2 3 Pneumatic Connections for Zero Span Valve 63 3 3 2 4 Pneumatic Layout for Zero Span Valve Option ssssssssssssseeeeeeeeenne 64 3 3 2 5 Pneumatic Layout for Internal Zero Span Valve 65 3 3 2 6 Pneumatic Connections for Zero Scrubber Pressurized Span 66 3 3 2 7 Pneumatic Layout for Zero Scrubber Pressurized Span 68 3 3 2 8 Pneumatic Connections for Zero Scrubber Ambient Span 68 3 3 2 9 Pneumatic Layout for Zero scrubber Ambient Span 70 3 3 2 10 Calibration Gases eee repe t ORC de PER UL ERO HOP EDU aed Pe Fest edes 71 9i Teledyne Analytical Instruments Table of ContentsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 3 4 Startup Functional Checks and Initial 72 Startup cases tinted sd eee deer mss erue tin 72 3 4 2 Warning Messages s ier Ere Pe RO EC Ee do ERR hene p tin eM de eae D Dre deed te 72 3 4 3 Functional Chiecks aiit Re En E RE ee p RO deed amm de que EE deci vn er RE RO
8. 213 9 5 Calibration Quality ertet te dde ee 214 9 6 Calibration of the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Electronic Subsystems 215 96 1 Dark Calibration Test x et te ete e e gie npn HR emen 215 9 6 2 Pressure Galibratloh rerit e Mee qu o ert deae ad ame epee HUM Ape geh de 216 9 6 3 Flow Calibration n itr te ce dO RM Sd edet edere Rud 217 9 7 Calibration of Optional Sensors ssssssssssssesssseeee eene 218 9 7 1 Oo Sensor Calibration 218 9 7 1 1 O2 Pneumatics Connections cccccccceeececcecceceeeeeeeseceaeceeeeesescaaeaeeeeeeeseseccaeaeeeeeeesessenieaeeeeeess 218 9 7 1 2 Set O2 Span Gas 218 9 7 1 3 Activate O2 Sensor Stability Function essseseeeeenm mme ens 220 9 7 1 4 O2 ZERO SPAN 221 9 7 2 Sensor Calibration 222 9 7 2 1 CO2 Pneumatics Connections 222 9 7 2 2 Set CO2 Span Gas Concentration 222 9 7 2 3 Activate
9. OFFSET offset computed during zero span calibration Crest Tim TIME The current time This is used to create a time stamp DAS readings and by the AUTOCAL feature to trigger calibration events Only appears when the optional sensor is installed Only appears when the optional sensor is installed Only available on the GFC7001T 4 1 2 WARNING MESSAGES The most common instrument failures will be reported as a warning on the analyzer s front panel and through the COMM ports Section 12 1 1 explains how to use these messages to troubleshoot problems Section 4 1 2 shows how to view and clear warning messages Table 4 3 List of Warning Messages ANALOG CAL WARNING The instrument s A D circuitry or one of its analog outputs is not calibrated j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 88 OverviewTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO AnalyzerTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE FLOW WARN 1 Alarm warnings only present when optional alarm package is activated Only enabled when the optional Sensor is installed To view and clear warning messages j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 89 OverviewTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO AnalyzerTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer If a warning message persists after several attempts to clear it the message SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET may indicate a real problem and not an SAMPLE S
10. SAMPLE orn usi EXHAUST GFC 7001T ies VENT SPAN PRESSURE SPAN ZEROAIR Figure 9 6 Pneumatic Connections Option 50E Zero Span Calibration Valves j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 203 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 3 2 MANUAL CALIBRATION CHECKS WITH VALVE OPTIONS INSTALLED SAMPLE RANGE 50 0PPM CO XX XX Set the Display to show lt TST TST gt CAL CALZ CALS SETUP the STABIL test function This function calculates the stability of the CO measurement Front panel display shows all of the available gas measurements Toggle TST gt button until throughout this procedure SAMPLE STABIL XXXX PPM CO XXXX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer Wait until STABIL falls below 0 2 PPM for T300 or 1 0 PPM for T300M This may take several minutes Record CO zero point readings Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer The ZERO and or SPAN buttons will appear at various points of this process Wait until STABIL falls below 0 2 PPM for T300 or 1 0 PPM for T300M This may take several minutes It is not necessary to press them Record CO span point readings j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 204 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 3 3 MANUAL CALIBRATION USING VALVE OPTIONS IM
11. j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 303 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer The four sample and hold circuits are designated as follows Table 13 2 Sync DEMOD Sample and Hold Circuits Active When IR BEAM PASSING THROUGH Segment Sensor Pulse is Measure Dark Gate Reference Dark Gate REFERENCE cell of GFC Wheel LOW Designation Timing for activating the Sample and Hold Circuits is provided by a Phase Lock Loop PLL circuit Using the segment sensor output as a reference signal the PLL generates clock signal at ten times that frequency This faster clock signal is used by the PLD to make the Sample and Hold Circuits capture the signal during the center portions of the detected waveform ignore the rising and falling edges of the detector signal Sample amp Hold Active Detector Output Sample amp Hold Inactive Figure 13 14 Sample amp Hold Timing 13 4 3 2 SYNC DEMOD STATUS LEDS The following two status LEDs located on the sync demod board provide additional diagnostic tools for checking the GFC Wheel rotation Table 13 3 Sync Demod Status LED Activity LED Function Status OK Fault Status D1 M R Sensor Status LED flashes approximately LED is stuck 2 second ON or OFF D2 Segment Sensor Status LED flashes approximately LED is stuck 6 second ON or OFF See Section 12 1 4 2 for more information 13 4 3 3 PHOTO DETECTOR TEM
12. The default offset for all current ranges is 0 mA Current outputs are available only on A1 A3 To change the output type and range select the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION submenu from the DIAG Menu see Figure 5 3 then press j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 119 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU These buttons set the signal level and type of the selected channel DIAG PREV NEXT ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION ENTR AOUTS CALIBRATED NO CAL Continue pressing SET gt until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 5V OVR NOCAL lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 RANGE 5V Pressing ENTR records lt SET SET gt EDIT the new setting and DIAG AIO 0 1V 1V returns to the previous menu Pressing EXIT ignores the CONC_OUT_2 RANGE 5V new setting and returns to 5V 10 CURR ENTR EXIT previous ment ge j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 120 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 9 3 2 ANALOG OUTPUT CALIBRATION Analog output calibration should to be carried out on first startup of the analyzer performed in the factory as part of the configuration process or whenever recalibration is required The analog outputs can be calibrated automatically either as a group or individually or adjusted manually In its default mode the instrument is configured for automa
13. choose the ENTR accepts the Hessen typg77 new setting 77 Note While Hessen Protocol Mode can be activated independently for RS 232 and 2 the TYPE selection affects both Ports j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 155 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 6 7 2 4 SETTING THE HESSEN PROTOCOL RESPONSE MODE The Teledyne implementation of Hessen Protocol allows the user to choose one of several different modes of response for the analyzer Table 6 5 Teledyne s Hessen Protocol Response Modes MODE ID MODE DESCRIPTION This is the Default Setting Reponses from the instrument are encoded as the traditional CMD command format Style and format of responses depend on exact coding of the initiating command Responses from the instrument are always delimited with lt STX gt at the beginning of the BCC response lt ETX gt at the end of the response followed by a 2 digit Block Check Code checksum regardless of the command encoding TEXT Responses from the instrument are always delimited with lt CR gt at the beginning and the end of the string regardless of the command encoding To select a Hessen response mode press SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT HESSEN
14. sse 146 Default nnne 167 APICOM Remote Control Program Interface ssssssssseee eee 181 APICOM User Interface for Configuring the DAS emen 182 DAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation 183 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Bottled Span 196 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Gas Dilution Calibrator 196 Pneumatic Connections Option 50A Ambient Zero Ambient Span Calibration Valves 201 Pneumatic Connections Option 50B Ambient Zero Pressurized Span Calibration Valves 202 Pneumatic Connections Option 50H Zero Span Calibration Valves 202 9i Teledyne Analytical Instruments xvi Table of ContentsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Figure 9 6 Figure 9 7 Figure 9 8 Figure 11 1 Figure 12 1 Figure 12 2 Figure 12 3 Figure 12 4 Figure 12 5 Figure 12 6 Figure 12 7 Figure 12 8 Figure 12 9 Figure 12 10 Figure 12 11 Figure 12 12 Figure 12 13 Figure 12 14 Figure 12 15 Figure 12 16 Figure 12 17 Figure 12 18 Figure 12 19 Figure 12 20 Figure 13 1 Figure 13 2 Figure 13 3 Figure 13 4 Figure 13 5 Figure 13 6 Figure 13 7
15. 246 11 3 1 Replacing the Sample Particulate Filter eene 246 11 3 2 Performing Leak Ghecks 5 ii ebur Dd ek dde a eaae ead dI end ania 247 11 3 2 1 Pressure Leak Check iiie ulead eet nde dee dete dereud der pe Re e ed abeo etg 247 11 3 3 Performing a Sample Flow Check sssssesssseeeeeeenen nennen nennen nennen nennen 247 11 3 4 Cleaning the Optical Bench sssssssssssesseeee eene eene eene nennen enne rennen 248 11 3 5 Cleaning Exterior Surfaces of the GFC7001T GFC7001TM sseeeeem eme 248 12 TROUBLESHOOTING AND nennen nnn nnn 249 12 1 General Troubleshooting t ee teg thi andi ve ek EAR ree 249 12 1 1 Fault Diagnosis with WARNING Messages sssseee eem eem 250 12 1 2 Fault Diagnosis with TEST Functions sessseeeneenm enm emm 253 12 1 3 the Diagnostic Signal l O Function 255 12 1 4 Status EEDS eain asp aat mte m aceite mee denm 256 12 1 4 1 Motherboard Status Indicator Watchdog 257 12 1 4 2 Sync Demodulator Status LEDS nieni a e REE a AEEA EEEE eene nennen 258 12 1 4 3 Relay Board Status EEDS loeo aa a Ri eee iain nee 259 12 2 Gas FOW Proens reet e eerie t e e E d e EARE aE 261 12 2 1 G
16. SAMPLE STABIL XXXX PPM lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP M P CAL STABIL XXXX PPM lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC M P CAL STABIL XXXX PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt ENTR EXIT Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer CO XX XX CONC SAMPLE STABIL XXXX PPM lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP The SPAN button now appears during the transition from zero to span M P CAL STABIL XXXX PPM CO XX XX You may see both keys If either the ZERO or SPAN buttons fail to appear see the Troubleshooting section for lt TST TST gt ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT M P CAL STABIL XXXX PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt ENTR CONC EXIT M P CAL STABIL XXXX PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt ENTR CONC EXIT Figure 3 28 2 Calibration Procedure Set the Display to show the STABIL test function This function calculates the stability of the CO measurement Wait until STABIL falls below 0 5 ppm This may take several minutes Press ENTR to changes the OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the CO measurements Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous Wait until STABIL falls below 0 5 PPM This may take several minutes Press ENTR to changes the OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the CO measurements Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous EXIT at this point returns to the SAMPLE menu j Teledyne Analytica
17. Also anti ESD wrist straps include a current limiting resistor usually around one meg ohm that protects you should you accidentally short yourself to the instrument s power supply Simply touching a grounded piece of metal is insufficient While this may temporarily bleed off static charges present at the time once you stop touching the grounded metal new static charges will immediately begin to re build In some conditions a charge large enough to damage a component can rebuild in just a few seconds Always store sensitive components and assemblies in anti ESD storage bags or bins Even when you are not working on them store all devices and assemblies in a closed anti Static bag or bin This will prevent induced charges from building up on the device or assembly and nearby static fields from discharging through it Use metallic anti ESD bags for storing and shipping ESD sensitive components and assemblies rather than pink poly bags The famous pink poly bags are made of a plastic that is impregnated with a liquid similar to liquid laundry detergent which very slowly sweats onto the surface of the plastic creating a slightly conductive layer over the surface of the bag While this layer may equalize any charges that occur across the whole bag it does not prevent the build up of static charges If laying on a conductive grounded surface these bags will allow charges to bleed away but the very charges that build up on the surface
18. e table below lists the control device associated with a particular function Table 12 8 Relay Board Control Devices CONTROL FUNCTION DEVICE IN SOCKET Wheel Heater K1 Yes Bench Heater K2 Yes Spare AC Control K3 Yes IZS Valves U4 Yes IR Source Drive U5 No The IR source drive output can be verified by measuring the voltage at J16 with the IR source disconnected It should be 11 5 0 5 VDC 12 5 7 SENSOR ASSEMBLY 12 5 7 1 SYNC DEMODULATOR ASSEMBLY To verify that the Sync Demodulator Assembly is working follow the procedure below 1 Verify that D1 and D2 are flashing e Ifnot check the opto pickup assembly Section 12 5 7 3 and the Wheel drive Section 12 5 7 4 e If the wheel drive and opto pickup are working properly then verify that there is 2 4 40 1 VAC and 2 5 0 15 VDC between digital ground and TP 5 on the sync demod board If not then check the wiring between the sync demod and opto pickup assembly see interconnect drawing P N 04216 If good then the sync demod board is bad 2 Verify that the IR source is operating Section 12 5 7 5 3 With the analyzer connected to zero air measure between TP11 measure and analog ground and TP12 reference and analog ground e If they are similar to values recorded on the factory data sheet then there is likely a problem with the wiring or the A D converter e If they are not then either the sync demodulator b
19. A series of diagnostic tools is grouped together under the SETUP MORE SDIAG menu as these parameters are dependent on firmware revision see Appendix A These tools can be used in a variety of troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures and are j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 112 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer referred to in many places of the maintenance and trouble shooting sections of this manual The various operating modes available under the DIAG menu are Table 5 4 Diagnostic Mode DIAG Functions Front Panel Mode MANUAL DIAG SUBMENU SUBMENU FUNCTION SECTION SIGNAL I O Allows observation of all digital and analog signals in the instrument Allows certain digital signals such as valves and heaters to be toggled ON and OFF When entered the analyzer performs an analog ANALOG OUTPUT output step test This can be used to calibrate a ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION ELECTRICAL TEST DARK CALIBRATION PRESSURE CALIBRATION FLOW CALIBRATION TEST CHAN OUTPUT chart recorder or to test the analog output accuracy This submenu allows the user to configure the analyzer s analog output channels including choosing what parameter will be output on each channel Instructions that appear here allow adjustment and calibration of the voltage signals associated with each output as well as calibration of the analog to digital converter circuitry on the motherboard When activate
20. Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 2 3 PERFORMING A BASIC MANUAL CALIBRATION IMPORTANT Note The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the GFC7001T GFC7001TM If the analyzer s reporting range is set for the AUTO range mode a step will appear for selecting which range is to be calibrated LOW or HIGH Each of these two ranges MUST be calibrated separately IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA If the ZERO or SPAN buttons are not displayed during zero or span calibration the measured concentration value during this time is out of the range allowed for a reliable calibration Refer to Section 11 for troubleshooting tips 9 2 3 1 SETTING THE EXPECTED SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION When setting expected concentration values consider impurities in your span gas The expected CO span gas concentration should be 80 of the reporting range of the instrument see Section 5 4 1 The default factory setting is 40 ppm To set the span gas concentration press j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 198 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE 50 0PPM CO XX XX TST TST gt CAL MSG SETUP Only appears if either ISAMPLE GAS TO CAL CO the O2 or CO2 Sensors are installed ISAMPLE RANGE TO CAL LOW LOW HIGH Only appears if the DUAL or AUTO range modes are selected Use these buttons to choose the
21. SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT DIAG SIGNAL I O NEXT ENTR EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until PRESSURE CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR PRESSURE CALIBRATION CAL EDIT new setting ENTR accepts the new setting gt SAMPLE PRESS 29 93 IN HG A 2 9 9 3 ENTR EXIT j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 216 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 6 3 FLOW CALIBRATION The flow calibration allows the user to adjust the values of the sample flow rates as they are displayed on the front panel and reported through COMM ports to match the actual flow rate measured at the sample inlet This does not change the hardware measurement of the flow sensors only the software calculated values To carry out this adjustment connect an external sufficiently accurate flow meter to the sample inlet see Section 11 3 3 for more details Once the flow meter is attached and is measuring actual gas flow press SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT DIAG SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT LLL Continue pressing NEXT until FLOW CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR
22. Sintered Filter s P N FL 01 C2 Critical Flow Orifice em P N 00094100 Make sure it is placed with the jewel down O Ring PIN OR_01 Purge Housing P N 000850000 Figure 12 14 Critical Flow Restrictor Assembly Disassembly 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 281 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 6 2 REMOVING REPLACING THE GFC WHEEL When removing or replacing the GFC Wheel it is important to perform the disassembly in the following order to avoid damaging the components 1 Turn off the analyzer 2 Remove the top cover 3 Open the instrument s hinged front panel 4 Locate the GFC Wheel motor assembly See Figure 3 6 5 Unplug the following electronic components e The GFC Wheel housing temperature sensor e Wheel heater e Wheel motor power supply SOURCE ASSEMBLY SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR THERMISTOR Y Er I S NE a TS S A i HEATER S SAFETY SHIELD EN Figure 12 15 Opening the GFC Wheel Housing 6 Remove the two 2 screws holding the opto pickup printed circuit assembly to the GFC Wheel housing j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 282 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 7 Carefully remove the opto pickup printed circuit assembly Opto Pickup YTN T UE Figure 12 16 Removing the Opto Pickup Assembly 8 Remove
23. ieu E ero oer pen ta eiiis tec urs eee 39 3 2 3 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer Layout rale aa aA r EA 40 3 3 Connections and Setup iis teet ales 43 3 3 1 Electrical Connections eit tree ere be ed sae ee eee Y OE qe prre uev aede 44 3 9 1 1 Connecting POWOTF iot oec Led pee ee eae o Da ily ended rti deae Ludus 44 3 3 1 2 Connecting Analog Inputs Option mener nnn 44 3 3 1 3 Connecting Analog ta eed eed ee t uideat E 45 3 3 1 4 Current Loop Analog Outputs Option 41 46 3 3 1 5 Connecting the Status Outputs eet eed eed le t ud dla cen 48 3 3 1 6 Connecting the Control INDuts 2 eee ctr een eene mener enne nennen ener 49 3 3 1 7 Concentration Alarm Relay Option 61 Standard Configuration 50 3 3 1 8 Concentration Alarm Relay Option 61 Air Products Configuration 52 3 3 1 9 Connecting the Communication Interfaces ssssessssesee nene 52 3 3 2 Pneumatic Gonnectlons e etd etn dee e iode Pe deii aene Pen aden due charlie tav eere ea 59 3 3 2 1 Pneumatic Connections for Basic Configuration sssseseeee een 61 3 3 2 2 Pneumatic Layout for Basic configuration
24. sssssssseeeme 195 9 2 2 Performing a Basic Manual Calibration Check sssssseee eene 197 9 2 3 Performing a Basic Manual Calibration 198 9 2 3 1 Setting the Expected Span Gas 198 9 2 3 2 Zero Span Point Calibration Procedure sssssssssssssssese 200 9 3 Manual Calibration with Zero Span Valves ssssssssssesessseeeee ener nennen enne nnns 201 9 3 1 Setup for Calibration Using Valve Options 201 9 3 2 Manual Calibration Checks with Valve Options Installed 204 9 3 3 Manual Calibration Using Valve Options sess nemen 205 9 3 3 1 Setting the Expected Span Gas Concentration ssssssssssssseee eee 205 9 3 3 2 Zero Span Point Calibration Procedure ssssssssssssssseeeeneeee eene 206 9 3 3 3 Use of Zero Span Valve with Remote Contact Closure 208 9 4 Automatic Zero Span Cal Check AutoCal sse enne nnne 208 9 4 1 SETUP gt ACAL Programming and AUTO CAL 211 9 4 1 1 AutoCal with Auto or Dual Reporting Ranges Modes Selected
25. 309 13 4 5 6 External Digital ERI SARA rep Re ba E ratu leaden 309 C Data MEORUM UNION NC ONUS UM DEOR CU orans VENENIS 309 13 4 7 Power Supply Circuit eene nnne 310 13 4 8 Front Panel Touchscreen Display emm ene 312 13 4 8 1 LVDS Transmitter Board innere rette n exe Prio RR ERR 312 13 4 8 2 Front Panel Touchscreen Display Interface 312 13 5 50 2 ini bidon ideis nien er 313 13 51 Adaptive RT E EEEE E PR DE Pt opta TERES 313 13 5 2 Calibration Slope and Offset eene nennen nennen 314 13 5 3 Measurement nennen inneren nnne 314 13 5 4 Temperature and Pressure 314 13 5 5 Internal Data Acquisition System 5 nennen 314 14 A PRIMER ON ELECTRO STATIC DISCHARGE ennnen 315 14 1 How Static Charges are Created sss enn eene en 315 14 2 How Electro Static Charges Cause Damage 2 nene 316 14 3 Co
26. Decreasing Source Aging Calibration system deteriorating PRES Sample Increasing gt 1 Pneumatic Leak between sample inlet and Sample Cell Change in sampling manifold Decreasing gt 1 Dirty particulate filter Pneumatic obstruction between sample inlet and Sample Cell Obstruction in sampling manifold PHT DRIVE Any but with Bench Temp at 48 C Increasing Mechanical Connection between IR Detector and Sample Cell deteriorating IR Photodetector deteriorating OFFSET Zero Cal Increasing See MR Ratio Zero Cal Decreasing above Decreasing See MR Ratio Zero Cal Increasing above SLOPE Span Cal Increasing Decreasing See MR Ratio Span Cal Decreasing above See MR Ratio Span Cal Increasing above 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments MaintenanceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 11 3 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The following procedures are to be performed periodically as part of the standard maintenance of the GFC7001T 11 3 1 REPLACING THE SAMPLE PARTICULATE FILTER The particulate filter should be inspected often for signs of plugging or contamination We recommend that the filter and the wetted surfaces of the filter housing are handled as little as possible when you change the filter Do not touch any part of the housing filter element PTFE retaining ring glass cover and the o ring To change the filter 1
27. Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer To initialize the modem press SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID COM1 COM2 COM1 MODE 0 lt SET SET gt EDIT Continue pressing SET or SET gt until COM1 INITIALIZE MODEM lt SET SET gt INIT INITIALIZING MODE Test Runs Automatically MODEM INITIALIZED PREV NEXT OFF EXIT If there is a problem initializing the modem the message MODEM NOT INITIALIZED will appear 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 190 Remote OperationTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 8 4 PASSWORD SECURITY FOR SERIAL REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS In order to provide security for remote access of the GFC7001T GFC7001TM a LOGON feature can be enabled to require a password before the instrument will accept commands This is done by turning on the SECURITY MODE Mode 4 Table 6 1 Once the SECURITY MODE is enabled the following items apply e password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands e Ifthe port is inactive for one hour it will automatically logoff which can also be achieved with the LOGOFF command e Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause subsequent logins to be disabled for 1 hour even if the correct password is used e If not logged on
28. Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer To modify add or delete a parameter follow the instruction shown in Section 7 1 4 then press Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU DAS EDIT Control Button Functions SETUP XX 0 ATIMER 1 800 Button FUNCTION PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT PREV Selects the previous data channel or parameter NEXT Selects the next data channel or parameter SETUP XX NAME CONC SET Selects the previous property to be edited SET SET EDIT EXIT SET Selects the next property to be edited INS Inserts a new data channel or parameter into the list BEFORE the selected channel DEL Deletes the currently selected data channel or parameter Continue pressing SET or SET until 9 unt EDIT Enters EDIT mode PRINT Exports the configuration of all data channels to the RS 232 interface SETUP X X PARAMETER 1 Buttons only appear when applicable lt SET SET gt EDIT SETUP X X EDIT PARAMS DELETE DATA YES deletes all data YES NO NO retains the currently stored for data and this data channel and returns to the continues into EDIT previous menu mode LU SETUP XX 0 1 MODE AVG PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT EXIT discards the new setting Toggle these buttons to select a different parameter ENTR accepts the new setting SETUP X X PARAMETER CONC1 SET SET EDIT EXIT lt SETUP X X PARAMETER CONC1 PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT To
29. NAME TEST POINT TP AND WIRE COLOR Dgnd 1 Black 5V 2 Red Agnd 3 Green 15V 4 Blue 15V 5 Yellow 12R 6 Purple 12V 7 Orange j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 271 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer A voltmeter should be used to verify that the DC voltages are correct per the values in the table below and an oscilloscope in AC mode with band limiting turned on can be used to evaluate if the supplies are producing excessive noise gt 100 mV p p Table 12 7 DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels POWER CHECK RELAY BOARD TEST POINTS SUPPLY VOLTAGE MINV MAXV 12 5 3 BUS Operation of the bus can be verified by observing the behavior of D1 on the relay PCA Assuming that the DC power supplies are operating properly the bus is operating properly if D1 on the relay PCA is flashing 12 5 4 TOUCHSCREEN INTERFACE Verify the functioning of the touchscreen by observing the display when pressing a touchscreen control button Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies are operating properly if pressing a control button on the display does not change the display any of the following may be the problem e The touchscreen controller may be malfunctioning e internal USB bus may be malfunctioning You can verify this failure by logging on to the instrument using APICOM or a terminal program to any of the commu
30. TEST CHAN OUTPUT PREV NEXT ENTR TEST CHAN NONE Toggle to scroll and select a mass flow controller TEST channel parameter TEST CHANNEL CO MEASURE PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting g 7 5 10 SETUP gt MORE gt ALRM OPTION USING THE GAS CONCENTRATION ALARMS The GFC7001T GFC7001TM includes two CO concentration alarms if OPT 61 is installed on your instrument Each alarm has a user settable limit and is associated with j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 136 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer a Single Pole Double Throw relay output accessible via the alarm output connector on the instrument s back panel See Section 3 3 1 4 If the CO concentration measured by the instrument rises above that limit the alarm s status output relay is closed The default settings for ALMI and ALM2 are Table 5 10 CO Concentration Alarm Default Settings ALARM STATUS LIMIT SET POINT 15 points listed are for PPM Should the reporting range units of measure be changed See Section 5 4 3 the analyzer will automatically scale the set points to match the new range unit setting Note To prevent the concentration alarms from activating during span m calibration operations ensure that the CAL or CALS button is pressed prior to introducing span gas into the analyzer 5 10 1 SETTING THE GFC7001T CONCENTRATION ALARM LIMITS To enable either of the CO con
31. j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 188 Remote OperationTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer AT YO amp 00 amp HO amp 10 SO 2 amp 0 amp N6 amp M0 E0 Q1 amp WO This string can be altered to match your modem s initialization and can be up to 100 characters long To change this setting press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB NOX XXXX Concentration display continuously cycles lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP through all gasses LU SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT 1 MODE 0 SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT Continue pressing SET or SET gt until COMMUNICATIONS MENU COM1 AT YO amp DO amp H 810 ID COM1COM2 OM PORT INIT amp DO amp H amp EXIT SET SET EDIT COM PORT INIT AT YO amp DO amp H amp IO EXIT discards the new setting CH CH INS DEL ENTR EXIT The CH and CH 1 buttons move the E ENTR accepts the new setting 77 cursor left and right along the text string 27 The INS CH gt The DEL Toggle this button to cycle through button inserts a new button deletes the available character set character before the character at e Alpha A Z Upper and Lower cursor position the cursor Case position 77 e Special Characters space amp _ lt gt e Numerals 0 9 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 189 Remote OperationTeledyne API
32. 12 3 CALIBRATION PROBLEMS 12 3 1 MISCALIBRATED There are several symptoms that can be caused by the analyzer being miscalibrated This condition is indicated by out of range Slopes and Offsets as displayed through the test functions and is frequently caused by the following 1 Bad span gas This can cause a large error in the slope and a small error in the offset Delivered from the factory the GFC7001T Analyzer s slope is within 15 of nominal Bad span gas will cause the analyzer to be calibrated to the wrong value If in doubt have the span gas checked by an independent lab 2 Contaminated zero gas Excess H O can cause a positive or negative offset and will indirectly affect the slope 3 Dilution calibrator not set up correctly or is malfunctioning This will also cause the slope but not the zero to be incorrect Again the analyzer is being calibrated to the wrong value 4 Too many analyzers on the manifold This can cause either a slope or offset error because ambient gas with its pollutants will dilute the zero or span gas j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 266 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 3 2 NON REPEATABLE ZERO AND SPAN As stated earlier leaks both in the GFC7001T GFC7001TM and in the external system are a common source of unstable and non repeatable readings 1 Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 11 3 2 Don t forget
33. 12 VDC Supply PS2 Faulty Connectors Wiring Shutoff Valve should audibly change states If not Failed Valve Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay Board Failed Relay Board Faulty 12 VDC Supply PS2 Faulty Connectors Wiring D8 IR SOURCE IR_SOURCE CO_MEASURE Green Voltage displayed should change If not Failed IR Source Faulty 12 VDC Supply PS2 Failed Relay Board Failed IR Photo Detector Failed Sync Demod Board Faulty Connectors Wiring j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 260 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 2 GAS FLOW PROBLEMS When troubleshooting flow problems it is a good idea to first confirm that the actual flow and not the analyzer s flow sensor and software are in error or the flow meter is in error Use an independent flow meter to perform a flow check as described in Section 11 3 3 If this test shows the flow to be correct check the pressure sensors as described in Section 12 5 7 6 The GFC7001T GFC7001TM has one main gas flow path With the IZS or zero span valve option installed there are several subsidiary paths but none of those are displayed on the front panel or stored by the DAS With the O2 sensor option installed third gas flow controlled with a critical flow orifice is added but this flow is not measured or reported In general flow problems can be divided into three categories 1 Flow is too high 2 Flow is greater t
34. 9 870 PPM Figure 3 2 Display Screen and Touch Control The front panel liquid crystal display screen includes touch control Upon analyzer start up the screen shows a splash screen and other initialization indicators before the main display appears similar to Figure 3 2 above may or may not display a Fault alarm The LEDs on the display screen indicate the Sample Calibration and Fault states also on the screen is the gas concentration field Conc which displays real time readouts for the primary gas and for the secondary gas if installed The display screen also shows what mode the analyzer is currently in as well as messages and data Param Along the bottom of the screen is a row of touch control buttons only those that are currently applicable will have a label Table 3 2 provides detailed information for each component of the screen COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY Do not use hard surfaced instruments such as pens to touch the control buttons ji Teledyne Analytical Instruments 36 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Table 3 2 Display Screen and Touch Control Description Field Description Function Status LEDs indicating the states of Sample Calibration and Fault as follows Off Unit is not operating in Sample Mode DAS is disabled On Sample Mode active Front Panel Display being updated DAS data SAMPLE Green being stored Blinking Unit is operating in Sample
35. Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors may incorporate internal wiring that makes the link inoperable Check cables acquired from sources other than TAI for pin assignments Figure 3 14 before using RS 232 COM PoRT CONNECTOR PIN OUTS Electronically the difference between the DCE and DTE is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data Transmit functions j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 53 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer e DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3 e DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2 Male DB 9 RS 232 As seen from outside analyzer GND DTE mode GND DCE mode Figure 3 14 Rear Panel Connector Pin Outs for RS 232 Mode The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to two 10 pin connectors on the CPU card J11 COMI and J12 COM2 Figure 3 15 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 54 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer DCD TXD GND RTS RI Figure 3 15 Default Pin Assignments for CPU COM Port connector RS 232 RS 232 COM PORT DEFAULT SETTINGS Received from the factory the analyzer is set up to emulate a DCE or modem with Pin 3 of the DB 9 connector designated for receiving data and Pin 2 designated for sending data e RS 232 COMI RS
36. DOM will cause loss of all DAS data it may also cause loss of some instrument configuration parameters unless the replacement DOM carries the exact same firmware version Whenever changing the version of installed software the memory must be reset Failure to ensure that memory is reset can cause the analyzer to malfunction and invalidate measurements After the memory is reset the A D converter must be re calibrated and all information collected in Step 1 below must be re entered before the instrument will function correctly Also zero and span calibration should be performed 1 Document all analyzer parameters that may have been changed such as range auto cal analog output serial port and other settings before replacing the DOM 2 Turn off power to the instrument fold down the rear panel by loosening the mounting screws 3 When looking at the electronic circuits from the back of the analyzer locate the Disk on Module in the right most socket of the CPU board 4 The DOM should carry a label with firmware revision date and initials of the programmer 5 Remove the nylon standoff clip that mounts the DOM over the CPU board and lift the DOM off the CPU Do not bend the connector pins 6 Install the new Disk on Module making sure the notch at the end of the chip matches the notch in the socket 7 t may be necessary to straighten the pins somewhat to fit them into the socket Press the chip all the way in 8 Close th
37. ELECTRICAL TEST The electrical test function creates a current which substitutes the PMT signal and feeds it into the preamplifier board This signal is generated by circuitry on the pre amplifier board itself and tests the filtering and amplification functions of that assembly along with the A D converter on the motherboard It does not test the PMT itself See also Section 12 5 7 2 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 133 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU ENTER PASSWORD CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU SIGNAL I O COMM VARS DIAG EXIT PREV NEXT Continue pressing NEXT until ELECTRICAL TEST Press lt TST TST gt to view Test Functions PREV NEXT ENTR NOTE CO MEAS and CO REF will be artificially altered to enforce a CO reading of 40 0 ppm All other Test Functions will report the correct operational value DIAG ELEC RANGE 50 0 PPM CO 40 lt TST TST CAL EXIT 5 9 5 DARK CALIBRATION The dark calibration test interrupts the signal path between the IR photo detector and the remainder of the sync demod board circuitry This allows the instrument to compensate for any voltage levels inherent in the sync demod circuitry that might affect the calculation of CO concentration For details see Section 9 6 1 5 9 6 PRESSURE CALIBRATION A sensor at the exit of th
38. Lower Detectable Limit GFC7001T lt 0 04 ppm GFC7001TM 0 2 ppm Zero Drift 24 hours GFC7001T 0 1 ppm GFC7001TM 0 5 ppm Span Drift 24 hours GFC7001T 0 5 of reading GFC7001TM 0 5ppm Lag Time 10 seconds Rise Fall Time lt 60 seconds to 95 Linearity GFC7001T 1 of full scale GFC7001TM 0 3000 ppm 1 full scale 3000 5000 ppm 2 full scale Precision GFC7001T The greater of 0 5 of reading or 0 2ppm GFC7001TM The greater of 1 0 of reading or 1ppm Sample Flow Rate 800 cm min 10 O2 Sensor option adds 120 cm min to total flow when installed AC Power 100V 120V 220V 240V 50 60 Hz Analog Output Ranges All Outputs 10V 5V 1V 0 1V selectable Three outputs convertible to 4 20 mA isolated current loop All Ranges with 5 under over range Analog Output Resolution 1 part in 4096 of selected full scale voltage Recorder Offset 10 Standard 1 Ethernet 10 100Base T 2 RS 232 300 115 200 baud 2 USB device ports 8 opto isolated digital status outputs 6 opto isolated digital control inputs 2 defined 4 spare 4 user configurable analog outputs ji Teledyne Analytical Instruments SpecificationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Parameter Specification Optional I O 1 USB com port 1 RS485 8 analog inputs 0 10V 12 bit 4 digital alarm outputs 2 opto isolated and 2
39. Only open any anti ESD storage bins or bags containing sensitive devices or assemblies after you have plugged your wrist strap into the workstation e the bag or bin on the workbench surface e Before opening the container wait several seconds for any static charges on the outside surface of the container to be bled away by the workstation s grounded protective mat Do not pick up tools that may be carrying static charges while also touching or holding an ESD sensitive device e Only lay tools or ESD sensitive devices and assemblies on the conductive surface of your workstation Never lay them down on any non ESD preventative surface Place any static sensitive devices or assemblies in anti static storage bags or bins and close the bag or bin before unplugging your wrist strap Disconnecting your wrist strap is always the last action taken before leaving the workbench 14 4 2 3 TRANSFERRING COMPONENTS FROM RACK TO BENCH AND BACK When transferring a sensitive device from an installed TAI analyzer to an anti ESD workbench or back 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 320 Teledyne Technical Manual Model T300 Family CO Analyzers ESD 1 7 Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack workstation Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti ESD bag or bin Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate e If you are at
40. OverviewTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO AnalyzerTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer e RANGE Value PPB e RANGE1 Value PPB e RANGE2 Value PPB e CO2 RANGE Value e O2 RANGE Value e STABIL Value PPM e COMEAS Value MV e CO REF z Value MV e MR RATIO Value e PRES z Value IN HG A e SAMP FL Value CC M e SAMPLE TEMP ValuePC e BENCH TEMP ValuePC e WHEEL TEMP ValuePC RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP Toggle lt TST TST gt to scroll through list of functions 1 This will match the currently selected units of measure for the range being displayed Only appears if sensor option is installed Only appears if O2 sensor option is installed The STABIL function can be set to display data related to any of the gasses the analyzer measures e g if either the or the sensor options are installed 5 Only appears if analog output 4 is actively reporting Aa e O2 CELL TEMP ValueP C e BOX TEMP ValuePC e PHT DRIVE ValueJMV e SLOPE Value e OFFSET Value MV e CO2 SLOPE Valuej e CO2 OFFSET Value MV e O2 SLOPE Valuef TEST FUNCTION O2 OFFSET Value MV e TEST Value MV e TIME HH MM SS Figure 4 2 Viewing GFC7001T GFC7001TM Test Functions IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READING OR DATA A value of XXXX displayed for any of the TEST functions indicates an out of range reading or the analyzer s in
41. SAMPLE PHT DRIVE AFTER WARM UP 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 244 MaintenanceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 11 2 PREDICTING FAILURES USING THE TEST FUNCTIONS The Test Functions can be used to predict failures by looking at how their values change over time Initially it may be useful to compare the state of these Test Functions to the values recorded on the printed record of the final calibration performed on your instrument at the factory P N 04307 Table 11 3 can be used as a basis for taking action as these values change with time The internal data acquisition system DAS is a convenient way to record and track these changes Use APICOM to download and review this data from a remote location Table 11 3 Predictive uses for Test Functions FUNCTION CONDITION BEHAVIOR INTERPRETATION STABILITY Zero Cal Increasing Pneumatic Leaks instrument amp sample system Detector deteriorating CO MEAS MR RATIO Zero Cal Zero Cal Span Cal Decreasing Increasing Source Aging Detector deteriorating Optics getting dirty or contaminated Source Aging Detector deteriorating Contaminated zero gas H20 Decreasing Increasing Source Aging Detector deteriorating GFC Wheel Leaking Pneumatic Leaks Contaminated zero gas CO Source Aging Pneumatic Leaks instrument amp sample system Calibration system deteriorating GFC Wheel Leaking
42. SET gt EDIT CONC_OUT_3 is only active on analyzers with the Continue pressing SET until optional or O2 P 9 sensor installed DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED NO lt SET SET gt CAL EXIT DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 VOLT Z 0 mV 0100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 0100 ENTREXIT These buttons increase These menus decrease the analog output if signal level not the value on the only appear 1 display AUTO CAL is DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 VOLT S 4500 mV Continue adjustments until the voltage measured at the output U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTREXIT of the analyzer and or the input of the recording device matches the value in the upper right hand corner of the display within the tolerances DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED YES listed in Table 8 7 lt SET SET gt CAL EXIT j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 126 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 9 3 7 MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF CURRENT LOOP OUTPUT SPAN AND OFFSET A current loop option may be purchased for the A1 A2 and A3 analog outputs of the analyzer This option places circuitry in series with the output of the D to A converter on the motherboard that changes the normal DC voltage output to a 0 20 milliamp signal see Section 3 3 1 4 e The outputs can be ordered scaled to any set of limits within that 0 20 mA range however most current loop applications call for either 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA ra
43. Sample Cal Open to zero span valve ZERO CAL Zero Span Open to internal ZERO AIR scrubber Shutoff Valve Closed Sample Cal Open to ZERO SPAN valve SPAN CAL Zero Span Open to SHUTOFF valve Shutoff Valve Open to PRESSURE SPAN inlet 3 3 2 8 PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS FOR ZERO SCRUBBER AMBIENT SPAN OPTION Option 50H is operationally and pneumatically similar to Option 50A described earlier except that the zero air 1s generated by an internal zero air scrubber This means that the IZS inlet can simply be left open to ambient air Internal zero span and sample cal valves control the flow of gas through the instrument but because the generator and calibrator limit the flow of zero air and span gas no shutoff valves are required See Figure 3 4 for the location of gas inlets and outlets j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 68 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Calibrated CO Gas at span gas concentration Sample and cal gas input pressure to be a fraction of a PSI above atm Sour ce of SAMPLE GAS Removed during Cdibration Note All vents on the calibrator outlet must be capped Model 700 gas Dilution Calibrator SAMPLE EXHAUST GFC 7001T VENT SPAN PRESSURE SPAN ZEROAIR Figure 3 26 Pneumatic Connections Option 50H Zero Span Calibration Valves SAMPLE GAS SOURCE Attach a sample inlet line to the sample inlet port The SAMPLE input line should not be more tha
44. Various analog voltage and current outputs Several digital I O channels Ethernet ANALOG RS232 COM2 USB COM IN Male Female port Ethernet c a aff 1 8 c z h o Display Status Outputs 8 x Display 8 1 6 N iw Analog External Outputs Digital O D A AID Converter VIF MOTHER BOARD PC 104 Bus i Zero S pan Internal nh Valve Digital VO Sensor Inputs Bus Options Sample Flow amp Pressure Sensors CPU Status Sensor Status amp Control Figure 13 9 Electronic Block Diagram 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 298 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 13 4 1 CPU The unit s CPU card is installed on the motherboard located inside the rear panel It is a low power 5 VDC 720mA max high performance Vortex 86SX based microcomputer running Windows CE Its operation and assembly conform to the PC 104 specification Disk on Module LVDS DOM transmitter board LEDs located on CPU below LVDS transmitter board IDE active green Power active red CPU o0o000000000000000000000 0000000000000000000000 RS 485 COMI J11 015 USB HDMI RS 232 only J2 connector COM J12 for LCD RS 232 or screen RS 485 Figure 13 10 CPU Board The CPU includes two types of non volatile data storage a Disk On Module DOM and an embedded flash chip 13 4 1 1 DISK ON MODULE DOM The DOM is a 44 pin IDE fla
45. Wheel cycle M The result of CO MEAS divided by REF This ratio is the easurement MR Ratio primary value used to compute CO concentration The value Reference Ratio displayed is not linearized The absolute pressure of the Sample gas as measured by a Sample Pressure PRES Ine tla pressure sensor located inside the sample chamber c Sample mass flow rate as measured by the flow rate sensor in the Sample Flow SOME ELE sample gas stream Sample SAMP TEMP The temperature of the gas inside the sample chamber Temperature Bench BENCH TEMP C Optical bench temperature Temperature Wheel WHEEL TEMP C GFC Wheel temperature Temperature Box Temperature BOX TEMP The temperature inside the analyzer chassis O2 Cell 1 O CELL TEMP C The current temperature of the O2 sensor measurement cell Temperature Photo detector The drive voltage being supplied to the thermoelectric coolers of the Temp Control inv IR photo detector by the sync demod Board Voltage The sensitivity of the instrument as calculated during the last Slope SLOPE 7 calibration activity The overall offset of the instrument as calculated during the last Offset SEESEE calibration activity po SLOPE slope computed during zero span calibration Sensor Offset O2 OFFSET O offset computed during zero span calibration Ex SLOPE CO slope computed during zero span calibration
46. ZERO AIR MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator Figure 3 24 Pneumatic Connections Zero Scrubber Pressurized Span Calibration Valves Opt 50E SAMPLE GAS SOURCE Attach a sample inlet line to the sample inlet port The SAMPLE input line should not be more than 2 meters long e Maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should not exceed 1 5 in hg above ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure e In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold a vent must be placed on the sample gas before it enters the analyzer CALIBRATION GAS SOURCES SPAN GAS e Attach a gas line from the pressurized source of calibration gas e g a bottle of NIST SRM gas to the span inlet j Teledyne Analytical Instruments Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer e Span gas can by generated by a T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator ZERO AIR e Zero air is supplied internally via a zero air scrubber that draws ambient air through the ZERO AIR inlet INLET PRESSURE RATING CONSIDERATION This instrument has no significant internal restriction other than the flow control device and pressure sensor shown in Figure 3 20 Sample must be introduced to the inlet fitting at a fraction of a PSI above ambient pressure just enough to drive the flow to the proper value range If a pressurized source is used both the zero air supply and sample gas line MUST be vente
47. appropriate range Repeat entire procedure for each range M P CAL RANGE 50 0PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT CAL CO SPAN 40 0 Conc EXIT ignores the new The CO span concentration value is automatically default to 0 0 0 ENTR EXI sening and Teturis 10 40 0 Conc the previous display If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being used toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration of the g the calibration gas CONCENTRATION MENU IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA For this Initial Calibration it is important to independently verify the PRECISE CO Concentration Value of the SPAN gas If the source of the Span Gas is from a Calibrated Bottle use the exact concentration value printed on the bottle j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 199 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 2 3 2 ZERO SPAN POINT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE SAMPLE RANGE 50 0PPM CO XX XX Set the Display to show the STABIL test function lt TST TST gt CAL MSG SETUP This function calculates the stability of the CO Toggle TST gt button until measurement SAMPLE STABIL XXXX PPM CO XXXX On instruments with a O2 or sensor installed the analyzer will simultaneously display the gas measurements throughout this procedure lt TST TST gt CAL MSG SETUP Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at t
48. e If you are at the instrument rack hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point e If you are at an anti ESD workbench lay the container down on the conductive work surface e In either case wait several seconds 2 Place the item in the container 3 Seal the container If using a bag fold the end over and fastening it with anti ESD tape e Folding the open end over isolates the component s inside from the effects of static fields e Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the device Note if you do not already have an adequate supply of anti ESD bags or EM containers available Teledyne Customer Service department will supply them see Section 11 8 for contact information Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and workstation 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 322 Teledyne Technical Manual Model T300 Family CO Analyzers ESD GLOSSARY Note Some terms in this glossary may not occur elsewhere in this manual Term Description Definition 10Base T an Ethernet standard that uses twisted pairs of copper wires to transmit at 10 megabits per second Mbps 100Base T same as 10BaseT except ten times faster 100 Mbps APICOM name of a remote control p
49. followed by one or more digits e For example 1 12 123 are all valid integers Hexadecimal integer data Used for the same purposes as integers e They consist of the two characters Ox followed by one or more hexadecimal digits 0 9 A F a f which is the C programming language convention e No plus or minus sign is permitted e For example 0x1 0x12 0x1234abcd are all valid hexadecimal integers Floating point number Used to specify continuously variable values such as temperature set points time intervals warning limits voltages etc e They consist of an optional plus or minus sign followed by zero or more digits an optional decimal point and zero or more digits e Atleast one digit must appear before or after the decimal point e Scientific notation is not permitted e For example 1 0 1234 5678 0 1 1 are all valid floating point numbers Boolean expressions Used to specify the value of variables or I O signals that may assume only two values e They are denoted by the key words ON and OFF Text strings Used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other data types such as data channel names which may contain letters and numbers e They consist of a quotation mark followed by one or more printable characters including spaces letters numbers and symbols and a final quotation mark e For example 1 123abc and lt gt are all valid text strings
50. in Measurement Cell of the GDC Wheel and no additional CO in the Sample Chamber CO MEAS IR affected by CO in Reference Cell with no interfering gas in the Sample Chamber IR shinning through Measurement Cell of the GDC Wheel is reduced by additional CO in the Sample Chamber M R is reduced IR shining through Reference Cell is also reduced by additional CO in the Sample Chamber but to a lesser extent Figure 13 4 Affect of CO in the Sample CO MEAS amp CO REF Once the GFC7001T GFC7001TM has computed this ratio a look up table is used with interpolation to linearize the response of the instrument This linearized concentration value is combined with calibration SLOPE and OFFSET values to produce the CO concentration which is then normalized for changes in sample pressure INTERFERENCE AND SIGNAL TO NOISE REJECTION If an interfering gas such as H5O vapor is introduced into the sample chamber the spectrum of the IR beam is changed in a way that is identical for both the reference and the measurement cells but without changing the ratio between the peak heights of CO MEAS and CO REF In effect the difference between the peak heights remains the same j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 293 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer M R is Shifted IR shining through both cells is affected equally by interfering gas in the Sample Chamber Figure 13 5 Eff
51. the only active command is the request for the help screen e The following messages will be returned at logon e LOGON SUCCESSFUL Correct password given e LOGON FAILED Password not given or incorrect e LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL Connection terminated successfully To log on to the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer with SECURITY MODE feature enabled type LOGON 940331 940331 is the default password To change the default password use the variable RS 232 PASS issued as follows V RS 232_PASS NNNNNN Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 191 Remote OperationTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer This page intentionally left blank j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 192 Calibration ProceduresTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 CALIBRATION PROCEDURES This section describes the calibration procedures for the GFC7001T GFC7001TM All of the methods described in this section can be initiated and controlled through the COM ports IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA If you are using the GFC7001T GFC7001TM for US EPA controlled monitoring refer to Section 10 for information on the EPA calibration protocol Note Throughout this section are various diagrams showing pneumatic connections between the GFC7001T GFC7001TM and various other pieces of equipment such as calibrators and zero air sources These diagrams are only intended to be schematic repre
52. 4 dry contact relays on the rear panel of the instrument This relay option is different from and in addition to the Contact Closures that come standard on all TAI instruments Section 3 3 1 7 RS 232 Multidrop Enables communications between host computer and up to eight analyzers 62 Multidrop card seated on the analyzer s CPU card Each instrument in the multidrop network requires this card and a communications cable Option 60B Sections 3 3 1 9 and 5 7 1 Second Gas Sensors Choice of one additional gas sensor Sections 3 3 1 3 65A Oxygen O2 Sensor and 9 7 1 A Sections 3 3 1 3 67A Carbon Dioxide CO2 Sensor and 9 7 2 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 26 IntroductionTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Option Option Description Notes Reference Number Special Features Built in features software activated Maintenance Mode Switch located inside the instrument places the analyzer in maintenance mode where it can continue sampling yet N A ignore calibration diagnostic and reset instrument commands This N A feature is of particular use for instruments connected to Multidrop or Hessen protocol networks Call Customer Service for activation Second Language Switch activates an alternate set of display N A messages in a language other than the instrument s default language N A Call Customer Service for a specially programmed Disk on Module
53. 4 1 TEMPERATURE PROBLEMS Individual control loops are used to maintain the set point of the absorption bench filter wheel and IR photo detector temperatures If any of these temperatures are out of range or are poorly controlled the GFC7001T GFC7001TM will perform poorly 12 4 1 1 BOX OR SAMPLE TEMPERATURE BOX TEMPERATURE The box temperature sensor is mounted to the motherboard and cannot be disconnected to check its resistance Rather check the BOX TEMP signal using the SIGNAL I O function under the DIAG Menu See Section 5 9 1 This parameter will vary with ambient temperature but at 30 C 6 7 above room temperature the signal should be 1450 mV SAMPLE TEMPERATURE The Sample Temperature should closely track the bench temperature If it does not locate the sensor which is located at the midpoint of the optical bench in a brass fitting Unplug the connector labeled Sample and measure the resistance of the thermistor at room temperature 25 C it should be 30K Ohms at operating temperature 48 C it should be 12K Ohms 12 4 1 2 BENCH TEMPERATURE There are three possible failures that could cause the Bench temperature to be incorrect 1 The heater mounted to the bottom of the Absorption bench is electrically shorted or open e Check the resistance of the two heater elements by measuring between pin 2 and 4 76 Ohms and pin 3 and 4 330 Ohms of the white five pin connector just below the sample temperat
54. ACTUAL FLOW 1000 CC M 1 o 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Toggle these buttons to asl setting match the actual flow as measured by the external flow meter ENTR accepts the new setting 7 See also Section 5 9 7 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 217 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 7 CALIBRATION OF OPTIONAL SENSORS This section provides the calibration setup and procedures for the O2 Sensor and the CO Sensor options Refer to any addenda accompanying this manual for custom configuration information 9 7 1 O SENSOR CALIBRATION Presented here are first the setup and then the calibration steps for the Sensor 9 7 1 1 O2 PNEUMATICS CONNECTIONS The pneumatic connections for calibrating are as follows Sample and cal gas input pressure to be a fraction Source of of a PSI above atm SAMPLE GAS Removed during calbration 2 TI 5 22 s o O amp 5 GA EXHAUST GFC 7001T 55 2 se Manual Control Valve Figure 9 7 Sensor Calibration Set Up O2 SENSOR ZERO GAS TAI recommends using pure when calibration the zero point of your O sensor option O SENSOR SPAN GAS TAI recommends using 20 8 in when calibration the span point of your sensor option See Table 3 12 9 7 1 2 SET O2 SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION Set the expected span gas concentration This should
55. Access the Communications Menu SETUP gt MORE gt COMM and follow the setup sequence as shown in Figure 6 5 SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X DHCP ON SET SET EDIT EXI SETUP X X INST IP 0 0 0 0 SET SET EDIT button is disabled when DHCP is ON SETUP X X GATEWAY IP 0 0 0 0 SET SET SETUP X X SUBNET MASK IP 0 0 0 0 SET SET EXI SETUP X X TCP PORT 3000 SET SET EDIT EXI SETUP X X TCP PORT 3000 DO NOT alter unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments customer Service personnel SET SET EDIT EXI SETUP X X HOSTNAME T300 SET SET EDIT EXI Both TCP ports are inactive when SETUP X X ONLINE ON this is set for SET SET EDIT EXI OFF SETUP X X INITIALIZING INET 096 INITIALIZATION process proceeds automatically SETUP X X INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED SETUP X X INITIALIZATION FAILED SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID ADDR INET EXIT Contact your IT Network Administrator Figure 6 5 COMM LAN Internet Automatic Configuration DHCP j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 146 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 6 5 3 CHANGING THE ANALYZER S HOSTNAME The HOSTNAME is the name by which the analyzer appears on your network The default name for all Teledyne s GFC7001T analyzers is GFC7001T To change this name particularly if you
56. ENTR SETUP X X RANGE CONTROL MENU MODE SET UNIT DIL Verify that the RANGE is set for 50 0 SETUP X X RANGE 50 0 Conc If it is not toggle each 0 0 0 5 0 0 ENTR EXIT numeric button until the proper range is set then press ENTR 4 Press EXIT as needed to return to MODE SET UNIT DIL EXIT SAMPLE mode SETUP X X RANGE CONTROL MENU Verify that the UNIT SETUP CONC UNITS PPM is set for PPM PPB PPM UGM MGM ENTR EXI If itis not press PPM gt ENTR DILUTION RATIO SET UP If the dilution ratio option is enabled on your GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer and your application involves diluting the sample gas before it enters the analyzer set the dilution ratio as follows j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 77 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X RANGE MODE MENU MODE SET UNIT DIL SETUP X X DIL FACTOR 1 0 Gain 0 0 0 0 1 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle buttons to select dilution ratio gain factor for CO gas 2 1 i Default 1 e g 1 p gt SETUP X X 02 DIL FACTOR 1 0 Gain EXIT discards the new BE ENTR accepts the Toggle buttons to select dilution ratio gain factor for gas new setting 7 NOTE Only appears if the optional O2 Sensor is installed SET CO SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION Set the expected CO
57. ENTR EXIT setting T ENTR accepts the Toggle these buttons to select dilution ratio gain factor for or gas new setting 77 NOTE Display only appears if the optional CO or Sensor is installed 4 Calibrate the analyzer e Make sure that the calibration span gas is either supplied through the same dilution system as the sample gas or has an appropriately lower actual concentration j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 104 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer EXAMPLE If the reporting range limit is set for 100 ppm and the dilution ratio of the sample gas is 20 gain either e aspan gas with the concentration of 100 ppm can be used if the span gas passes through the same dilution steps as the sample gas or e a5ppm span gas must be used if the span gas IS NOT routed through the dilution system 5 5 SETUP gt PASS PASSWORD PROTECTION The menu system provides password protection of the calibration and setup functions to prevent unauthorized adjustments When the passwords have been enabled in the PASS menu item the system will prompt the user for a password anytime a password protected function e g SETUP is selected This allows normal operation of the instrument but requires the password 101 to access to the menus under SETUP When PASSWORD is disabled SETUP gt OFF any operator can enter the Primary Setup SETUP and Secondary Setup SETUP gt MORE menus Whether PASSWOR
58. Figure 13 8 Figure 13 9 Figure 13 10 Figure 13 11 Figure 13 12 Figure 13 13 Figure 13 14 Figure 13 15 Figure 13 16 Figure 13 17 Figure 13 18 Figure 14 1 Figure 14 2 Pneumatic Connections Option 50E Zero Span Calibration 203 Sensor Calibration Set Up ccccccccccccccececceceseseceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenenenenenenenenececececesesesesecesesesess 218 COs Sensor Calibration Set RR Recte eee ee HU EE HE TERR 222 Sample Particulate Filter Assembly ssssssseseeeeeene nennen enn nnne nnns 246 Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages sssssee eene 252 Example of Signal I O Function sse nennen 256 CPU Stat s Indicator idee ee cocco ra epe o to aer e eere lad odas 257 Sync Demod Board Status LED 258 Relay Board Status LEDs ner de pace nine eue idc dd 259 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Basic Internal Gas Flow sseeeenm mee 262 Internal Pneumatic Flow 50A Zero Span Valves OPT 50A amp 50B 262 Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50B Zero Span Shutoff Valves 263 Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50H Zero Span Valves with Internal Zero Air Scrubber 263 Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50E Zero Span Shutoff w Internal Zer
59. NEVER exceed 1 5 in hg above ambient pressure Venting Pressurized Gas In applications where any gas Span gas zero air supply sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold a vent must be provided to equalize the gas with ambient atmospheric pressure before it enters the analyzer to ensure that the gases input do not exceed the maximum inlet pressure of the analyzer as well as to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects These vents should be at least 0 2m long no more than 2m long vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument Dust Plugs Remove dust plugs from rear panel exhaust and supply line fittings before powering on operating instrument These plugs should be kept for reuse in the event of future storage or shipping to prevent debris from entering the pneumatics IMPORTANT Leak Check Run a leak check once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been made check all pneumatic fittings for leaks using the See Figure 3 4 and Table 3 3 for the location and descriptions of the various pneumatic inlets outlets referenced in this section Note Depending on the application some instruments may include an internal pump Refer to any addendum that may accompany this manual for information pertaining to custom configurations j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 60 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 3 3 2 1 PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS FOR BASIC CONFIGUR
60. Pot o Mode Var Name Ste Name Defauks Connection Type Direct Cable e Handshaking Securty Atomatic Disconnect cal Instrument Enable Pot 1 Poa 2 OK Q Direct Cable Connection Properties Comm Port COMI v Settings OK Cance d r 3 COM1 Properties Port Settings per second 115200 Data bes 8 Party None joo bts 1 Bow control None Bestore Defauts OK Cancel 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 149 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer e USB configuration requires that the baud rates of the instrument and the PC match check the PC baud rate and change if needed e Using the USB port disallows use of the rear panel COM2 port except for multidrop communication Note 6 7 COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOLS Two communications protocols available with the analyzer are MODBUS and Hessen MODBUS setup instructions are provided here Section 6 7 1 and registers are provided in Appendix A Hessen setup and operation instructions are provided in Section 6 7 2 6 7 1 MODBUS The following set of instructions assumes that the user is familiar with MODBUS communications and provides minimal information to get started For additional instruction please refer to the Teledyne API MODBUS manual PN 06276 Also refer to www modbus org for MODBUS communication protocols Minimum Requirements e Instrument firmware with MODB
61. REQ D Column of Table 10 1 must be performed following certain of the maintenance procedure listed below See Sections 8 3 and 8 4 for instructions on performing checks CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD Risk of electrical shock Disconnect power before performing any of the following operations that require entry into the interior of the analyzer gt CAUTION QUALIFIED PERSONNEL The operations outlined in this section are to be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only gt 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments MaintenanceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer This page intentionally left blank j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 242 MaintenanceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Table 11 1 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Maintenance Schedule DATE PERFORMED epe e Particulate Replace Weekly or As No Filter Needed Weekly or after Verify Test Record and any No Functions Analyze Maintenance or Repair Perform Flow Annually or Perform Verify Leak after any No Leak Check Tight Maintenance or Repair Pneumatic Examine and As Needed Yes if lines Clean cleaned Only if Cleaning As Needed cover removed 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments MaintenanceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Table 11 2 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Test Function Record OPERATING DATE RECORDED RATIO SPAN CAL FUNCTION
62. RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X RANGE MODE MENU MODE SET UNIT DIL SETUP X X RANGE MODE SNGL SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT SETUP X X RANGE MODE SNGL SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT SETUP X X RANGE CONTROL MENU MODE SET UNIT DIL SETUP RANGE 500 0 Conc Toggle these keys 0 0 5 0 0 ENTR EXIT to select the upper ems SPAN limit for the shared CO reporting range SETUP X X 2 RANGE 100 00 96 1 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to select the M upper SPAN limit for the CO2or O2 reporting range EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the NOTE new setting J Only appears if the optional or Sensor is installed 77 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 98 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 4 3 2 DUAL RANGE MODE DUAL Selecting the DUAL range mode allows the A1 and A2 outputs to be configured with different reporting ranges The analyzer software calls these two ranges low and high e The LOW range setting corresponds with the analog output labeled A1 on the rear panel of the instrument e The HIGH range setting corresponds with the A2 output While the software names these two ranges low and high they do not have to be configured that way For example The low range can be set for a span of 0 1000 ppm while the high range is set for 0 500 ppm In DUAL range mode the RANGE test function displayed on the front panel will be r
63. Range and the instrument goes up into the high range it will turn this relay on 3 3 1 8 CONCENTRATION ALARM RELAY OPTION 61 AIR PRODUCTS CONFIGURATION In the Air Products configuration the 4 relay alarm outputs AL1 ALA on the rear panel are configured differently e ALI is for system okay e AL2 is for high range status e AL3 is for zero calibration status e AL4 is not used The relay is energized when the system is okay and de energized when the system has a fault The AL2 relay is energized when the high auto range is in use and and AL3 relays energize when the the instrument is in zero calibration mode Also in the Air Products configuration an additional control input is available on this instrument Control input is used to select the range for remote calibration When input C is low the instrument selects high range during contact closure calibration See Section 6 15 12 3 3 1 9 CONNECTING THE COMMUNICATION INTERFACES The T Series analyzers are equipped with connectors for remote communications interfaces Ethernet USB RS 232 optional RS 232 Multidrop and optional RS 485 In addition to using the appropriate cables each type of communication method must be configured using the SETUP gt COMM menu Section 6 Although Ethernet is DHCP enabled by default it can also be configured manually Section 6 5 1 to set up a static IP address which is the recommended setting when operating
64. Teledyne Analytical Instruments 175 DAC and APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Note The SAMPLE PERIOD and REPORT PERIOD intervals are synchronized to the beginning and end of the appropriate interval of the instruments internal clock e If SAMPLE PERIOD were set for one minute the first reading would occur at the beginning of the next full minute according to the instrument s internal clock e Ifthe REPORT PERIOD were set for of one hour the first report activity would occur at the beginning of the next full hour according to the instrument s internal clock EXAMPLE Given the above settings if the DAS were activated at 7 57 35 the first sample would occur at 7 58 and the first report would be calculated at 8 00 consisting of data points for 7 58 7 59 and 8 00 During the next hour from 8 01 to 9 00 the instrument will take a sample reading every minute and include 60 sample readings settings for the Sample Period and the Report Period determine the number of data points used each time the parameter is calculated stored and reported to the COMM ports The actual sample readings are not stored past the end of the chosen report period When the STORE NUM SAMPLES feature is turned on the instrument will store the number of measurements used to compute the AVG SDEV MIN or MAX Value but not the actual measurements themselves REPORT PERIODS IN PROGRESS WHEN INSTRUMENT IS POWERED OFF If the instrum
65. Turn off power to the analyzer 2 Ifarecording device was connected to the output being modified disconnect it 3 Remove the top cover e Remove the screw located in the top center of the front panel e Remove the screws fastening the top cover to the unit both sides e Slide the cover back and lift straight up Remove the screw holding the current loop option to the motherboard Disconnect the current loop option PCA from the appropriate connector on the motherboard see Figure 3 10 6 Each connector J19 and J23 requires two shunts Place one shunt on the two left most pins and the second shunt on the two pins next to it see Figure 3 10 7 Reattach the top case to the analyzer e The analyzer is now ready to have a voltage sensing recording device attached to that output 8 Calibrate the analog output as described in Section 5 9 3 2 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 47 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer ATTENTION 3 3 1 5 CONNECTING THE STATUS OUTPUTS The status outputs report analyzer conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors which sink up to 50 mA of DC current These outputs can be used interface with devices that accept logic level digital inputs such as Programmable Logic Controllers PLCs Each status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40 VDC All of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at D COULD DAMAGE INSTR
66. XX lt TST TST gt ENTR CONC EXIT Wait until O2 STB falls below 0 01 This may take several minutes SAMPLE O2 STB X XX CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP GAS TO CAL 02 Press O2 gt ENTR to 02 initiate span point calibration of the 2 sensor Press ENTR to change O2 STB X XX CO XX XX the OFFSET amp SLOPE lt TST TST gt ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT values forthe Oz measurement The SPAN button now Press EXIT to leave the appears during the transition from zero to span You may see both buttons lt TST TST gt ENTR CONC EXIT If either the ZERO or SPAN buttons fail to appear see the i M P CAL O2 STB X XX CO XX XX chapter Patet cae Jo EXIT at this point lt TST TST gt ENTR CONC EXIT returns to the SAMPLE menu calibration unchanged and M P CAL O2 STB X XX CO XX XX return to the previous j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 221 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 7 2 SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE Presented here are first the setup and then the calibration steps for the Sensor 9 7 2 1 CO2 PNEUMATICS CONNECTIONS The pneumatic connections for calibrating are as follows Source of Sample and cal gas input pressure to be a fraction SAMPLE GA S of a PSI above atm Removed during calibration Calibrated Concentrati on amp HIGH Span 8 s5 alan GFC 7001T 8 t 5 Manual 8 5 8 Control Valve
67. ZERO SPAN VALVE OPTION Sample SAMPLE Gas In GAS INLET E PRESSURE ERES E SPAN INLET ram 1 I Flow Control VENT SPAN OUTLET zero ZERO AIR Gas INL In EXH GAS OUTLET Sample Gas Flow Control Shutoff Valve Sample Cal 2 Span Valve INSTRUMENT CHASSIS Particulate Filter GFC Wheel Housing SAMPLE CHAMBER Figure 3 23 Internal Pneumatic Flow Zero Span Shutoff Valves Opt 50B j Teledyne Analytical Instruments Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Table 3 9 Zero Span Valve Operating States for Option 50B MODE VALVE CONDITION SAMPLE Sample Cal Open to SAMPLE inlet Normal Zero Span Open to IZS inlet State Shutoff Valve Closed Sample Cal Open to ZERO SPAN valve ZERO CAL Zero Span Open to IZS inlet Shutoff Valve Closed Sample Cal Open to ZERO SPAN valve SPAN CAL Zero Span Open to SHUTOFF valve Shutoff Valve Open to PRESSURE SPAN Inlet 3 3 2 6 PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS FOR ZERO SCRUBBER PRESSURIZED SPAN OPTION Sample and cal gas input pressure to be a fraction of a PSI above atm Source of SAMPLE GAS Removed during calibration Note All vents on the y Boa 3 calibrator outlet must be capped atspangas Model 700E gas concentration Dilution Adjustto 30 Calibrator SAMPLE GFC 7001T EXHAUST VENT SPAN PRESSURE SPAN
68. acceptance criteria Obtain new working standard and check for traceability Obtain air from another Source or regenerate Revise forms as appropriate Locate problem and correct or return to supplier 10 1 3 RECOMMENDED STANDARDS FOR ESTABLISHING TRACEABILITY To assure data of desired quality two considerations are essential Evidence of good quality data includes documentation of the quality control checks and the independent audits of the measurement process by recording data on specific forms or on a quality control chart and by using materials instruments and measurement The measurement process must be in statistical control at the time of the measurement The systematic errors when combined with the random variation in the measurement process must result in a suitably small uncertainty procedures that can be traced to appropriate standards of reference To establish traceability data must be obtained routinely by repeat measurements of standard reference samples primary secondary and or working standards specifically working calibration standards must be traceable to standards of higher accuracy such as those listed in Table 3 12 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 228 More EPA Calibration Protocol Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Cylinders of working gas traceable to NIST SRMs called EPA Protocol Calibration Gas are also commercially available from sources such as S
69. ambient pressure of the sample gas normalized to standard atmospheric pressure As ambient pressure increases the compensated CO concentration is decreased 13 5 5 INTERNAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM DAS The DAS is designed to implement predictive diagnostics that stores trending data for users to anticipate when an instrument will require service Large amounts of data can be stored in non volatile memory and retrieved in plain text format for further processing with common data analysis programs The DAS has a consistent user interface in all TAI analyzers New data parameters and triggering events can be added to the instrument as needed Depending on the sampling frequency and the number of data parameters the DAS can store several months of data which are retained even when the instrument is powered off or a new firmware is installed The DAS permits users to access the data through the instrument s front panel or the remote interface The latter can automatically download stored data for further processing For information on using the DAS refer to Section 7 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 314 ESDTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 14 A PRIMER ON ELECTRO STATIC DISCHARGE TAI considers the prevention of damage caused by the discharge of static electricity to be extremely important part of making sure that your analyzer continues to provide reliable service for a long time This section describes how static e
70. analyzer chassis In this case other temperature warnings would also be active such as BENCH TEMP WARNING or BOX TEMP WARNING SLOPE Values outside range indicate Contamination of the zero air or span gas supply Instrument is Miscalibrated Blocked gas flow Contaminated or leaking GFC Wheel either chamber Faulty IR photo detector Faulty sample faulty IR photo detector pressure sensor P1 or circuitry Invalid M R ratio see above Bad incorrect span gas concentration due OFFSET Values outside range indicate Contamination of the zero air supply Contaminated or leaking GFC Wheel either chamber Faulty IR photo detector 12 1 3 THE DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL I O FUNCTION The signal I O diagnostic mode allows access to the digital and analog I O in the analyzer Some of the digital signals can be controlled through the touchscreen These signals combined with a thorough understanding of the instruments Theory of Operation found in Section 13 are useful for troubleshooting in three ways e The technician can view the raw unprocessed signal level of the analyzer s critical inputs and outputs e Many of the components and functions that are normally under algorithmic control of the CPU can be manually exercised e technician can directly control the signal level Analog and Digital Output signals This allows the technician to observe systematically the effect of directly controlling these signals on th
71. analyzer data and determining if the collected data is within the control limits generally 2 ppm between the analyzer response and the audit value The resulting values are recorded on the SAROAD form If data exceeds 2 ppm check all of the remaining data in the 2 week period 10 4 3 SYSTEM AUDIT VALIDATION A system audit is an on site inspection and review of the quality assurance activities used for the total measurement system sample collection sample analysis data processing etc it is an appraisal of system quality Conduct a system audit at the startup of a new monitoring system and periodically as appropriate as significant changes in system operations occur 10 5 DYNAMIC MULTIPOINT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE 10 5 1 LINEARITY TEST In order to record the instrument s performance at a predetermined sensitivity and to derive a calibration relationship a minimum of three reference points and one zero point uniformly spaced covering 0 to 90 percent of the operating range are recommended to define this relationship The analyzer s recorded response is compared with the known concentration to derive the calibration relationship To perform a precision check during the instrument set up the sources of zero air and sample gas should conform to those described in Section 9 1 1 3 Follow the procedures described in Section 9 3 for calibrating the zero points For each mid point j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 23
72. analyzer s readings in this case CO and water vapor If your analyzer is equipped with an Internal Zero Span IZS or an external zero air scrubber option it is capable of creating zero air If the analyzer is NOT equipped with the optional CO sensor zero air should be scrubbed of CO as well as this gas can also have an interfering effect on CO measurements For analyzers without an IZS or external zero air scrubber option a zero air generator such as the TAI Model T701 can be used SPAN GAS Span gas is a gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type of gas being measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range In the case of CO measurements made with the GFC7001T or GFC7001TM Analyzer it is recommended that you use a span gas with a CO concentration equal to 80 90 of the measurement range for your application EXAMPLE If the application is to measure between 0 ppm and 500 ppb an appropriate span gas concentration would be 400 450 ppb CO in N Cylinders of calibrated CO gas traceable to NIST Standard Reference Material specifications also referred to as SRMs or EPA protocol calibration gases are commercially available Table 3 12 lists specific NIST SRM reference numbers for various concentrations of CO Table 3 12 NIST SRM s Available for Traceability of CO Calibration Gases NIST SRM TYPE NOMINAL CONCENTRATION 1680b CO in 500 ppm 1681b CO in 1000 ppm 2613a C
73. and plugged into a properly grounded power supply 1 Attach you anti ESD wrist strap to ground before doing anything else Use a wrist strap terminated with an alligator clip and attach it to a bare metal portion of the instrument chassis This will safely connect you to the same ground level to which the instrument and all of its components are connected Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away Open the casing of the analyzer and begin work Up to this point the closed metal casing of your analyzer has isolated the components and assemblies inside from any conducted or induced static charges If you must remove a component from the instrument do not lay it down on a non ESD preventative surface where static charges may lie in wait Only disconnect your wrist strap after you have finished work and closed the case of the analyzer 14 4 2 2 WORKING AT AN ANTI ESD WORK BENCH When working on an instrument of an electronic assembly while it is resting on a anti ESD workbench 1 Plug you anti ESD wrist strap into the grounded receptacle of the work station before touching any items on the work station and while standing at least a foot or so away This will allow any charges you are carrying to bleed away through the ground connection of the workstation and prevent discharges due to field effects and induction from occurring Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away
74. and the initial calibration and functional checks The last two sections contain Frequently Asked Questions FAQs followed by a glossary and a description of available options Part II comprises the operating instructions which include basic advanced and remote operation calibration diagnostics testing validating and verifying and ends with specifics of calibrating for use in EPA monitoring Part provides detailed technical information such as theory of operation maintenance and troubleshooting and repair It also contains a section that provides important information about electro static discharge and avoiding its consequences The appendices at the end of this manual provide support information such as version specific software documentation lists of spare parts and recommended stocking levels and schematics In addition to the safety symbols as presented in the Important Safety Information page this manual provides special notices related to the safety and effective use of the analyzer and other pertinent information Special Notices appear as follows COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY This special notice provides information to avoid damage to your instrument and possibly invalidate the warranty IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Could either affect accuracy of instrument readings or cause loss of data Pertinent information associated with the proper care operation or maintenance of the analyzer or its
75. applications should only be performed using external sources of zero air and span gas with an accuracy traceable to EPA or NIST standards and supplied through the analyzer s sample port j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 209 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer IMPORTANT IMPORTANT The following example sets sequence 2 to do a zero span calibration every other day starting at 2 15 PM on September 4 2008 lasting 15 minutes without calibration This will start 1 2 hour later each iteration Table 9 4 Example AutoCal Sequence MODE AND VALUE COMMENT Select Zero and TIMER ENABLE ENABLE Enable the timer the timer STARTING DATE s 4 2008 SR Do Sequence 2 Do Sequence 2 75 DELTA TIME 00 30 hr later each day carare Rac IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA The programmed STARTING TIME must be a minimum of 5 minutes later than the real time clock for setting real time clock See Section 5 6 4 Avoid setting two or more sequences at the same time of the day Any new sequence that is initiated whether from a timer the COM ports or the contact closure inputs will override any sequence that is in progress IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA With CALIBRATE turned ON the state of the internal setup variables DYN SPAN and DYN ZERO is set to ON and the instrument will reset the slope and offset values for the CO response each time the AutoCal program runs T
76. be equal to the percent concentration of the span gas of the selected reporting range default factory setting 20 8 the approximate O content of ambient air j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 218 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL GAS TO CAL CO M PCAL RANGE 50 0PPM 02 lt TST TST gt ZERO SPAN CONG EXIT GAS TO CAL O2 e M P CAL O2 SPAN CONC 20 95 EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous display ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu 0 0 9 The span concentration value automatically defaults to 20 8 If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being used toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration of the calibration gases j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 219 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 7 1 3 ACTIVATE O2 SENSOR STABILITY FUNCTION To change the stability test function from CO concentration to the O sensor output press SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ALRM SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 8 1 8 SETUP X X 0 DAS HOLD OFF 15 0 Minutes lt PREV NEXT gt JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until SETUP X X 2 S
77. board monitors the activity on bus and drives LED DI Should this LED ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds the watch dog circuit will automatically shut off all valves as well as turn off the IR Source and all heaters The GFC Wheel motor will still be running since it is not controlled by the relay board 13 4 5 MOTHERBOARD This printed circuit assembly provides a multitude of functions including A D conversion digital input output PC 104 to translation temperature sensor signal processing and is a pass through for the RS 232 and RS 485 signals 13 4 5 1 ATO D CONVERSION Analog signals such as the voltages received from the analyzer s various sensors are converted into digital signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog to digital converter A D Under the control of the CPU this functional block selects a particular signal input e g BOX TEMP CO MEAS CO REF etc and then coverts the selected voltage into a digital word The A D consists of a Voltage to Frequency V F converter a Programmable Logic Device PLD three multiplexers several amplifiers and some other associated devices The V F converter produces a frequency proportional to its input voltage The PLD counts the output of the V F during a specified time period and sends the result of that count in the form of a binary number to the CPU 9i Teledyne Analytical Instruments 307 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Mode
78. but frequency may be determined by applicable regulations and end use of the data Refer to The Q A Handbook Volume II Part 1 Section 16 for a more detailed description 10 4 1 CALIBRATION AUDIT A calibration audit consists of challenging the GFC7001T GFC7001TM with known concentrations of CO The difference between the known concentration and the analyzer response is obtained and an estimate of the analyzer s accuracy is determined The recommended audit schedule depends on the purpose for which the monitoring data are being collected For example Appendix A 40 CFR 58 requires that each analyzer in State and Local Air Monitoring Network Plan SLAMS be audited at least once a j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 232 EPA Calibration Protocol Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer year Each agency must audit 25 of the reference or equivalent analyzers each quarter If an agency operates less than four reference or equivalent analyzers it must randomly select analyzers for reauditing so that one analyzer will be audited each calendar quarter and each analyzer will be audited at least once a year Appendix B 40 CFR 58 requires that each Prevention of Significant Deterioration PSD reference or equivalent analyzer be audited at least once a sampling quarter Results of these audits are used to estimate the accuracy of ambient air data 10 4 2 DATA REDUCTION AUDIT A data reduction audit involves transcribing
79. cases COMM VARS DIAG EXIT EXIT discards the new setting SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 ENTR accepts the new setting 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to enter the correct PASSWORD 0 DAS_HOLD_OFF 15 0 Minutes PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT DAS_HOLD_OFF 15 0 Minutes 1 5 0 ENTR EXIT 1 CONC_PRECISION AUTO PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT CONC_PRECISION AUTO AUTO 1 2 3 4 DYN_ZERO OFF OFF ENTR EXIT FF DYN_SPAN OFF ENTR EXIT ENTR EXIT 2 DYN_ZERO OFF PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT 3 DYN_SPAN OFF PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT SETUP X X 4 CLOCK_ADJUST 0 Sec Day PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT ENTR EXIT SETUP X X CLOCK_ADJUST 0 Sec Day 0 0 ENTR EXIT Cd 5 STABIL_GAS CO PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT STABIL_GAS 02 co co2 02 ENTR EXIT Press NEXT for additional VARS press NEXT or PREV to move back and forth throughout the list of 5 9 SETUP DIAG DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS Toggle these buttons to set the iDAS HOLDOFF time period in minutes MAX 20 minutes Use these buttons to select the precision of the 033 concentration display Toggle this button to turn the Dynamic Zero calibration feature ON OFF Toggle this button to turn the Dynamic Span calibration feature ON OFF Enter sign and number of seconds per day the clock gains or loses Use these buttons to select which gas will be reported by the sTABIL test function O2 is only available if the optional sensor is installed
80. containing the second language Dilution Ratio Option allows the user to compensate for diluted sample gas such as in continuous emission monitoring CEM where N A the quality of gas in a smoke stack is being tested and the sampling method used to remove the gas from the stack dilutes the gas Call Customer Service for activation Sections 3 4 4 2 and 5 4 5 Refer to page iii in this manual for configuration and specific options included with this instrument 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 27 IntroductionTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer This page intentionally left blank 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 28 SpecificationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 2 SPECIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS This section presents specifications for the GFC7001T GFC7001TM analyzer and for its second gas sensor options EPA equivalency designation and compliance statements 2 1 SPECIFICATIONS Table 2 1 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Basic Unit Specifications Parameter Specification Ranges Min 0 1 ppm Full scale Max 0 1 000 ppm Full scale selectable dual ranges and auto ranging supported Measurement Units GFC7001T ppb ppm ug m mg m user selectable GFC7001TM ppm mg m user selectable Zero Noise GFC7001T 0 02 ppm RMS GFC7001TM lt 0 1 ppm RMS Span Noise GFC7001T lt 0 5 of rdg RMS over 5ppm GFC7001TM gt 0 5 of rdg RMS over 20ppm
81. data records the ENTR button will disappear when trying to specify more than that number of records This check for memory space may also cause the upload of a DAS configuration with APICOM or a terminal program to fail if the combined number of records would be exceeded In this case it is suggested to either try to determine what the maximum number of records available is using the front panel interface or use trial and error in designing the DAS script or calculate the number of records using the DAS or APICOM manuals To set the NUMBER OF RECORDS follow the instruction shown in Section 7 1 4 then press Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 1 800 PREV MEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Use the PREV and NEXT keys to scroll to the DATA CHANNEL to be edited YES deletes all data currently stored for this data channel and continues into EDIT mode Toggle these buttons to set the Number of Records to record 0 100 000 SETUP X X NAME CONC SET SET EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET until SETUP X X NUMBER OF RECORDS 800 SET SET EDIT SETUP X X EDIT PARAMS DELETE DATA NO retains the data and returns to the previous menu YES NO SETUP X X NUMBER OF RECORDS 200 0 0 0 2 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Ce setting ENTR accepts the new setting FA j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 177 DAC APICONTeledyne API Model T3
82. dry contact Multidrop RS232 3 4 20mA current outputs Temperature Range 5 40 C operating 10 40 C EPA Equivalency GFC7001T only Humidity Range 0 95 RH Non Condensing Temp Coefficient lt 0 05 per C minimum 50 ppb C Voltage Coefficient lt 0 05 per V Dimensions HxWxD 7 x 17 x 23 5 178 mm x 432 mm x 597 mm Weight GFC7001T 40 165 18 1 kg GFC7001TM 38 4 Ibs 17 2 Environmental Conditions 1 As defined by the USEPA Installation Category Over voltage Category II Pollution Degree 2 At constant temperature and pressure Table 2 2 O Sensor Option Specifications Parameter Description Ranges 0 196 to 0 100 user selectable Dual ranges and auto ranging supported Zero Noise 0 0296 Lower Detectable Limit 0 0496 O2 Zero Drift 24 hours x 0 02 O2 Zero Drift 7 days lt 0 05 O2 Span Noise lt 0 05 O2 Span Drift 7 days t 0 1 O2 Accuracy intrinsic error lt 0 1 O2 Linearity t 0 1 O2 Temp Coefficient lt 0 05 C Rise and Fall Time 60 seconds to 9596 1 As defined by the USEPA Defined as twice the zero noise level by the USEPA 3 Note zero drift is typically x 0 1 during the first 24 hrs of operation Table 2 3 CO Sensor Option Specifications Parameter Description Ranges 0 196 to 0 20 user selectable D
83. e tis not possible to include a quotation mark character within a text string Some commands allow you to access variables messages and other items When using these commands e you must type the entire name of the item e you cannot abbreviate any names j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 187 Remote OperationTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 8 2 1 4 STATUS REPORTING Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the RS 232 interface the other two being the command line interface for controlling the instrument and the download of data in electronic format You can effectively disable the reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode see Section 6 2 1 Table 6 1 Status reports include warning messages calibration and diagnostic status messages Refer to Appendix A 3 for a list of the possible messages and this for information on controlling the instrument through the RS 232 interface 8 2 1 5 GENERAL MESSAGE FORMAT All messages from the instrument including those in response to a command line request are in the format X DDD HH MM Id MESSAGE lt CRLF gt Where X is acommand type designator a single character indicating the message type as shown in the Table 8 2 DDD HH MM is the time stamp the date and time when the message was issued It consists of the Day of year DDD as a number from 1 to 366 the hour of the day HH as a number from 0
84. e If set to 7 for example the AutoCal feature will be enabled once every week on the same day Number of hours later each Delta Days Seq is to be run e If set to 0 the sequence will start at the same time each day Delta Time is added to DELTA TIME Delta Days for the total time between cycles e This parameter prevents the analyzer from being calibrated at the same daytime of each calibration day and prevents a lack of data for one particular daytime on the days of calibration Number of minutes the sequence operates e This parameter needs to be set such that there is enough time for the concentration DURATION signal to stabilize l e The STB parameter shows if the analyzer response is stable at the end of the calibration e This parameter is logged with calibration values in the DAS Enable to do a calibration Disable to do a cal check only CALIBRATE e This setting must be OFF for analyzers used in US EPA applications and with internal span gas generators installed and functioning LOW calibrates the low range HIGH calibrates the high range Applies only to auto and RANGE TO CAL remote range modes this property is not available in single and independent range modes Note The CALIBRATE attribute formerly called dynamic calibration must always be set to OFF for analyzers used in US EPA controlled applications that have internal span gas generators option installed Calibration of instruments used in US EPA related
85. emulates a computer mouse Back Light Supply TFT BIAS PWM Supply 10 4 7 0 16 4V 3 3V LVDS nmm Transmitter VDS 18 Bi TTL Da Receiver Board 6 Remote Local LAN COM4 USB4 9 49 Ree SB Master Touch Screen Controller USB2 HUB Ethernet Ethernet Port USB Type B Port Analog Input Terminal Block Front Panel Interface PCA Aux PCA Figure 13 17 Front Panel and Display Interface Block Diagram 13 4 8 1 LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD The LVDS low voltage differential signaling transmitter board converts the parallel display bus to a serialized low voltage differential signal bus in order to transmit the video signal to the LCD interface PCA 13 4 8 2 FRONT PANEL TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY INTERFACE PCA The front panel touchscreen display interface PCA controls the various functions of the display and touchscreen For driving the display it provides connection between the CPU video controller and the LCD display module This PCA also contains e Power supply circuitry for the LCD display module e A USB hub that is used for communications with the touchscreen controller and the two front panel USB device ports e The circuitry for powering the display backlight 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 312 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 13 5 SOFTWARE OPERATION The GFC7001T GFC7001TM Gas Filter Correlation Carbon Mono
86. feature prevents data collection during calibration operations and at certain times when the quality of the analyzer s CO measurements may not be certain e g while the instrument is warming up In this case the length of time that the HOLDOFF feature is active is determined by the value of the internal variable VARS DAS HOLDOFF To set the length of the DAS HOLDOFF period go to the SETUP gt MORE gt VARS menu Section 5 8 and EDIT the 0 DAS HOLD OFF parameter To enable or disable the HOLDOFF feature for an individual channel follow the instruction shown in Section 7 1 4 then press Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 1 800 Use the PREV and PREV INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT NEXT buttons to HR scroll to the DATA CHANNEL to be SETUP XX CONC edited SET SET EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET until SETUP X X CAL HOLD OFF OFF SET SET EDIT SETUP X X CAL HOLD OFF OFF OFF ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting Toggle these buttons to turn the HOLDOFF ENTR accepts the new setting J feature ON OFF j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 180 DAC and APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 7 2 REMOTE DAS CONFIGURATION The DAS can be configured and operated remotely via either the APICOM interface or a terminal emulation program Once a DAS configuration is edited which can be done offline and without interruptin
87. frequency of replacement Appendix B of this Technical Manual contains a list of spare parts and kits of expendables supplies j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 227 EPA Calibration Protocol Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Table 10 1 EQUIPMENT amp SUPPLIES Recorder Sample line and Constructed of PTFE or manifold glass Calibration equipment Detection limit Working standard CO cylinder gas Zero air Audit equipment SPECIFICATION Compatible with output signal of analyzer min chart width of 150 mm 6 in is recommended Matrix for Calibration Equipment amp Supplies REFERENCE Check upon receipt Q A Handbook Vol II Part 1 App 15 Sec 4 4 amp 5 4 Noise 0 5 ppm Lower detectable limit 1 0 ppm Traceable to NIST SRM Clean dry ambient air free of contaminants that cause detectable response with the CO analyzer 40 CFR Pt 53 20 amp 23 Analyzed against NIST SRM 40 CFR Pt 50 App C para 3 1 40 CFR Pt 50 App C para 3 25 Q A Handbook Vol II Part 1 App 15 Table A 5 amp A 6 Must not be the same as used for calibration Q A Handbook Vol II Part 1 App 15 Sec 4 4 amp 5 4 ACTION IF REQUIREMENTS ARE NOT MET Return equipment to supplier Return equipment to supplier Return equipment supplies to supplier or take corrective action Instruments designated as reference or equivalent have been determined to meet these
88. gt EDIT EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move between gas list entries Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move between gas types Toggle this button to set the concentration range for the list entry Toggle these buttons to set the appropriate GAS ID For new list entries this number will be displayed as 000 Toggle this button to turn ON OFF the REPORT attribute HESSEN GAS LIST lt SET SET gt EDIT SETUP CO 0 310 REPORTED PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Loi sd SETUP GAS TYPE CO PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT EXIT sets the Gas typ too NONE SETUP X X CONC RANGE 0 0 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X GAS ID ID Number EXIT discards the 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT new setting SSS ie ENTR accepts the new setting 7 SETUP X X REPORTED ON ON ENTR EXIT SETUP X X O2 1 312 REPORTED PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 158 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 6 7 3 3 DELETING HESSEN GAS LIST ENTRIES To delete an entry from the Hessen Gas list press SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT HESSEN VARIATION TYPE1 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT HESSEN GAS LIST Conti
89. however high concentrations of these gases can interfere with the instrument s ability to make low level CO measurements For a more detailed discussion of this topic see Section 13 2 1 3 3 4 4 2 INITIAL CALIBRATION PROCEDURE The following procedure assumes that e The instrument DOES NOT have any of the available calibration valve or gas inlet options installed e Cal gas will be supplied through the SAMPLE gas inlet on the back of the analyzer see Figure 3 4 e The pneumatic setup matches that described in Section 3 3 2 1 VERIFYING THE GFC7001T GFC7001TM REPORTING RANGE SETTINGS While it is possible to perform the following procedure with any range setting we recommend that you perform this initial checkout using following reporting range settings e Unit of Measure PPM e Analog Output Reporting Range 50 ppm e Mode Setting SNGL While these are the default setting for the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer it is recommended that you verify them before proceeding with the calibration procedure by pressing j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 76 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X X RANGE CONTROL MENU MODE SET UNIT DIL Verify that the MODE SETUP X X is set for SNGL RANGE MODE SINGL SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT If it is not press SINGL gt
90. is correspondingly low and its output voltage output is low During those times when the IR beam intensity is low or completely blocked by the GFC Wheel mask the temperature of the detector is lowered by the two stage thermo electric cooler increasing the detector s resistance and raising the output voltage 13 4 3 SYNCHRONOUS DEMODULATOR SYNC DEMOD ASSEMBLY While the photo detector converts fluctuations of the IR beam into electronic signals the Sync Demod Board amplifies these signals and converts them into usable information Initially the output by the photo detector is a complex and continuously changing waveform made up of Measure and Reference pulses The sync demod board demodulates this waveform and outputs two analog DC voltage signals corresponding to the peak values of these pulses CO MEAS and CO REF are converted into digital signals by circuitry on the motherboard then used by the CPU to calculate the CO concentration of the sample gas Additionally the synch demod board contains circuitry that controls the photo detector s thermoelectric cooler as well as circuitry for performing certain diagnostic tests on the analyzer j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 302 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 56V Bias CO MEAS Sample amp Sard igna Hold Conditioner Circuits CO Reference Photo detector TEC Control PHT DRIVE Signal Conditioner Thermo Electric Coo
91. long here that leads outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument SPAN 1 On units with zero span shutoff valve options installed connect a gas line to the source of calibrated span gas here Used as a second cal gas input line when instrument is configured with zero span SPANZ2 VENT valves and a dual gas option or as a cal gas vent line when instrument is configured with a pressurized span option Call factory for details ZERO AIR Internal Zero Air On units with zero span shutoff valve options installed but no internal zero air scrubber attach a gas line to the source of zero air here RX TX LEDs indicate receive RX and transmit TX activity on the when blinking COM 2 Serial communications port for RS 232 or RS 485 Sections 3 3 1 9 5 7 3 6 RS 232 Serial communications port for RS 232 only Sections 3 3 1 9 5 7 6 3 6 7 2 1 DCE DTE Switch to select either data terminal equipment or data communication equipment during RS 232 communication Section 6 1 STATUS to devices such as Programmable Logic Controllers PLCs Section For voltage or current loop outputs to a strip chart recorder and or a data logger ANALOG OUT Sections 3 3 1 3 and 3 3 1 4 CONTROL IN For remotely activating the zero and span calibration modes Section 3 3 1 6 ALARM Option for concentration alarms and system warnings Section 3 3 1 7 Connector for network or Internet remote communication using Ethernet cable ETHER
92. meaningless inside the cursor brackets 6 7 3 5 INSTRUMENT ID Each instrument on a Hessen Protocol network must have a unique identifier ID number If more than one GFC7001T GFC7001TM analyzer is on the Hessen network refer to Section 5 7 1 for information and to customize the ID of each j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 161 DAS and APICOMTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 7 DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM DAS AND APICOM The GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer contains a flexible and powerful Internal Data Acquisition System DAS that enables the analyzer to store concentration and calibration data as well as a host of diagnostic parameters The DAS of the GFC7001T GFC7001TM can store up to about one million data points which can depending on individual configurations cover days weeks or months of valuable measurements The data is stored in non volatile memory and is retained even when the instrument is powered off Data 1s stored in plain text format for easy retrieval and use in common data analysis programs such as spreadsheet type programs The DAS is designed to be flexible users have full control over the type length and reporting time of the data The DAS permits users to access stored data through the instrument s front panel or its communication ports The principal use of the DAS is logging data for trend analysis and predictive diagnostics which can assist in identifying possible problems bef
93. minimum instantaneous reading during reporting interval MAX Records maximum instantaneous reading during reporting interval PRECISION 0 to 4 Sets the number of digits to the right decimal point for each record Example Setting 4 399 9865 PPB Setting 0 400 PPB STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF Stores only the average default ON Stores the average and the number of samples in used to compute the value of the parameter This property is only useful when the AVG sample mode is used Note that the number of samples is the same for all parameters in one channel and needs to be specified only for one of the parameters in that channel Users can specify up to 50 parameters per data channel the GFC7001T GFC7001TM provides about 40 parameters However the number of parameters and channels is ultimately limited by available memory Data channels can be edited individually from the front panel without affecting other data channels However when editing a data channel such as during adding deleting or editing parameters all data for that particular channel will be lost because the DAS can store only data of one format number of parameter columns etc for any given channel In addition a DAS configuration can only be uploaded remotely as an entire set of channels Hence remote update of the DAS will always delete all current channels and stored data j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 173 DAC and APICONTeledyne API
94. of the bag itself can be transferred through the bag by induction onto the circuits of your ESD sensitive device Also the liquid impregnating the plastic is eventually used up after which the bag is as useless for preventing damage from ESD as any ordinary plastic bag Anti Static bags made of plastic impregnated with metal usually silvery in color provide all of the charge equalizing abilities of the pink poly bags but also when properly sealed create a Faraday cage that completely isolates the contents from discharges and the inductive transfer of static charges Storage bins made of plastic impregnated with carbon usually black in color are also excellent at dissipating static charges and isolating their contents from field effects and discharges Never use ordinary plastic adhesive tape near an ESD sensitive device or to close an anti ESD bag The act of pulling a piece of standard plastic adhesive tape such as Scotch tape from its roll will generate a static charge of several thousand or even tens of thousands of volts on the tape itself and an associated field effect that can discharge through or be induced upon items up to a foot away 14 4 2 BASIC ANTI ESD PROCEDURES FOR ANALYZER REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 319 Teledyne Technical Manual Model T300 Family CO Analyzers ESD 14 4 2 1 WORKING AT THE INSTRUMENT RACK When working on the analyzer while it is in the instrument rack
95. pan gas concentration This should be 80 9096 of range of concentration range for which the analyzer s analog output range is set j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 78 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP Only appears if either GAS TO CAL CO the optional C2 or CO2 ENTR EXIT sensors are installed SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL LOW Only appears if the LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT analyzer is set for DUAL range LOW HIGH mode L M P CAL RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT CAL SPAN CONC 40 0 Conc EXIT ignores the ne The CO span concentration value is 10 automatically default to 0 0 0 ENTR setting and returns to 40 0 PPM the previous display If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being used toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration of the CO calibration gas ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the CONCENTRATION MENU ZERO SPAN CALIBRATION To perform the zero span calibration procedure press j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 79 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE 0 0 PPm CO XX XX lt TST TST gt SETUP Toggle TST gt button until CO XX XX CAL SAMPLE STABIL XXXX PPM lt TST TST gt SETUP Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer CO XX XX CAL
96. reference response It should be kept in mind that any Level 2 check that involves only part of the analyzer s system cannot provide information about the portions of the system not checked and therefore cannot be used as a verification of the overall analyzer calibration 10 2 ZERO AND SPAN CHECKS A system of Level 1 and Level 2 zero span checks is recommended These checks must be conducted in accordance with the specific guidance given in Section 12 of the QA Handbook Vol II Part 1 It is recommended that Level 1 zero and span checks be conducted every two weeks Level 2 checks should be conducted in between the Level 1 checks at a frequency desired by the user Span concentrations for both levels should be between 70 and 90 of the measurement range Zero and span data are to be used to e Provide data to allow analyzer adjustment for zero and span drift e Provide a decision point on when to calibrate the analyzer j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 230 EPA Calibration Protocol Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer e Provide a decision point on invalidation of monitoring data Items 1 and 2 are described in detail in Subsection 9 1 3 of Section 2 0 9 Q A Handbook Vol II Item 3 is described in Subsection 9 1 4 of the same section Refer to the Troubleshooting and Repair see Section 13 of this manual if the instrument is not within the allowed variations 10 2 1 ZERO SPAN CHECK PROCEDURES The Zero an
97. specifically requested of Teledyne at the time the order is placed Therefore the purchaser must be aware of the hazardous process conditions The purchaser is responsible for the training of personnel for providing hazard warning methods and instrumentation per the appropriate standards and for ensuring that hazard warning devices and instrumentation are maintained and operated properly Teledyne Analytical Instruments the manufacturer of this instrument cannot accept responsibility for conditions beyond its knowledge and control No statement expressed or implied by this document or any information disseminated by the manufacturer or its agents is to be construed as a warranty of adequate safety control under the user s process conditions Trademarks All trademarks registered trademarks brand names or product names appearing in this document are the property of their respective owners and are used herein for identification purposes only j Teledyne Analytical Instruments Model GFC7001T Carbon Monoxide Analyzer INFORMATION ABOUT THE SPECIFIC CONFIGURATION OF YOUR MODEL GFC 7001T CARBON MONOXIDE ANALYZER Selected Versions of the Model GFC 7001T 7001T STANDARD VERSION This Model GFC7001T CO Analyzer is a touch screen version designed for analyzing the CO concentration in a background gas specified by the customer It has a minimum settable range of 0 1 ppm and a maximum settable range of 0 100
98. structure and syntax conventions Altering a copy of the original file offline Uploading the new configuration into the analyzer IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Whereas the editing adding and deleting of DAS channels and parameters of one channel through the front panel control buttons can be done without affecting the other channels uploading a DAS configuration script to the analyzer through its communication ports will erase all data parameters and channels by replacing them with the new DAS configuration Backup of data and the original DAS configuration is advised before attempting any DAS changes Refer to Section 8 2 1 for details on remote access to and from the GFC7001T GFC7001 TM Analyzer via the instrument s COMM ports 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 183 Remote OperationTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 8 REMOTE OPERATION This section provides information needed when using external digital and serial I O for remote operation It assumes that the electrical connections have been made as described in Section3 3 1 The GFC7001T can be remotely configured calibrated or queried for stored data through the rear panel serial ports via either Computer mode using a personal computer or Interactive mode using a terminal emulation program 8 1 COMPUTER MODE Computer mode is used when the analyzer is connected to a computer with a dedicated interface program such as APICOM 8 1 1 REMOTE CONT
99. the 0 step which should be within 0mV 2 mV Make sure you take into account any offset that may have been programmed into channel see Section 5 9 3 9 If one or more of the steps fails to be within these ranges it is likely that there has been a failure of either or both of the DACs and their associated circuitry on the motherboard To perform the test connect a voltmeter to the output in question and perform an analog output step test as follows SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XXXX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP XX PRIMARY SETUP MENU ENTER PASSWORD CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU SIGNAL COMM VARS DIAG EXIT PREV NEXT ANALOG OUTPUT Performs analog output step test 096 to 100 LI 20 Pressing the button under 096 pause SNADOGOUIPUT the test Brackets will appear around the 20 EXIT value EXAMPLE 20 e Pressing the same button again will resume the test j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 277 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 5 8 3 ANALOG OUTPUTS CURRENT LOOP To verify that the analog outputs with the optional current mode output are working properly connect a 250 ohm resistor across the outputs and use a voltmeter to measure the output as described in Section 5 9 3 6 and then perform an analog output step test as described in Section 12 5 8 2 For each step the output should be within 1 of the no
100. the absorption coefficient that tells how well CO absorbs light at the specific wavelength of interest 13 2 MEASUREMENT FUNDAMENTALS In the most basic terms the GFC7001T GFC7001TM uses a high energy heated element to generate a beam of broad band IR light with a known intensity measured during instrument calibration This beam is directed through multi pass cell filled with sample gas The sample cell uses mirrors at each end to reflect the IR beam back and forth through the sample gas a number of times see Figure 13 1 The total length that the reflected light travels is directly related to the intended sensitivity of the instrument The lower the concentration that the instrument is designed to detect the longer the light path must be in order to create detectable levels of attenuation Lengthening the absorption path is accomplished partly by making the physical dimension of the reaction cell longer but primarily by adding extra passes back and forth along the length of the chamber Table 13 1 Absorption Path Lengths for GFC7001T and GFC7001TM TOTAL TOTAL NUMBER OF MODEL REFLECTIVE PASSES DISTANCE BETWEEN MIRRORS ABSORPTION LIGHT PATH GFC7001T 32 437 5 mm 14 Meters GFC7001TM 8 312 5 mm 2 5 Meters j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 290 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Band Pass Filter Sample Chamber Photo Detector IR Beam Figure 13 1 Measu
101. the device to fail well before its designed lifetime is reached These latent failures are often the most costly since the failure of the equipment in which the damaged device is installed causes down time lost data lost productivity as well as possible failure and damage to other pieces of equipment or property Static Charges can t build up on a conductive surface There are two errors in this statement Conductive devices can build static charges if they are not grounded The charge will be equalized across the entire device but without access to earth ground they are still trapped and can still build to high enough levels to cause damage when they are discharged A charge can be induced onto the conductive surface and or discharge triggered in the presence of a charged field such as a large static charge j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 317 Teledyne Technical Manual Model T300 Family CO Analyzers ESD clinging to the surface of a nylon jacket of someone walking up to a workbench e As long as my analyzer is properly installed it is safe from damage caused by static discharges It is true that when properly installed the chassis ground of your analyzer is tied to earth ground and its electronic components are prevented from building static electric charges themselves This does not prevent discharges from static fields built up on other things like you and your clothing from discharging through the instrument a
102. the instrument via Ethernet j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 52 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Note IMPORTANT ETHERNET CONNECTION For network or Internet communication with the analyzer connect an Ethernet cable from the analyzer s rear panel Ethernet interface connector to an Ethernet access port Please see Section 6 5 for description and setup instructions For manual configuration see Section 6 5 1 For automatic configuration default see Section 6 5 2 USB CONNECTION For direct communication between the analyzer and a PC connect a USB cable between the analyzer and desktop or laptop USB ports The baud rate for the analyzer and the computer must match you may elect to change one or the other to view and or change the analyzer s baud rate see Section 6 2 2 If this option is installed the COM2 port cannot be used for anything other than Multidrop communication For configuration see 6 6 RS 232 CONNECTION For RS 232 communications with data terminal equipment DTE or with data communication equipment DCE connect either a DB9 female to DB9 female cable TAI part number WR000077 or a DB9 female to DB25 male cable Option 60A Section 1 4 as applicable from the analyzer s rear panel RS 232 port to the device Adjust the DCE DTE switch Figure 3 4 to select DTE or DCE as appropriate Configuration Sections 5 7 and 6 3 IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
103. the menu buttons to change the ID Reboot analyzer For the settings to take effect power down the analyzer wait 5 seconds and power up the analyzer j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 150 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Make appropriate cable Connect your analyzer either connections e via its Ethernet or USB port to a PC this may require a USB to RS232 adapter for your PC if so also install the software driver from the CD supplied with the adapter and reboot the computer if required or e via its COM2 port to a null modem this may require a null modem adapter or cable Specify MODBUS software 1 Click Setup Read Write Definition settings examples used here are for MODBUS Poll software a In the Read Write Definition window see example that follows select a Function what you wish to read from the analyzer b Input Quantity based on your firmware s register map c In the View section of the Read Write Definition window select a Display typically Float Inverse d Click OK 2 Next click Connection Connect a In the Connection Setup window see example that follows select the options based on your computer b Press OK Read the Modbus Poll Register Use the Register Map to find the test parameter names for the values displayed see example that follows If desired assign an alias for each Example Read Write Definitio
104. the sync pickup PCA For a working board with the GFC motor spinning they should read 2 4 0 1 VAC and 2 5 0 15 VDC Further confirmation that the pickups and motor are operating properly can be obtained by measuring the frequency at TP2 and TP4 using a frequency counter a digital voltmeter with a frequency counter or an oscilloscope per Table 12 9 Table 12 9 Opto Pickup Board Nominal Output Frequencies Nominal Measured Frequency AC Mains Freq TP2 TP4 50 Hz 25 300 60 Hz 30 360 12 5 7 4 GFC WHEEL DRIVE If the D1 and D2 on the sync demodulator board are not flashing then j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 274 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 1 Check for power to the motor by measuring between pins 1 and 3 on the connector feeding the motor e For instruments configured for 120 or 220 240V AC there should be approximately 88 VAC for instruments configured for 100V AC it should be the voltage of the AC mains approximately 100VAC 2 Verify that the frequency select jumper JP4 is properly set on the relay board e For 50 Hz operation it should be installed e For 60 Hz operation may either be missing or installed in a vertical orientation 3 Ifthere is power to the motor and the frequency select jumper is properly set then the motor is likely bad e See Section 12 6 2 for instructions on removing and replacing the assembly tha
105. to 02 initiate zero point calibration of the CO2 sensor Press ENTR to change M P CAL CO2 STB X XX the OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the O2 measurement Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC M P CAL CO2 STB X XX lt TST TST gt ENTR CONC Wait until CO2 STB falls below 0 01 This may take several minutes SAMPLE CO2 STB X XX CO XX XX TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE GAS TO CAL CO2 Press CO2 ENTR to co2 02 initiate span point calibration of the O2 sensor Press ENTR to changes M P CAL CO2 STB X XX the OFFSET amp SLOPE lt TST TST gt ZERO SPAN CONC values for the 202 measurement The SPAN button now Press EXIT to leave the appears during the transition M calibration unchanged and from zero to span MEP CAL CO2 STB X XX return to the previous You may see both buttons lt TST TST gt ENTR CONC If either the ZERO or SPAN buttons fail to appear see the gt _ chapter on Troubleshooting M P CAL CO2 STB X XX EXIT at this point lt TST TST gt ENTR CONC returns to the SAMPLE menu j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 225 EPA Calibration ProtocolTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 10 EPA CALIBRATION PROTOCOL 10 1 CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS If the GFC7001T is to be used for EPA SLAMS monitoring it must be calibrated in accordance with the instructions in this section The USEPA strongly reco
106. to 10096 p 20 Pressing the button under 096 pause ANALOG OUTPUT the test Brackets will appear around the 2096 EXIT value EXAMPLE 2096 Pressing the same button again will resume the test 5 9 3 ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION The GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer comes equipped with four analog outputs e first two outputs A1 amp A2 carry analog signals that represent the currently measured concentration of CO see Section 5 4 1 e third output is only active if the analyzer is equipped with one of the optional 2 gas sensors e g O2 or CO e The fourth output A4 outputs a signal that can be set to represent the current value of one of several test functions see Table 5 9 Table 5 5 lists the analog functions that are available in GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 116 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Table 5 5 DIAG Analog I O Functions OUTPUT SUB MENU CHANNEL FUNCTION Initiates a calibration of the A1 A2 A3 and A4 analog output channels that AOUT determines the slope and offset inherent in the circuitry of each output ALL CALIBRATED These values are stored and applied to the output signals by the CPU automatically Sets the basic electronic configuration of the A1 output CO Concentration There are four options e RANGE Selects the signal type voltage or current loop and lev
107. values With this information the software computes values for instrument slope and offset and stores these values in memory for use in calculating the CO concentration of the sample gas The instrument slope and offset values recorded during the last calibration are available for viewing from the from the front panel see Section 3 4 3 13 5 3 MEASUREMENT ALGORITHM Once the IR photo detector signal is demodulated into CO MEAS and CO REF by the sync demod board and converted to digital data by the motherboard the GFC7001T GFC7001TM analytical software calculates the ratio between CO MEAS and CO REF This value is compared to a look up table that is used with interpolation to linearize the response of the instrument The linearized concentration value is combined with calibration slope and offset values then normalized for changes in sample gas pressure to produce the final CO concentration This is the value that is displayed on the instrument front panel display and is stored in memory by the analyzer s DAS system 13 5 4 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE COMPENSATION Changes in pressure can have a noticeable effect on the CO concentration calculation To account for this the GFC7001T GFC7001TM software includes a feature which allows the instrument to compensate for the CO calculations based on changes in ambient pressure The TPC feature multiplies the analyzer s CO concentration by a factor which is based on the difference between the
108. with possible hazardous consequences NEVER use any gas analyzer to sample combustible gas es gt Technical Assistance regarding the use and maintenance of the GFC7001T or any other Teledyne product can be obtained by contacting Teledyne Customer Service Department Phone 888 789 8168 Email ask tai teledyne com or by accessing various service options on our website at http www teledyne ai com j Teledyne Analytical Instruments Safety Information Model GFC7001T Carbon Monoxide Analyzer CONSIGNES DE SECURITE Des consignes de s curit importantes sont fournies tout au long du pr sent manuel dans le but d viter des blessures corporelles ou d endommager les instruments Veuillez lire attentivement ces consignes Chaque consigne de s curit est repr sent e par un pictogramme d alerte de s curit ces pictogrammes se retrouvent dans ce manuel et l int rieur des instruments Les symboles correspondent aux consignes suivantes AVERTISSEMENT Risque de choc lectrique DANGER Oxydant puissant AVERTISSEMENT G N RAL MISE EN GARDE Lire la consigne compl mentaire pour des renseignements sp cifiques MISE EN GARDE Surface chaude Ne pas toucher Toucher certaines parties de l instrument sans protection ou sans les outils appropri s pourrait entrainer des dommages aux pi ces ou l instrument Pictogramme technicien Toutes les op rations portant ce symbole doi
109. year of operation of this instrument including replacement sample Appendix B particulate filters 45 Spare Parts Kit includes spares parts for one unit Appendix B Calibration Valves Used to control the flow of calibration gases generated from external sources rather than manually switching the rear panel pneumatic connections 50A Sections 3 3 2 3 Ambient Zero and Ambient Span and 3 324 50B Sections Error Reference source not found and 3 3 2 5 Ambient Zero and Pressurized Span 50E Sections 3 3 2 6 Zero Scrubber and Pressurized Span and 3 3 2 7 50H Communication Cables Sections 3 3 2 8 and 3 3 2 9 For remote serial network and Internet communication with the analyzer Zero Scrubber and Ambient Span Type Description Shielded straight through DB 9F to DB 25M cable about Section 3 3 1 9 60A RS 232 1 8 m long Used to interface with older computers or and 6 3 cri code activated switches with DB 25 serial connectors 60B RS 232 Shielded straight through DB 9F to DB 9F cable of about Sections 3 3 1 9 1 8 m length and 6 3 60C Ethernet Patch cable 2 meters long used for Internet and LAN Sections 3 3 1 9 communications and 6 5 60D USB Cable for direct connection between instrument rear Sections 3 3 1 9 panel USB port and personal computer and 6 6 Concentration Alarm Relay Issues warning when gas concentration exceeds limits set by user 61 Four
110. 0 T300M CO Analyzer EEE INSTRUMENT CHASSIS 1 INSTRUMENT CHASSI 1 SAMPLE GAS INLET EXHAU ST GAS OUTLET GFC Wheel Housing SAMPLE CHAMBER SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR Sample Gas Flow Control Figure 12 12 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Internal Pneumatics with CO Sensor Option 67A 12 2 2 TYPICAL SAMPLE GAS FLOW PROBLEMS 12 2 2 1 FLOW IS ZERO The unit displays a SAMPLE FLOW warning message on the front panel display or the SAMPLE FLOW test function reports a zero or very low flow rate Confirm that the sample gas in connected correctly and is free to flow e Make sure that the unit 15 in basic SAMPLE Mode e Place a finger over an Exhaust outlet on the rear panel of the instrument e If gas is flowing through the analyzer you will feel flow from the Exhaust outlet e Gas bottles are not empty or low e Valves regulators and gas lines are not clogged or dirty 12 2 2 2 LON FLOW 1 Check for leaks as described in Section 11 3 2 Repair the leaking fitting line or valve and re check 2 Check for the sample filter and the orifice filter for dirt Replace filters see 11 3 1 3 Check for partially plugged pneumatic lines or valves Clean or replace them 4 Check for plugged or dirty critical flow orifices Replace them j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 265 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 Ifan IZS option is installed in the instrument p
111. 0 ppm The standard version is designed for positive pressure applications The analyzer may have one or two analysis ranges with or without auto ranging as listed below Alarm relays are included with this version MopEL 7001TA AMBIENT PRESSURE VERSION The Model GFC7001TA CO Analyzer is a touch screen version designed for analyzing the CO concentration in a background gas specified by the customer It has a minimum settable range of 0 1 ppm and a maximum settable range of 0 1000 ppm The TA version is designed for ambient pressure applications The analyzer may have one or two analysis ranges with or without auto ranging as listed below Alarm relays are an optional feature and if included that option will be checked below 7001TU ULTRA Low RANGE VERSION The Model GFC7001TU CO Analyzer is a touch screen version designed for analyzing trace CO concentrations in a background gas specified by the customer It has a minimum settable range of 0 100 ppb and a maximum settable range of 0 100 ppm The TU version is designed for positive pressure applications The analyzer may have one or two analysis ranges with or without auto ranging as listed below Alarm relays are an optional feature and 1f included that option will be checked below POWER REQUIREMENTS This Model GFC 7001T is configured to operate from the following AC Power source 100 120 VAC 60 Hz 220 240 VAC 60 Hz 100v 60 Hz 100 120 VAC
112. 0 to 23 and the minute MM as a number from 00 to 59 ID is the analyzer ID a number with 1 to 4 digits MESSAGE is the message content that may contain warning messages test measurements variable values etc lt CRLF gt is a carriage return line feed pair which terminates the message The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse them into an easy structure Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any information on the time a message was issued hence it is useful to log such messages for trouble shooting and reference purposes Terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal can capture these messages to text files for later review 8 3 REMOTE ACCESS BY MODEM The GFC7001T GFC7001TM can be connected to a modem for remote access This requires a cable between the analyzer s COMM port and the modem typically a DB 9F to DB 25M cable available from TAI with P N WR0000024 Once the cable has been connected check to make sure e The DTE DCE is in the DCE position e The GFC7001T GFC7001 TM COMM port is set for a baud rate that is compatible with the modem e The modem is designed to operate with an 8 bit word length with one stop bit e The MODEM ENABLE communication mode is turned on Mode 64 see Table 6 1 Once this is completed the appropriate setup command line for your modem can be entered into the analyzer The default setting for this feature is
113. 00 T300M CO Analyzer 7 1 9 RS 232 REPORT FUNCTION The DAS can automatically report data to the communications ports where they can be captured with a terminal emulation program or simply viewed by the user using the APICOM software To enable automatic COMM port reporting follow the instruction shown in Section 7 1 4 then press Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 1 800 Use the PREV and PREV INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT NEXT buttons to scroll to the DATA CHANNEL to be SETUP XX CONC edited lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET gt until SETUP X X RS 232 REPORT OFF lt SET SET gt EDIT SETUP X X RS 232 REPORT OFF OFF ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Toggle these buttons m setting to turn the RS 232 ENTR accepts the REPORT feature new setting J ON OFF 7 1 9 1 THE COMPACT REPORT FEATURE When enabled this option avoids unnecessary line breaks on all RS 232 reports Instead of reporting each parameter in one channel on a separate line up to five parameters are reported in one line The COMPACT DATA REPORT generally cannot be accessed from the standard DAS front panel menu but is available via the instrument s communication ports by using APICOM or the analyzer s standard serial data protocol j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 178 DAC and APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 7 1 9 2 THE STARTIN
114. 00 mV 250 mV j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 275 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer e If an internal pump option is installed with the pump energized it should be approximately 200 mV less If the voltage is incorrect then S1 the pressure transducer is bad the board is bad or there is a pneumatic failure preventing the pressure transducer from sensing the absorption cell pressure properly 2 For flow related problems e Measure the voltage across TP2 and TPI it should be 10 0 25 VDC If not then the board is bad e Measure the voltage across and TP1 e With proper flow 800 sccm at the sample inlet this should be approximately 4 5V this voltage will vary with altitude e With flow stopped sample inlet blocked the voltage should be approximately 1V If the voltage is incorrect the flow sensor is bad the board is bad or there is a leak upstream of the sensor 12 5 8 MOTHERBOARD 12 5 8 1 A D FUNCTIONS The simplest method to check the operation of the A to D converter on the motherboard is to use the Signal I O function under the DIAG menu to check the two A D reference voltages and input signals that can be easily measured with a voltmeter 1 Use the Signal I O function see Section 12 1 3 and Appendix A to view the value of REF 4096 MV and REF GND e f both are within 3 mV of nominal 4096 and 0 and are stable 0 5 mV then the bas
115. 0M CO Analyzer 5 9 3 11 ANALOG INPUTS XIN1 XIN8 OPTION CONFIGURATION To configure the analyzer s external analog inputs option define for each channel e gain number of units represented by 1 volt e offset volts e engineering units to be represented in volts each press of the touchscreen button scrolls the list of alphanumeric characters from A Z and 0 9 e whether to display the channel in the Test functions To access and adjust settings for the external Analog Inputs option channels press DIAG ANALOG CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO Press SET gt to scroll to the first lt SET SET gt CAL channel Continue pressing SET gt to view each of 8 channels DIAG AIO XIN1 1 00 0 00 V OFF Press EDIT at any channel to to change Gain Offset Units and whether to display the channel in the Test functions OFF ON lt SET SET gt EDIT DIAG AIO XIN1 GAIN 1 00V V SET gt EDIT DIAG AIO XIN1 OFFSET 0 00V DIAG AIO XIN1 GAIN 1 00V V lt SET SET gt EDIT 0 0 1 0 0 EXIT DIAG AIO XIN1 UNITS V Press to change lt SET SET gt EDIT Gain value DIAG AIO XIN1 DISPLAY OFF Pressing ENTR records the new setting and returns to the previous menu Pressing EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu lt SET EDIT EXIT Figure 5 7 DIAG Analog Inputs Option Configuration Menu 5 9 4
116. 2 A3 and A4 The type of data and electronic performance of these outputs are configurable by the user see Section 5 4 OUTPUT LOOP BACK All four analog outputs are connected back to the A D converter through a loop back circuit This permits the voltage outputs to be calibrated by the CPU without need for any additional tools or fixtures 13 4 5 5 INTERNAL DIGITAL I O This channel is used to communicate digital status and control signals about the operation of key components of the Optical Bench The CPU sends signals to the sync demod board that initiate the ELECTRICAL TEST and DARK CALIBRATION procedures 13 4 5 6 EXTERNAL DIGITAL I O This External Digital I O performs two functions status outputs and control inputs STATUS OUTPUTS Logic Level voltages are output through an optically isolated 8 pin connector located on the rear panel of the analyzer These outputs convey good bad and on off information about certain analyzer conditions They can be used to interface with certain types of programmable devices See Section 3 3 1 4 CONTROL INPUTS By applying 5VDC power supplied from an external source such as a PLC or Data logger See Section 3 3 1 6 Zero and Span calibrations can be initiated by contact closures on the rear panel POWER UP CIRCUIT This circuit monitors the 5V power supply during start up and sets the analog outputs external digital I O ports and I C circuitry to specific values until the CPU bo
117. 232 fixed DB 9 male connector e Baud rate 115200 bits per second baud e Data Bits 8 data bits with 1 stop bit e Parity None e 2 RS 232 configurable to RS 485 DB 9 female connector e Baud rate 19200 bits per second baud e Data Bits 8 data bits with 1 stop bit e Parity None ji Teledyne Analytical Instruments 55 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Note ATTENTION RS 232 MULTIDROP OPTION CONNECTION When the RS 232 Multidrop option is installed connection adjustments and configuration through the menu system are required This section provides instructions for the internal connection adjustments then for external connections and ends with instructions for menu driven configuration Because the RS 232 Multidrop option uses both the RS232 and COM2 DB9 connectors on the analyzer s rear panel to connect the chain of instruments COM2 port is no longer available for separate RS 232 or RS 485 operation COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY Printed Circuit Assemblies PCAs are sensitive to electro static discharges too small to be felt by the human nervous system Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty Refer to Section 14 for more information on preventing ESD damage In each instrument with the Multidrop option there is a shunt jumpering two pins on the serial Multidrop and LVDS printed circuit assembly
118. 3 EPA Calibration Protocol Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE A1 CONC1 50 PPM CO XXXX lt TST TST gt SETUP SAMPLE CO STB XXXX PPB CO XXXX SETUP lt TST TST gt ACTION Allow calibration gas diluted to proper concentration for Midpoint N to enter the sample port SAMPLE COSTB XXXX PPB CO XXXX Wait until STABIL falls below 0 2 PPM for M300E This may take several minutes lt TST TST gt CAL CALS SETUP SPAN CAL M A1 CONC1 50 PPM CO XXXX lt TST TST gt CONC EXIT Press EXIT to Return to the Main SAMPLE Display Set the Display to show the COSTB test function This function calculates the stability of the CO measurement Record the CO reading as displayed on the instrument s front panel Midpoint N 1 to enter the sample ACTION Allow Calibration Gas diluted to proper concentration for port Plot the analyzer responses versus the corresponding calculated concentrations to obtain a calibration relationship Determine the best fit straight line y mx b determined by the method of least squares After the best fit line has been drawn determine whether the analyzer response is linear To be considered linear no calibration point should differ from the best fit line by more than 2 of full scale If carried out carefully the checks described in this section will provide reasona
119. 3 3 2 Particulate Filter sc 53 vee ni e etre a ed ee otn t as elena deste eed re to epus 296 13 3 3 Pnieumatic SenSOEs D re RR EDD M ER ED Enea a aU da O aa NN 297 13 3 3 1 Sample Pressure Sensor 297 13 3 3 2 Sample Flow SONSOR oreet bdo ne tyes E GR ESI D EE ESL IER 297 13 4 Electronic Operation uito Lec an een ende aie Lael aed aga 297 13 4 1 CPU ie DEED ELLE 299 13 4 1 1 Disk On Module enne nennen nnne A nennen nnn enn 299 13 412 Flash Chip i4 Rie ivi ten T bte Ag Meee dey been 299 13 4 2 Optical Bench amp GFC Wheel sss 300 1394 21 Temperature Control tt e tc tO te pde det ends 300 13 42 25 SOUICO pe ee E ated aia ate id En orte oie cult 300 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments xiv Table of ContentsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 1342 5 Wheel peo ed epe te sade loes tte e aed es eee tpe e adage 300 13 4 2 4 IR Photo Detector teet eerte ee tup de tee d etd tide ee ii eee tide ede 302 13 4 3 Synchronous Demodulator Sync Demod Assembly sss 302 13 4 3 1 Signal Synchronization and Demodulation sse eee 303 13 4 3 2 Sync Demod Status LEDS oeseri in onis tre
120. 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Table 3 10 Table 3 11 Table 3 12 Table 3 13 Table 3 14 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 5 9 Table 5 10 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 6 3 Table 6 4 Table 6 5 Table 6 6 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 8 1 Table 8 2 Table 9 1 Table 9 2 Table 9 3 Table 9 4 Table 9 5 Table 10 1 Table 10 2 Table 10 3 Table 11 1 Table 11 2 Table 11 3 Table 12 1 Table 12 2 Table 12 3 Table 12 4 Table 12 5 cc 34 Display Screen and Touch Control Description 37 Rear Panel Description noes oet EG e eei teeta des ee eia naa gae ag ree ces da eee eek korea curanda 40 Analog Input Pin Assignments nennen mener enne enne nnns 45 Analog Output Pin OUtS 4 erre e Lente seen aede epo eae ape Dr eau eda uec 46 Status Output Signals 2 ted ecd edidere pd ie redegi te ved ede ue die ea 49 Control Input Signals ili ed e d eee Edere eder a epe nus 50 Zero Span Valve Operating States for Option 50 65 Zero Span Valve Operating States for Option 50 66 Zero Span Valve Operating States for Option 50 68 Zero Span Valve Operating States for Option 50H
121. 300M CO Analyzer An alternative method for measuring the output of the Current Loop converter is to connect a 250 ohm 1 resistor across the current loop output in lieu of the current meter see Figure 3 9 for pin assignments and diagram of the analog output connector This allows the use of a voltmeter connected across the resistor to measure converter output as VDC or mVDC V OUT VIN ANALYZER Recording Device Figure 5 6 Alternative Setup Using 2500 Resistor for Checking Current Output Signal Levels In this case follow the procedure above but adjust the output for the following values Table 5 8 Current Loop Output Check FS Voltage across Resistor for Voltage across 2 20 mA Resistor for 4 20 mA 0 500 mVDC 1000 mVDC 100 5000 mVDC 5000 mVDC j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 129 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 9 3 8 TURNING AN ANALOG OUTPUT OVER RANGE FEATURE ON OFF In its default configuration a 5 over range is available on each of the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer s analog outputs This over range can be disabled if your recording device is sensitive to excess voltage or current To turn the over range feature on or off select the ANALOG CONFIGURATION submenu see Figure 5 3 then press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET gt CAL EXIT Continue pressi
122. 50 Hz 220 240 VAC 50 Hz C 100v 50 Hz ANALOG OUTPUT SIGNALS Analog output signals are available at Al and A2 on the rear panel This instrument is configured with the following analog outputs A1 4 20 mA A2 0 5V 2 4 20 mA RANGE MODE The analyzer can be designed with a single or dual analysis ranges with auto ranging or dual independent ranges This analyzer is configured with the following range mode Single Range Dual Range Auto ranging Dual Range Independent Low Range Low Range High Range High Range 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments iii Model GFC7001T Carbon Monoxide Analyzer Selected Options for the Model GFC 7001T MOUNTING OPTIONS _ 19 rack mounting with 26 sliders with ears 19 rack mounting with ears only REAR PANEL GAS FITTINGS 1 4 SS Standard 6mm SS Optional VALVE OPTIONS No Valves The standard unit does not include internal span and zero valves Internal Zero Span Valves ALARM RELAYS The standard instrument is equipped with two configurable concentration alarms and one fixed system failure alarm This is an optional feature for GFC 7001TU version The alarm relays for this instrument are configured as Hi Hi Hi and System APCI Configuration AL1 energized when there is no fault detected and de energized in a fault condition AL2 configured as High Range Status and is energized when in high range AL3 configured as Ze
123. 8 1 to output any one of the parameters accessible through the TST TST gt buttons of the units sample display To access these signals attach a strip chart recorder and or data logger to the appropriate analog output connections on the rear panel of the analyzer j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 45 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer ANALOG OUT A1 A2 A3 4 _ Figure 3 9 Analog Output Connector Table 3 5 Analog Output Pin Outs PIN ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE SIGNAL CURRENT SIGNAL 1 V Out Out A1 2 Ground Out 3 V Out Out A2 4 Ground Out 5 A3 V Out Out Only used if CO2 or 6 Sensor is Ground Out installed V Out Out A4 Ground Out 3 3 1 4 CURRENT LOOP ANALOG OUTPUTS OPTION 41 SETUP If your analyzer had this option installed at the factory there are no further connections to be made Otherwise it can be installed as a retrofit for each of the analog outputs of the analyzer This option converts the DC voltage analog output to a current signal with 0 20 mA output current The outputs can be scaled to any set of limits within that 0 20 mA range However most current loop applications call for either 2 20 mA or 4 20 mA range Figure 3 10 provides installation instructions and illustrates a sample combination of one current output and two voltage outputs configuration Following Fig
124. A2 A3 A4 LOW range when DUAL HIGH range when DUAL mode is selected mode is selected Figure 5 1 Analog Output Connector Pin Out The outputs can be configured either at the factory or by the user for full scale outputs of 0 1 VDC IVDC 5VDC or 10VDC Additionally 1 A2 and may be equipped with optional 0 20 mADC current loop drivers and configured for any current output within that range e g 0 20 2 20 4 20 etc The user may also adjust the signal level and scaling of the actual output voltage or current to match the input requirements of the recorder or datalogger See Section 5 9 3 9 In its basic configuration the A1 and A2 channels output a signal that is proportional to the CO concentration of the sample gas Several modes are available which allow them to operate independently or be slaved together See Section 5 4 3 EXAMPLE 1 OUTPUT Output Signal 0 5 VDC representing 0 1000 ppm concentration values A2 OUTPUT Output Signal 0 10 VDC representing 0 500 ppm concentration values Output A3 is only active if the CO or sensor option is installed In this case a signal representing the currently measured CO or O concentration is output on this channel The output labeled A4 is special It can be set by the user See Section 5 9 8 1 to output several of the test functions accessible through the lt TST TST gt buttons of the units sample display 5 4 2 PHYSICAL RANGE VS AN
125. ALOG OUTPUT REPORTING RANGES Functionally the GFC7001T Family of CO Analyzers have one hardware PHYSICAL RANGE that is capable of determining CO concentrations between across a very wide array of values j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 95 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Note Table 5 1 GFC7001T Family Physical Range by Model MODEL RANGE GFC7001T 0 1000 ppm GFC7001TM 0 5000 ppm This architecture improves reliability and accuracy by avoiding the need for extra switchable gain amplification circuitry Once properly calibrated the analyzer s front panel will accurately report concentrations along the entire span of its physical range Because many applications use only a small part of the analyzer s full physical range this can create data resolution problems for most analog recording devices For example in an application where an GFC7001T is being used to measure an expected concentration of typically less than 50 ppm CO the full scale of expected values is only 4 of the instrument s full 1000 ppm measurement range Unmodified the corresponding output signal would also be recorded across only 2 596 of the range of the recording device The GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzers solve this problem by allowing the user to select a scaled reporting range for the analog outputs that only includes that portion of the physical range relevant to the specific application Only this REPORTI
126. ANGE XXX X PPM CO XX XX lt IST TST gt CAL MSG SETUP MSG returns the active warnings to the message field SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET CO XX XX TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP Press CLR to clear the current the last warning If more than one warning is has been cleared the A active the next message will take RANGE function will STANDBY RANGE 50 0PPB its place until all are cleareg be displayed L TEST CAL SETUP Table 3 13 lists brief descriptions of the warning messages that may occur during start up Table 3 13 Possible Warning Messages at Start Up Message MEANING ANALOG CAL WARNING The instrument s A D circuitry or one of its analog outputs is not calibrated BENCH TEMP WARNING Optical bench temperature is outside the specified limits The temperature inside the GFC7001T GFC7001TM chassis is outside the BOX TEMP WARNING specified limits CANNOT DYN SPAN2 Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was set to turned on CANNOT DYN ZERO Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was set to turned on CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration was reset to factory defaults or was erased DATA INITIALIZED DAS data storage was erased Photometer temperature outside of warning limits specified by FHOTOMEMP WARNING PHOTO_TEMP_SET variable REAR BOARD NOT DET Motherboard was not detected during power up REL
127. ARS DIAG EXIT COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID INET COM1 COM2 SETUP X X 1 MODE O lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT COM1 BAUD RATE 115200 lt SET SET gt EDIT Toggle these buttons SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU Select to cycle through the COM1B COMM available Baud rates te 300 PREV NEXT ID INET COM1 COM2 1200 Le a o 4800 9600 SETUP X X COM1 MODE 0 19200 1 B 38400 PREV NEXT 57600 7 SET gt EDIT 115200 o il ENTR accepts the new setting J SETUP X X COM1 BAUD RATE 19200 lt SET SET gt EDIT Figure 6 2 6 2 3 COM PORT TESTING SETUP X X COM TEST PORT The serial ports can be teste enu This test sends a string of 254 lt SET est is running the red LED labeled TX for that COWvt portoun the instrument s rear panel analyzer should flicker Test runs SETUP X X TRANSMITTING TO COM1 M EXIT ret automatically COMM lt SET TEST Figure 6 3 COMM COM1 Test Port j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 142 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 6 3 RS 232 The RS232 and COM2 communications COMM ports operate on the RS 232 protocol default configuration Possible configurations for these two COMM ports are summarized as follows e RS232 port can also be configured to operate in single or RS 232 Multidrop mode Option 62 refer to Sections 3 3 1 9 and 5 7 1 e port can be left in its default configuration for standard RS 232 operation including multidr
128. AS and CO REF Test Functions via the Front Panel Display The detector cooler control circuit can fail for reasons similar to the detector itself failing Symptoms would be a change in MR RATIO Test Function when zero air is being sampled Also check the SIGNAL I O parameter PHT DRIVE e After warm up and at 25 C ambient if PHT DRIVE lt 4800 mV the cooler is working properly e IfPHT DRIVE is gt 4800 mV there is a malfunction e The 5 and 15 VDC voltages in the GFC7001T GFC7001TM are provided by switching power supplies e Switch mode supplies create DC outputs by switching the input AC waveform at high frequencies e As the components in the switcher age and degrade the main problem observed is increased noise on the DC outputs e fanoisy switcher power supply is suspected attach an oscilloscope to the DC output test points located on the top right hand edge of the Relay board e Look for short period spikes gt 100 mV p p on the DC output j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 270 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 5 SUBSYSTEM CHECKOUT The preceding subsections discussed a variety of methods for identifying possible sources of failures or performance problems within the analyzer In most cases this included a list of possible causes If the problem is not resolved at this point the next step is to check the subsystems This subsection describes how to determine wh
129. AT DATA AVAILABLE PREV NEXT VIEW SETUP X X 101 22 00 CONC 1239 1 PPM PV10 PREV SETUP X X 101 19 45 SLOPE1 0 997 PV10 PREV NEXT PRM gt SETUP 102 04 55 SLOPE1 1 002 SETUPXX 10 19 45 OFFSET 13 PV10 PREV NX10 NEXT lt PRM PRM gt PV10 PREV lt PRM PRM Continue pressing NEXT to view remaining DAS channels j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 168 DAC APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 7 1 4 EDITING DAS CHANNELS DAS configuration is most conveniently done through the APICOM remote control program The following list of button strokes shows how to edit the DAS using the front panel SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE Main iDAS Menu SETUP X X DATA ACQUISITION DAS EDIT Control Button Functions FUNCTION VIEW EDIT SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 Inserts a new data channel into the list BEFORE the selected channel DEL Deletes the currently selected data channel EDIT Enters EDIT mode Exports the configuration of all data channels to the PRINT RS 232 interface Buttons only appear when applicable 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT EDIT Channel Menu SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 1 800 NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Enters EDIT mode for the selected channel When editing the data channels the top line of the display indicates some of the configuration pa
130. ATION Source of Sample and cal gas input to be a fraction SAMPLE GAS pressum Calibrated Removed during of a PSI above atm CO Gas calibration at span gas concentration MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator EXHAUST GFC 7001T Figure 3 18 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Bottled Span Gas Source of Sample and cal gas input SAMPLE GAS LL u pressure to be a fraction Calibrated Removed during t of a PSI above atm CO Gas Model 700 Gas calbration at span gas Dilution i Calibrator MODEL 701 2 7001T Figure 3 19 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Gas Dilution Calibrator SAMPLE GAS SOURCE Attach a sample inlet line to the SAMPLE inlet port The sample input line should not be more than 2 meters long j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 61 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer e Maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should not exceed 1 5 in hg above ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure e In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold a vent must be placed on the sample gas before it enters the analyzer CALIBRATION GAS SOURCES The source of calibration gas is also attached to the SAMPLE inlet but only when a calibration operation is actually being performed The calibration gases should be available to the analyzer at the same
131. AY BOARD WARN CPU is unable to communicate with the relay PCA SAMPLE FLOW WARN The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits SAMPLE PRESS WARN Sample pressure outside of operational parameters SAMPLE TEMP WARN The temperature of the sample gas is outside the specified limits SOURCE WARNING The IR source may be faulty SYSTEM RESET The computer was rebooted WHEEL TEMP WARNING The Gas Filter Correlation Wheel temperature is outside the specified limits j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 73 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Message MEANING Typically clears 45 minutes after power up Clears the next time successful zero calibration is performed Clears the next time successful span calibration is performed Table 3 14 lists brief descriptions of the warning messages that may occur during start up for GFC7001T analyzers with optional second gas options or alarms installed Table 3 14 Possible Startup Warning Messages GFC7001T Analyzers with Options Message Meaning 1 O sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits specified by 02 CECETEMP WARN O2 CELL SET variable IZS TEMP WARNING On units with IZS options installed The permeation tube temperature is outside of specified limits O2 ALARM 1 WARN O Alarm limit 1 has been triggered O2 ALARM 2 WARN O Alarm limit 2 has been triggered CO2 ALARM 1 WAR
132. Any transmissions sent to devices with different subnets are assumed to be outside of the LAN and are routed through the gateway computer onto the Internet 3000 This number defines the terminal control port by which the TCP PORT instrument is addressed by terminal emulation software such as Internet or Teledyne s APICOM j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 144 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer PROPERTY DEFAULT STATE DESCRIPTION initially blank The name by which your analyzer will appear when HOST NAME y addressed from other computers on the LAN or via the Internet To change see Section 6 5 3 not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne Customer Service personnel DHCP ON is default setting Skip this step if it has been setto OFF Pressing EXIT froi SETUBXX ZCOMMUNIGATIONS MENU Internet Configuration Button Functions BUTTON FUNCTION B INET m 0 Location of cursor Press to cycle through the range of numerals and available characters 0 9 amp CH CH Moves the cursor one character left or right SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 Deletes a character at the cursor location 8 1 8 ENTR Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu DHCP ON Some buttons appear only when r
133. CO2 Sensor Stability Function ssssseeeeem memes 224 9 7 2 4 CO2 Zero Span Calibration eseesssssssssssssseseseeeeenee eren nnne enmt sn enn n nnne nn eent 225 10 EPA CALIBRATION PROTOGOL 25 55 era posa r aco Sas ooe apap 226 10 1 Calibration Requirements cccccssssecsssessecsssseseccssessseceseessecsesensecsseensecesesssecesessseeceseenseceessseeeseeneeess 226 10 1 1 Calibration of Equipment General Guidelines sss 226 10 1 2 Calibration Equipment Supplies and Expendables sssssssssssenee 227 10 1 2 1 Data Recording enne enn 227 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments xii Table of ContentsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 10 1 2 2 Spare Parts and Expendable 227 10 1 3 Recommended Standards for Establishing 228 10 1 4 Calibration 2 send see cit eid le di cod de cea ENA Eo dd 229 10 1 5 Level 1 Calibrations versus Level 2 Checks eene eren 229 10 2 ZERO and SPAN CRhOeCKS nitet tt e RU de ate d tede Rer ad e da
134. CTION External Communication Used to set up and operate the analyzer s various serial Channel Confiauration COMM channels including RS 232 RS 485 modem communication 5 7 9 Ethernet and or USB Used to view various variables related to the instruments current operational status System Status Variables VARS e Changes made to any variable are not recorded in the 5 8 instrument s memory until the ENTR button is pressed e Pressing the EXIT button ignores the new setting Used to access a variety of functions that are used to configure System Diagnostic Features test or diagnose problems with a variety of the analyzer s basic and DIAG systems 5 9 Analog Output Configuration Most notably the menus used to configure the output signals generated by the instruments Analog outputs are located here Alarm Limit Configuration ALRM Used to turn the instrument s two alarms on and off as well as 5 10 set the trigger limits for each Alarm warnings only present when optional alarm package is activated IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Any changes made to a variable during the SETUP procedures are not acknowledged by the instrument until the ENTR button is pressed If the EXIT button is pressed before the ENTR button the analyzer will beep alerting the user that the newly entered value has not been accepted j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 92 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyze
135. D dede 74 9 44 Initial Calibration eco t tenere et Pete deer EH EO EDU GI eed Pave tee eR Drive dde Ee es 75 3 4 4 1 Interferents for CO nennen emen nennen nennen nennen 76 3 4 4 2 Initial Calibration Procedure eet egeret iit ere 76 3 4 4 3 Sensor Calibration Procedure cccccccccccccccececececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseneenes 81 3 4 4 4 Sensor Calibration Procedure cccccccccccccecececececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenss 81 PART Il OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS eeeeesissesseseeeeee 83 4 OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES nennen nnnn nnn nnn nnn nn nennen 85 4 1 Sample Mode Ra e LU a do tee edet eee 86 41 1 Test FUNCIONS csent aaien eaa oet ipa nuns anda eater Date de ane dade de aden 86 4 12 Warming Messages ide inaug Oeo do ae Race pe bed e aL Cea eq cete de e eue acea 88 4 2 Calibration Ode ctia eder obedit tnt etin ee a 90 4 3 S 6t p MODE ca eeu HERUM PREMIERE i 91 4 3 1 Password Security 5 3 Reed eee n e EE ADR ERR A REP Pede Presa Pe sane ha e etia Rr Rude nid 91 4 3 2 Pnmary Setup Menu iot p CR Ee eror andre e eer doc Debe e ette Pee ee 91 4 3 3 Secondary Setup Menu SETUP MORE sssssssseeene nennen nennen n
136. D CD ROM drives 4 Floppy disk controllers G3 Floppy disk drives IDE ATA ATAPI controllers y Keyboards Mice and other pointing devices Monitors BB Network adapters Y Ports COM amp LPT E Communications Port COM1 Printer Port LPT1 X888 Processors Sound video and game controllers System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers Refer to the Quick Start Direct Cable Connection section of the Teledyne APIcom Manual PN 07463 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 148 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 settings Baud Rate 115200 COM2 Mode Settings In the instrument s SETUP gt MORE gt COMM gt COM2 menu make the following OFF Quiet Mode ON Computer Mode ON MODBUS RTUOFF MODBUS ASCII OFF E 8 1 MODE OFF E 7 1 MODE OFF RS 485 MODE OFF SECURITY MODE OFF MULTIDROP MODE OFF ENABLE MODEM OFF ERROR CHECKING ON XON XOFF HANDSHAKE HARDWARE HANDSHAKE OFF HARDWARE FIFO ON COMMAND PROMPT OFF 6 Next configure your communications software such as APIcom Use the COM port determined in Step 4 and the baud rate set in Step 5 The figures below show how these parameters would be configured in the Instrument Properties window in APIcom when configuring a new instrument See the APIcom manual PN 07463 for more details Instrument Properties Code Activated Swich Basic lnstrumert Name Lo Instrument ID Instrument
137. D is enabled or disabled a password default 818 is required to enter the VARS or DIAG menus in the SETUP gt MORE menu Table 5 2 Password Levels PASSWORD LEVEL MENU ACCESS ALLOWED Null 000 All functions of the main menu top level or Primary menu Configuration Maintenance Access to Primary and Secondary SETUP Menus when PASSWORD is enabled 818 Configuration Maintenance Access to Secondary SETUP Submenus VARS and DIAG whether PASSWORD is enabled or disabled To enable or disable passwords press j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 105 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Toggle this button to enable disable password feasture Y SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX SETUP lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SYSTEM PASSWORD ENABLE OFF OFF ENTR EXIT SETUP X X PASSWORD ENABLE ON EXIT discards the new setting ON ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting J If the password feature is enabled then when entering either Calibration or Setup Mode the default password displayed will be 000 and the new password must be input Example If all passwords are enabled the following control button sequence would be required to enter the SETUP menu j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 106 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Note SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt
138. DES Either of the analyzer s serial ports RS232 on rear panel can be configured to operate in a number of different modes which are described in Table 6 1 As modes are selected the analyzer sums the mode ID numbers and displays this combined 9i Teledyne Analytical Instruments CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer number on the front panel display For example if quiet mode 01 computer mode 02 and Multidrop Enabled mode 32 are selected the analyzer would display a combined MODE ID of 35 Table 6 1 COMM Port Communication Modes MODE ID DESCRIPTION Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the analyzer such as warning messages to UIET 1 the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating with a computer Q program where such intermittent messages might cause communication problems Such feedback is still available but a command must be issued to receive them COMPUTER 2 Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is communicating with a computer operated control program HESSEN 16 The Hessen communications protocol is used in some European countries TAI P N PROTOCOL 02252 contains more information on this protocol E 8 1 8192 When turned on this mode switches the COMM port settings from Su NO PARITY 8 data bits 1 stop bit to EVEN PARITY 8 data bits 1 stop bit E 7 1 2048 When tur
139. Day Month amp Year Format DD MON YY j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 211 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Toggle buttons to set time Format HH MM This is a 24 hr clock PM hours are 13 24 Example 2 15 PM 14 15 Toggle buttons to set number of days between procedures 1 365 Toggle buttons to set delay time for each iteration of the sequence HH MM 0 24 00 STARTING DATE SETUP STARTING DATE 04 SEP 08 CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP X X STARTING TIME 00 00 lt SET SET gt EDIT SETUP STARTING TIME 00 00 4 1 4 11 5 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X STARTING TIME 14 15 SET SET EDIT EXIT a SETUP X X DELTA DAYS 1 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP X X DELTA DAYS 1 0 0 2 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X DELTA DAYS 2 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP X X DELTA ess SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP DELTA TIME 00 00 0 0 3 0 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X DELTA TIME 00 30 SET SET EDIT CONTINUE NEXT PAGE With DURATION TIME j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 212 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Note CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE DELTA TIME SETUP DURATION 15 0 MINUTES
140. ESSAGES and take corrective action as necessary 2 Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values Note any major deviations from the factory values and take corrective action 3 Use the internal electronic status LEDs to determine whether the electronic communication channels are operating properly e Verify that the DC power supplies are operating properly by checking the voltage test points on the relay PCA e Note that the analyzer s DC power wiring is color coded and these colors match the color of the corresponding test points on the relay PCA 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 1 1 4 SUSPECT A LEAK FIRST e Customer service data indicate that the majority of all problems are eventually traced to leaks in the internal pneumatics of the analyzer or the diluent gas and source gases delivery systems e Check for gas flow problems such as clogged or blocked internal external gas lines damaged seals punctured gas lines a damaged malfunctioning pumps if equipped etc 5 Follow the procedures defined in Section 12 5 to confirm that the analyzer s vital functions are working power supplies CPU relay PCA touchscreen PMT cooler etc e See Figure 3 6 for the general layout of components and sub assemblies in the analyzer e See the wiring interconnect diagram and interconnect list in Appendix D FAUL
141. ETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X X RANGE CONTROL MENU MODE SET UNIT DIL SETUP X X RANGE MODE SNGL SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT See section on See section on See section on Single Range Dual Range Auto Range Mode SNGL Mode DUAL Mode AUTO Upper span limit setting for the individual range modes are shared Resetting the span limit in one mode also resets the span limit for the corresponding range in the other modes as follows SNGL DUAL AUTO Range gt Rangel gt Low Range Range2 2 High Range j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 97 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 4 3 1 SINGLE RANGE MODE SNGL Single Range Mode SNGL is the default reporting range mode for the analyzer When the single range mode is selected SNGL all analog CO concentration outputs A1 and A2 are slaved together and set to the same reporting range limits e g 500 0 ppb The span limit of this reporting range can be set to any value within the physical range of the analyzer Although both outputs share the same concentration reporting range the electronic signal ranges of the analog outputs may still be configured for different values e g 0 5 VDC 0 10 VDC etc see Section 5 9 3 1 To select SNGL range mode and to set the upper limit of the range press SAMPLE RANGE 50 00 PPB CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS
142. F DAY CLOCK EXIT returns to TIME DATE SETUP X X display 5 6 1 2 ADJUSTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK S SPEED In order to compensate for CPU clocks which run faster or slower you can adjust a variable called CLOCK_ADJ to speed up or slow down the clock by a fixed amount every day The CLOCK AD variable is accessed via the VARS submenu To change the value of this variable press j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 108 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP X X ENTER SETUP PASS 0 8 1 8 SETUP X X 0 DAS_HOLD_OFF 15 0 Minutes PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT ENTR EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until SETUP X X 4 CLOCK_ADJUST 0 Sec Day PREV NEXT EDIT ENTR EXIT 4 CLOCK_ADJUST 0 Sec Day EDIT ENTR EXIT Enter sign and number of seconds per day the clock gains or loses SETUP X X 4 CLOCK ADJUST 0 Sec Day PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting 7 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 109 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 7 SETUP gt COMM COMMUNICATIONS PORTS This section introduces the communications setup menu Section 6 provides the setup instructions and operation information Press SETUP gt ENTR gt MORE gt COMM to arrive at the communications me
143. FC7001T GFC7001TM Internal Gas Flow Diagrams eem 262 12 2 2 Typical Sample Gas Flow 265 12 2 2 1 ZelOsz Seen ep aene mene RI LE 265 12 2 2 2 LOWE OW orem niece coder ett ees teeta teo e Reset eene ERR RE eb ta eue ae eb d nno oae Se 265 12 2 2 3 HIghi ROW ttt hotte eoe D nhe du cse LEE 266 12 2 2 4 Displayed Flow Warnings enm nennen enr nennen enn 266 12 2 2 5 Actual Flow Does Not Match Displayed Flow 266 12 3 Calibration Probl ts oreo 5 er eicit ede ERU ed YS 266 12 3 17 rr erede lee ere ter He eo e eoe e uei ed ee gut dva Ue N de UM e os 266 12 3 2 Non Repeatable Zero and eere 267 12 3 3 Inability to Span No SPAN Button CALS nenne eren 267 12 3 4 Inability to Zero No ZERO Button CALZ ssssssssesseeee 267 12 4 Other Performance Problems a 268 124 1 Temperature Problems ss n eter eco oa ere reta a e eeu ed Ae 268 12 4 1 1 Box or Sample Temperature 268 12 4 1 2 Bench Temperature inier E re t aoa be Cae der oii i esc eet
144. FEATURES Some of the common features of your GFC7001T family of analyzers include LCD color graphics with touch screen interface Microprocessor controlled for versatility Multi tasking software allows viewing of test variables during operation Continuous self checking with alarms Bi directional USB RS 232 and 10 100Base T Ethernet ports for remote operation optional RS 485 Front panel USB ports for peripheral devices and software downloads Digital status outputs indicate instrument operating condition Adaptive signal filtering optimizes response time Gas Filter Correlation GFC Wheel for CO specific measurement GFC Wheel guaranteed against leaks for 5 years Temperature and pressure compensation Comprehensive internal data logging with programmable averaging periods Remote operation when used with TAI s APICOM software GFC7001T FEATURES Ranges 0 1 ppm to 0 1000 ppm user selectable 14 meter path length for sensitivity GFC7001TM FEATURES Ranges 0 1 ppm Max 0 5000 ppm user selectable 2 5 meter path length for dynamic range 1 3 GFC7001T GFC7001TM DOCUMENTATION In addition to this operation manual part number M90914 two other manuals are available for download from Teledyne s website at http www teledyne api com manuals to support the operation of this instrument e APICOM software manual part number 07463 e DAS Manual part number 02837 1 4 OPTIONS The options available for your ana
145. FF an AutoCal see Section 9 4 Dynamic span automatically adjusts the offsets and slopes of 3 DYN SPAN 1 the CO response when performing a slope calibration during ON OFF an AutoCal see Section 9 4 Adjusts the speed of the analyzer s clock Choose the 60 to 60 CLOCK ADJ sign if the clock is too slow choose the sign if the clock is too fast 2 Selects which gas measurement is displayed when the STABI 5 STABIL GAS est function is selected CO CO2 amp O2 co 1 Use of the DYN_ZERO and DYN_SPAN features are not allowed for applications requiring EPA equivalency 2 This VARS only appears if either the optional O2 or CO sensors are installed IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA There are more VARS available when using the password 929 for configuration Use caution when pressing any buttons while in this setup Any changes made may alter the performance of the instrument or cause the instrument to not function properly Note that if there is an accidental change to a setup parameter press EXIT to discard the changes j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 111 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer To access and navigate the VARS menu use the following button sequence SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPM CO XXXX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP Concentration display continuously cycles through all gasses SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU In all
146. Figure 9 8 CO Sensor Calibration Set Up CO SENSOR ZERO GAS TAI recommends using pure N when calibration the zero point of your sensor option CO SENSOR SPAN GAS TAI recommends using 16 CO in N when calibration the span point of your sensor option Table 3 12 is 20 9 7 2 2 SET CO2 SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION Set the expected CO span gas concentration This should be equal to the percent concentration of the CO span gas of the selected reporting range default factory setting 12 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 222 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM lt TST TST gt CAL GAS TO CAL CO 02 GAS CAL 02 02 XX XX CAL RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT M P CAL C O2 SPAN CONC 12 00 0 2 0 The span concentration value automatically defaults to 12 96 If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being used toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration of the calibration gases EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous display ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 223 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 7 2 3 ACTIVATE CO2 SENSOR STABILITY FUNCTION To change the stability test function from CO concentration to the CO sen
147. G DATE FEATURE This option allows the user to specify a starting date for any given channel in case the user wants to start data acquisition only after a certain time and date If the STARTING DATE is in the past the default condition the DAS ignores this setting and begins recording data as defined by the REPORT PERIOD setting The STARTING DATE generally cannot be accessed from the standard DAS front panel menu but is available via the instrument s communication ports by using APICOM or the analyzer s standard serial data protocol 7 1 10 DISABLING ENABLING DATA CHANNELS Data channels can be temporarily disabled which can reduce the read write wear on the Disk on Module To disable a data channel follow the instruction shown in Section 7 1 4 then press Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 1 800 Use the PREV and PREV MEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT NEXT bttons to scroll to the DATA CHANNEL to be SETUP CONC edited lt SET SET gt EDIT PRNT EXIT Continue pressing SET gt until SETUP X X CHANNEL ENABLE ON lt SET SET gt EDIT SETUP X X CHANNEL ENABLE ON ON ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting Toggle these buttons ENTR accepts the new setting 7 to enable or disable the CHANNEL j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 179 DAC and APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 7 1 11 HOLDOFF FEATURE The DAS HOLDOFF
148. GURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO A OUTS CALIBRATED NO lt SET SET gt CAL EXIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 1 5V OVR NOCAL Adjusts the signal output SET SET gt EDIT EXIT for Analog Output A1 DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 5V OVR NOCAL Adjusts the signal output SET SET EDIT EXIT for Analog Output A2 DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT 5V OVR NOCAL lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED NO lt SET SET gt CAL EXIT DIAG AIO XIN1 1 00 0 00 V OFF lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SET gt scrolls to XIN2 through XIN8 Figure 5 3 Accessing the Analog I O Configuration Submenus j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 118 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 9 3 1 ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE CURRENT RANGE SELECTION In its standard configuration each of the analog outputs is set to output a 0 5 VDC signals Several other output ranges are available Each range has is usable from 5 to 5 of the rated span Table 5 6 Analog Output Voltage Ranges RANGE NAME RANGE SPAN MINIMUM OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT 0 1V 0 100 mVDC 5 mVDC 105 mVDC 1V 0 1 VDC 0 05 VDC 1 05 VDC 5V 0 5 VDC 0 25 VDC 5 25 VDC 10V 0 10 VDC 0 5 VDC 10 5 VDC The default offset for all VDC ranges is 0 5 VDC CURR 0 20 mA 0 mA 20 mA While these are the physical limits of the current loop modules typical applications use 2 20 or 4 20 mA for the lower and upper limits Please specify desired range when ordering this option
149. Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer ALARM 1 ALARM 2 ALARM 3 ALARM 4 regum npxnpdeemum _ f eN NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC Figure 3 13 Concentration Alarm Relay Alarm 1 System OK 2 Alarm 2 Cone 1 Alarm 3 Cone 2 Alarm 4 Range Bit ALARM 1 RELAY Alarm 1 which is System OK 2 system OK 1 is the status bit is in the energized state when the instrument is OK amp there are no warnings If there is a warning active or if the instrument is put into the DIAG mode Alarm 1 will change states This alarm has reverse logic meaning that if you put a meter across the Common amp Normally Closed pins on the connector you will find that it is OPEN when the instrument is OK This is so that if the instrument should turn off or lose power it will change states and you can record this with a data logger or other recording device ALARM 2 RELAY amp ALARM 3 RELAY Alarm 2 relay is associated with the Concentration Alarm 1 set point in the software Alarm 3 Relay is associated with the Concentration Alarm 2 set point in the software Alarm 2 Relay CO Alarm 1 xxx PPM Alarm 3 Relay CO Alarm 2 xxx PPM Alarm 2 Relay CO Alarm 1 xxx PPM Alarm 3 Relay CO Alarm 2 xxx PPM The Alarm 2 Relay will be turned on any time the concentration set point is exceeded amp will return to its normal state when the concentration val
150. ME HH MM SS for instructions for connecting these gas sources The initial calibration should be carried out using the same reporting range set up as used during the analyzer s factory calibration This will allow you to compare your calibration results to the factory calibration as listed on the Final Test and Validation Data Sheet If both available DAS parameters for a specific gas type are being reported via the instruments analog outputs e g CONCI and CONC2 when the DUAL range mode is activated separate calibrations should be carried out for each parameter e Use the LOW button when calibrating for CONCI equivalent to RANGEL e Use the HIGH button when calibrating for CONC2 equivalent to RANGE2 NOTE The following procedure assumes that the instrument does not have any of the available Valve Options installed See Section 9 3 for instructions j Teledyne Analytical Instruments Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer for calibrating instruments that have valve options 3 4 4 1 INTERFERENTS FOR CO MEASUREMENTS It should be noted that the gas filter correlation method for detecting CO is subject to interference from a number of other gases that absorb IR in a similar fashion to CO Most notable of these are water vapor CO NO nitrous oxide and CH methane The GFC7001T GFC7001TM has been successfully tested for its ability to reject interference from of these sources
151. Mode front panel display being updated DAS hold off mode is ON DAS disabled Off Auto Cal disabled CAL Yellow On Auto Cal enabled Blinking Unit is in calibration mode FAULT off warnings exist Blinking Warnings exist Gana Displays the actual concentration of the sample gas currently being measured by the analyzer in the currently selected units of measure Displays the name of the analyzer s current operating mode Displays a variety of informational messages such as warning messages operational data test function values and response messages during interactive tasks Control Buttons Displays dynamic context sensitive labels on each button which is blank when inactive until applicable Figure 3 3 shows how the front panel display is mapped to the menu charts that are illustrated throughout this manual The Mode Param parameters and Conc gas concentration fields in the display screen are represented across the top row of each menu chart The eight touch control buttons along the bottom of the display screen are represented in the bottom row of each menu chart j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 37 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Menu Chart Layout Param 9 870 PPM Menu Chart Representing Display Example SAMPLE RANGE 50 000 PPM 2 9 870 PPM lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP Figure 3 3 Display Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts N
152. N CO Alarm limit 1 has been triggered CO2 ALARM 2 WARN CO Alarm limit 2 has been triggered SO2 ALARM1 WARN SO Alarm limit 1 has been triggered SO2 ALARM2 WARN SO Alarm limit 2 has been triggered 1 Only appears when the optional sensor is installed Only appears when the optional internal zero span IZS option is installed 3 Only appears when the optional CO2 sensor is installed 4 Only Appears when the optional gas concentration alarms are installed 3 4 3 FUNCTIONAL CHECKS After the analyzer s components have warmed up for at least 60 minutes verify that the software properly supports any hardware options that were installed navigate through the analyzer s software menus see the menu trees described in Appendix A Then check to make sure that the analyzer is functioning within allowable operating parameters e Appendix C includes a list of test functions viewable from the analyzer s front panel as well as their expected values e These functions are also useful tools for diagnosing performance problems with your analyzer see Section 12 1 2 e The enclosed Final Test and Validation Data Sheet P N 04271 lists these values as they were before the instrument left the factory To view the current values of these parameters press the following control button sequence on the analyzer s front panel Remember that until the unit has completed its warm up these parameters may not hav
153. ND lt CR gt Where X is the command type one letter that defines the type of command Allowed designators are listed in Appendix A 6 ID is the machine identification number Section 5 7 1 Example the Command 700 followed by a carriage return would print the list of available commands for the revision of software currently installed in the instrument assigned ID Number 700 COMMAND 15 the command designator This string is the name of the command being issued LIST ABORT NAME EXIT etc Some commands may have additional arguments that define how the command is to be executed Press lt CR gt or refer to Appendix A 6 for a list of available command designators lt CR gt is a carriage return All commands must be terminated by a carriage return usually achieved by pressing the ENTER button on a computer Table 8 2 Teledyne s Serial I O Command Types COMMAND COMMAND TYPE j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 186 Remote OperationTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Calibration Diagnostic Logon Test measurement Variable S lt alrjojo Warning 8 2 1 3 DATA TYPES Data types consist of integers hexadecimal integers floating point numbers Boolean expressions and text strings Integer data Used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records a filter length etc e They consist of an optional plus or minus sign
154. NET Section 3 3 1 9 Option for external voltage signals from other instrumentation and for logging these ANALOG IN signals Section 3 3 1 2 USB Connector for direct connection to laptop computer using USB cable Section 3 3 1 9 3 2 3 GFC7001T GFC7001TM ANALYZER LAYOUT Figure 3 5 shows the GFC7001T internal layout 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 40 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Optional AUX I O PCA H DOM w Software 9 i Of pe CPU PCA Log B SS SLY i Motherboard 7 il Optional 4 20mA Current Output Optical Bench Gas Outlet a Sensor Assy Relay Board PCA P Suppl Optional CO Scrubber 5181 sv Optional Shut Off Valve Power Supply 12V Flow Sensor Assyr T 1 ump ASSy if equipped Optional 24 SOH Pump Assy Optional Zero Span Valve 800cc Flow Optional Sample Cal Valve Control Assy Optical Bench Gas Inlet IR Source Sync Demod PCA GFC Motor Hub Assy Interface PCA LCD Module I Sample Filter ZN On Off Switch __ ei Touchscreen Control Module e Figure 3 5 Internal Layout GFC7001T ji Teledyne Analytical Instruments 41 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Figure 3 6 shows the GFC7001TM internal layout Optional AUX I O PCA DOM w Software CPU PCA Motherboard PCA Optical Benc
155. NG RANGE of the analog outputs is scaled the physical range of the analyzer and the readings displayed on the front panel remain unaltered Neither the DAS values stored in the CPU s memory nor the concentration values reported on the front panel are affected by the settings chosen for the reporting range s of the instrument 5 4 3 REPORTING RANGE MODES SINGLE DUAL AUTO RANGES The GFC7001T GFC7001TM provides three analog output range modes to choose from e Single range SNGL mode sets a single maximum range for the analog output If single range is selected both outputs are slaved together and will represent the same measurement span e g 0 50 ppm however their electronic signal levels may be configured for different ranges e g 0 10 VDC vs 0 1 VDC e Dual range DUAL allows the Al and A2 outputs to be configured with different measurement spans as well as separate electronic signal levels e Auto range AUTO mode gives the analyzer to ability to output data via a low range and high range When this mode is selected the analyzer will automatically switch between the two ranges dynamically as the concentration value fluctuates Range status is also output via the external digital I O status outputs See Section 3 3 1 4 To select the Analog Output Range Type press j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 96 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE 50 00 PPB CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL S
156. NTR EXIT NEXT to cycle through the signal types DIAG I O 4 EXT_SPAN_CAL OFF PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT Press JUMP to go directly to a specific signal see Appendix A for a list DIAG I O JUMPTO 0 of all VO SIGNALS 0 0 JUMP ENTR EXIT Cd Toggle to set location No of the EXAMPLE signal to JUMP to DIAG I O JUMPTO 22 2 2 JUMP ENTR EXIT DIAG I O 22 RELAY WATCHDOG ON PREV NEXT JUMP OFF PRNT EXI On status signals this Pressing PRNT will send a formatted button toggles the printout to the serial port and can be signal ON OFF captured with a computer or other output device 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 115 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 9 2 ANALOG OUTPUT Analog Output is used as a step test to check the accuracy and proper operation of the analog outputs The test forces all four analog output channels to produce signals ranging from 0 to 100 of the full scale range in 20 increments This test is useful to verify the operation of the data logging recording devices attached to the analyzer See also Section 12 5 8 2 Access the Analog Output Step Test from the DIAG Menu as follows SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XXXX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU ENTER PASSWORD CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU SIGNAL COMM VARS DIAG EXIT PREV NEXT ANALOG OUTPUT Performs analog output step test 096
157. O in Zero Air 20 ppm 2614a CO in Zero Air 45 ppm 2659a 21 by weight 2626a CO 4 by weight 2745 CO in 1696 by weight Used to calibrate optional sensor Used to calibrate optional sensor SPAN GAS FOR MULTIPOINT CALIBRATION Some applications such as EPA monitoring require a multipoint calibration procedure where span gases of different concentrations are needed We recommend using a bottle of calibrated CO gas of higher concentration in conjunction with a gas dilution calibrator such as a TAI s T700 This type of calibrator precisely mixes a high concentration gas 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 71 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer with zero air both supplied externally to accurately produce span gas of the correct concentration Linearity profiles can be automated with this model and run unattended over night 3 4 STARTUP FUNCTIONAL CHECKS AND INITIAL CALIBRATION IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA The analyzer s cover must be installed to ensure that the temperatures of the GFC Wheel and absorption cell assemblies are properly controlled If you are unfamiliar with the GFC7001T GFC7001TM theory of operation we recommend that you read Section 13 For information on navigating the analyzer s software menus see the menu trees described in Appendix A 3 4 1 STARTUP After the electrical and pneumatic connections are made
158. ONC OUT 2 REC OFS 0 mV buttons to set ther value of 0 0 0 the desired offset 0 EXIT DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 REC OFS 10 mV 0 0 1 DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 REC OFS 10 mV 0 ENTR EXIT SET SET EDIT EXI j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 131 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 9 3 10 AIN CALIBRATION This is the submenu to conduct a calibration of the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer s analog inputs This calibration should only be necessary after major repair such as a replacement of CPU motherboard or power supplies To perform an analog input calibration select the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION submenu see Figure 5 3 then press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIF DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO lt SET SET gt CAL Continue pressing SET gt until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED NO SET CAL EXIT DIAG AIO CALIBRATING A D ZERO Firmware automatically performs a zero point calibration of the Motherboard s analog Inputs DIAG AIO CALIBRATING A D SPAN Firmware automatically performs a span point calibration of the Motherboard s analog Inputs DIAG AIO A D CALIBRATION ERROR EXIT Perform Troubleshooting or call DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED YES Teledyne Customer Service j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 132 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T30
159. ORIFICE AREA OF AREA OF HIGH LOW PRESSURE PRESSURE I gre cuc MAXIM IPM te AG Te 4 mE I 1 Shockwave SPRING O RINGS FILTER Figure 13 8 Flow Control Assembly amp Critical Flow Orifice The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice volume of gas per unit of time depends on the size and shape of the aperture in the orifice The larger the hole the more the gas molecules move at the speed of sound and pass through the orifice Because the flow rate of gas through the orifice is only related to the minimum 2 1 pressure differential and not absolute pressure the flow rate of the gas is also unaffected by ambient pressure fluctuations downstream The critical flow orifice used in the GFC7001T GFC7001TM is designed to provide a flow rate of 800 cc min 13 3 2 PARTICULATE FILTER The GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer comes equipped with a 47 mm diameter Teflon particulate filter with a 5 micron pore size The filter is accessible through the front panel which folds down to allow access and should be changed according to the suggested maintenance schedule described in Table 11 1 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 296 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 13 3 3 PNEUMATIC SENSORS There are two pneumatic sensors one each to measure sample pressure and flow 13 3 3 1 SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR An absolute value pressure transducer plumbed to the outlet of the sample chamber is used to meas
160. Operation Manual Model GFC7001T Carbon Monoxide Analyzer P N M90914 DATE 07 22 13 TELEDYNE ELECTRONIC TECHNOLOGIES Analytical Instruments 16830 Chestnut Street City of Industry CA 91748 Telephone 626 934 1500 Fax 626 961 2538 Web www teledyne ai com j Teledyne Analytical Instruments Model GFC7001T Carbon Monoxide Analyzer Copyright 2013 Teledyne Analytical Instruments All Rights Reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any other language or computer language in whole or in part in any form or by any means whether it be electronic mechanical magnetic optical manual or otherwise without the prior written consent of Teledyne Analytical Instruments 16830 Chestnut Street City of Industry CA 91748 Warranty This equipment is sold subject to the mutual agreement that it is warranted by us free from defects of material and of construction and that our liability shall be limited to replacing or repairing at our factory without charge except for transportation or at customer plant at our option any material or construction in which defects become apparent within one year from the date of shipment except in cases where quotations or acknowledgements provide for a shorter period Components manufactured by others bear the warranty of their manufacturer This warranty does not cover defects caused by wear accide
161. P Event EXITSP Parameters 3 Report Period 000 06 00 No of Records 400 RS 232 Report OFF Channel Enabled ON Cal Hold OFF OFF Figure 7 1 INST INST INST DETMES RATIO OFF OFF DETMES INST 1 RATIO INST 3 BNTEMP BOXTEMP PHTDRV AVG AVG AVG HCT Default DAS Channel Setup j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 167 DAC APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 7 1 3 VIEWING DAS CHANNELS AND INDIVIDUAL RECORDS DAS data and settings can be viewed on the front panel through the following buttonstroke sequence SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPB CO XX XX DAS VIEW Control Button Functions lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP FUNCTION PV10 Moves the VIEW backward 10 record SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU PREV Moves the VIEW backward 1 records or channel CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE NEXT Moves the VIEW forward 1 record or channel NX10 Moves the VIEW forward 10 records SETUP X X DATA ACQUISITION PRM Selects the previous parameter on the list VIEW EDIT PRM Selects the next parameter on the list Buttons only appear when applicable SETUP X X CONC DATA AVAILABLE NEXT VIEW SETUP X X 101 21 00 CONC 1239 0 PPM SETUP PNUMTC DATA AVAILABLE PV10 PREV PREV NEXT VIEW SETUP X X 101 21 00 CONC 1239 0 PPM PV10 PREV NEXT NX10 lt PRM PRM gt SETUP X X CALD
162. PCA as shown in Figure 3 16 This shunt must be removed from all instruments except that designated as last in the multidrop chain which must remain terminated This requires powering off and opening each instrument and making the following adjustments 1 With NO power to the instrument remove its top cover and lay the rear panel open for access to the Multidrop LVDS PCA which is seated on the CPU 2 Onthe Multidrop LVDS PCA s JP2 connector remove the shunt that jumpers Pins 21 22 as indicated in Do this for all but the last instrument in the chain where the shunt should remain at Pins 21 22 3 Check that the following cable connections are made in all instruments again refer to Figure 3 16 e J3on the Multidrop LVDS PCA to the CPU s COM1 connector Note that the CPU s COM2 connector is not used in Multidrop J4 on the Multidrop LVDS PCA to J12 on the motherboard e J1 on the Multidrop L VDS PCS to the front panel LCD j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 56 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer JP2 has a shunt on Pins 21 22 Remove this shunt from all analyzers except the last analyzer in the chain leave the shunt installed on Pins 21 22 on the Disk on Module last analyzer oie Adjust accordingly if new instrument s added later Serial multi drop and LVDS board seated on CPU Cable PN 04671 J4 to J12 on motherboard 000000000500000000 video ca
163. PERATURE CONTROL The sync demod board also contains circuitry that controls the IR photo detector s Thermal Electric Coolers TEC A drive voltage PHT DRIVE is supplied to the j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 304 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer coolers by the sync demod board which is adjusted by the sync demod board based on a return signal called TEC control which alerts the sync demod board of the detector s temperature The warmer the detector the harder the coolers are driven PHT DRIVE is one of the Test Functions viewable by the user via the form panel Press TST or TST gt until it appears on the display 13 4 3 4 DARK CALIBRATION SWITCH This switch initiates the Dark Calibration procedure When initiated by the user See Section 9 6 1 for more details the dark calibration process opens this switch interrupting the signal from the IR photo detector This allows the analyzer to measure any offset caused by the sync demod board circuitry 13 4 3 5 ELECTRIC TEST SWITCH When active this circuit generates a specific waveform intended to simulate the function of the IR photo detector but with a known set of value which is substituted for the detector s actual signal via the dark switch It may also be initiated by the user See Section 5 4 for more details 13 4 4 RELAY BOARD By actuating various switches and relays located on this board the CPU controls the status
164. PICOM or the analyzer s standard serial data protocol e REPORT PERIOD Sets how often the sample readings stored in volatile memory are processed e g average minimum or maximum are calculated and the results stored permanently in the instrument s Disk on Module as well as transmitted via the analyzer s communication ports The Report Period may be set from the front panel If the INST sample mode is selected the instrument stores and reports an instantaneous reading of the selected parameter at the end of the chosen report period To define the REPORT PERIOD follow the instruction shown in Section 7 1 4 then press Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 1 800 Use the PREV and PREV MEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT NEXT buttons to I scroll to the DATA CHANNEL to be SETUP XX CONC edited lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET gt until SETUP X X REPORT PERIOD 000 01 00 EXIT lt SET SET gt EDIT SETUP X X REPORT PERIOD DAYS 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to _ set the days between reports 0 366 SETUP X X REPORT PERIOD TIME 01 00 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new 0 1 0 0 Press buttons to set hours _ _ _ setting between reports in the format HH MM max 23 59 This is a 24 hour clock ENTR accepts the new setting PM hours are 13 thru 23 midnight is 00 00 Example 215 1415 J 4
165. PORTANT Note The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer If the analyzer s reporting range is set for the DUAL or AUTO range modes a step will appear for selecting which range is to be calibrated LOW or HIGH IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Each of these two ranges MUST be calibrated separately 9 3 3 1 SETTING THE EXPECTED SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION When setting expected concentration values consider impurities in your span gas The expected CO span gas concentration should be 80 of the reporting range of the instrument see Section 5 4 1 The default factory setting is 40 ppm To set the span gas concentration press j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 205 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE 50 0PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL CALZ CALS SETUP Only appears if either ISAMPLE GAS TO CAL CO or or the sensor is installed ISAMPLE RANGE TO CAL LOW LOW HIGH Only appears if the DUAL or AUTO range modes are selected Use these buttons to choose the appropriate range Repeat entire procedure for each range lt TST TST gt ZERO SPAN CONC M P CAL RANG E 50 0PPM CO XX XX EXIT CO SPAN CONC 40 0 Conc M P CAL EXIT ignores the new The default CO span concentration 0 4 0 0 0 ENTR EXI setting and returns to value is 40 0 Conc the p
166. ROL VIA APICOM APICOM is an easy to use yet powerful interface program that allows a user to access and control any of Teledyne s main line of ambient and stack gas instruments from a remote connection through direct cable modem or Ethernet Running APICOM a user can e Establish a link from a remote location to the GFC7001T through direct cable connection via RS 232 modem or Ethernet e View the instrument s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be accessed manually on the instrument e Remotely edit system parameters and set points e Download view graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis e Retrieve view edit save and upload DAS configurations Section 7 2 1 e Check on system parameters for trouble shooting and quality control APICOM is very helpful for initial setup data analysis maintenance and trouble shooting Refer to the APICOM manual available for download from http www teledyne api com software apicom 8 2 INTERACTIVE MODE Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs or a dumb computer terminal 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments Remote OperationTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 8 2 1 REMOTE CONTROL VIA A TERMINAL EMULATION PROGRAM Start a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal All configuration commands must be created following a strict syntax or be pasted in from an existing text file which was edite
167. RS 232 COMMUNICATIONS 12 5 10 1 GENERAL RS 232 TROUBLESHOOTING TAI analyzers use the RS 232 communications protocol to allow the instrument to be connected to a variety of computer based equipment RS 232 has been used for many years and as equipment has become more advanced connections between various types of hardware have become increasingly difficult Generally every manufacturer observes the signal and timing requirements of the protocol very carefully Problems with RS 232 connections usually center around the following general areas 1 Incorrect cabling and connectors See Section 3 3 for connector and pin out information 2 The BAUD rate and protocol are incorrectly configured See Section 6 2 2 If a modem is being used additional configuration and wiring rules must be observed See Section 8 3 4 Incorrect setting of the DTE DCE Switch Ensure that switch is set correctly See Section 6 1 5 Verify that cable P N 03596 that connects the serial COM ports of the CPU to J12 of the motherboard is properly seated j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 279 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 5 10 2 TROUBLESHOOTING ANALYZER MODEM OR TERMINAL OPERATION These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a TAI analyzer 1 Check cables for proper connection to the modem terminal or computer 2 Check to make sure the DTE DCE is in the correct
168. SETUP X X HIGH RANGE 50 0 Conc 0 0 0 5 0 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to select the upper __ SPAN limit for the reporting ranges SETUP XX O2RANGE 100 00 1 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Toggle these keys to select the upper aM setting SPAN limit for the or reporting range ENTR accepts the new setting 77 NOTE Display only appears if the optional CO2 or O2 Sensor is installed j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 100 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 4 3 3 AUTO RANGE MODE AUTO In AUTO range mode the analyzer automatically switches the reporting range between two user defined ranges low and high e unit will switch from low range to high range when the CO concentration exceeds 98 of the low range span e unit will return from high range back to low range once both the CO concentration falls below 75 of the low range span In AUTO Range Mode the instrument reports the same data in the same range on both the Al and A2 outputs and automatically switches both outputs between ranges as described above Also the RANGE test function displayed on the front panel will be replaced by two separate functions e RANGEI The LOW range setting for all analog outputs e RANGEZ The HIGH range setting for all analog outputs The high low range status is also reported through the external digital status bits See Section 3 3 1 4 To set indiv
169. ST PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG DARK CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG PRESSURE CALIBRATION EXIT returns to the PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU ENTR Activates the DIAG FLOW CALIBRATION selected DIAG PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT submenu DIAG TEST CHANNEL OUTPUT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG HALT FIRMWARE PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Last three menu items DIAG MEMORY CONFIGURATION feque higher lieve PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT security password DIAG FACTORY OPTIONS PREV ENTR EXIT j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 114 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 9 1 SIGNAL I O The signal I O diagnostic mode allows a user to review and change the digital and analog input output functions of the analyzer Refer to Appendix A 4 for a full list of the parameters available for review under this menu IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Any changes of signal I O settings will remain in effect only until the signal I O menu is exited Exceptions are the ozone generator override and the flow sensor calibration which remain as entered when exiting Access the SIGNAL I O test mode from the DIAG Menu SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XXXX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT DIAG SIGNAL I O SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU NEXT ENTR COMM VARS DIAG EXIT DIAG VO 0 EXT_ZERO_CAL OFF SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 PREV NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT Press PREV and 8 1 8 E
170. T DIAGNOSIS WITH WARNING MESSAGES The most common and or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message being displayed on the front panel Table 12 1 lists warning messages along with their meaning and recommended corrective action It should be noted that if more than two or three warning messages occur at the same time it is often an indication that some fundamental analyzer sub system power supply relay board motherboard has failed rather than an indication of the specific failures referenced by the warnings In this case a combined error analysis needs to be performed The analyzer will alert the user that a Warning message is active by flashing the FAULT LED displaying the the Warning message in the Param field along with the CLR button press to clear Warning message The MSG button displays if there is more than one warning in queue or if you are in the TEST menu and have not yet cleared the message The following display touchscreen examples provide an illustration of each j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 250 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 826 PPM 9 826 PPM The analyzer will also alert the user via the Serial I O COM port s To view or clear the various warning messages press 9i Teledyne Analytical Instruments 251 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET Suppresses
171. TABIL GAS CO Press EXIT 3 times to return to SAMPLE menu lt PREV NEXT gt JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X STABIL_GAS CO CO2 and O2 options only appear if associated CO CO2 C2 ENTR EXIT sensors are installed 7 SETUP X X STABIL_GAS 02 CO CO2 C2 ENTR EXIT Use the same procedure to reset the STB test function to CO when the O2 Note calibration procedure is complete m PEERS j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 220 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 7 1 4 O2 ZERO SPAN CALIBRATION To perform the zero span calibration procedure SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX Set the Display to show lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP the O2 STB test function This function calculates the stability of the CO measurement Toggle TST gt button until SAMPLE O2 STB X XX CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer SAMPLE O2 STB X XX CO XX XX Wait until O2 STB falls below 0 01 This may take several minutes lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE GAS TO CAL 02 Press O2 gt ENTR to co co2 02 initiate zero point calibration of the O2 sensor Press ENTR to change M P CAL O2 STB X XX CO XX XX the OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the O2 measurement Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC EXIT M P CAL O2 STB X XX CO XX
172. TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP warning messages L SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP MSG returns the active warnings to the message NOTE field If a warning message persists after several attempts to clear it the message SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET may indicate a real problem and not an P CLR h artifact of the warm up period TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP ress CLR to clear the current message If more than one warning is active the next message will take SYSTEM SYSTEM RESET its place TEST CLR SETUP Once the last warning has been cleared the RANGE function will be displayed in the analyzers main STANDBY RANGE 50 0 PPB CO XX XX MESSAGE FIELD TEST CAL MSG SETUP Figure 12 1 Table 12 1 Warning Messages Indicated Failures Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages WARNING MESSAGE FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES Bad bench heater BENCH TEMP The optical bench temp is Bad bench temperature sensor WARNING controlled at 48 2 C Bad relay controlling the bench heater E Entire relay board is malfunctioning IC bus malfunction NOTE Box temperature typically runs 7 C warmer than ambient temperature WAENIM i o jou C Poor blocked ventilation to the analyzer pr i Stopped exhaust fan Ambient temperature outside of specified range CANNOT DYN D icS tion failed Measured concentration value is too high or low SPAN a Span Concentration slope value to high or too low CANNOT DYN D icZ tion failed Mea
173. TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG Press individual buttons to set number EXAMPLE This password enables the SETUP mode The instrument still prompts for a password when entering the VARS and DIAG menus even if passwords are disabled It will display the default password 818 upon entering these menus The user only has to press ENTR to access the password protected menus but does not have to enter the required number code 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 107 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 6 SETUP gt CLK SETTING THE INTERNAL TIME OF DAY CLOCK AND ADJUSTING SPEED 5 6 1 1 SETTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK S TIME AND DAY The GFC7001T GFC7001TM has a time of day clock that supports the DURATION step of the automatic calibration ACAL sequence feature time of day TEST function and time stamps on for the DAS feature and most COMM port messages To set the clock s time and day press SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX SETUP lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X X TIME OF DAY CLOCK TIME DATE DATE 01 JAN 05 ENTR EXIT ENTR EXIT oggle these Toggle these buttons to enter MINUTE ind current day month LP and year HOUR ENTR EXIT ENTR EXIT SETUP X X TIME O
174. Table 12 9 Table 12 10 Table 12 11 Table 12 12 Table 13 1 Table 13 2 Table 13 3 Table 13 4 Table 14 1 Table 14 2 DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color 271 DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels sss eee eene 272 Relay Board Control 273 Opto Pickup Board Nominal Output nn 274 Analog Output Test Function Nominal Values Voltage Outputs 277 Analog Output Test Function Nominal Values Voltage Outputs 278 Status Outputs Check seed dece deo vad td dee helena geass residen eR e a mas 278 Absorption Path Lengths for GFC7001T and GFC7001TM 290 Sync DEMOD Sample and Hold eene enne 304 Sync Demod Status LED ACIVIty i i coherent tn ete ue dos Dep EH LOS deducit ade 304 Relay Board Status LEDS t eon toco he ED gal cca PE Rao 306 Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities 316 Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD sss 316 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments xix Table of ContentsTeledyne API Mode
175. Turn OFF the analyzer to prevent drawing debris into the instrument 2 Open the GFC7001T Analyzer s hinged front panel and unscrew the knurled retaining ring on the filter assembly 01628 Retaining Ring 01629 Window 024310100 O Ring PTFE Notches UP 227 PTFE Membrane Filter Element d H FL 19 1pm FL6 5 OR 58 Viton O Ring 03588 Bracket 03522 Body FT 8 Connector Fitting FT 8 Connector Fitting Figure 11 1 Sample Particulate Filter Assembly 3 Carefully remove the retaining ring PTFE o ring glass filter cover and filter element 4 Replace the filter being careful that the element is fully seated and centered in the bottom of the holder 5 Re install the PTFE o ring with the notches up the glass cover then screw on the retaining ring and hand tighten Inspect the seal between the edge of filter and the o ring to assure a proper seal 6 Re start the Analyzer j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 246 MaintenanceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 11 3 2 PERFORMING LEAK CHECKS Leaks are the most common cause of analyzer malfunction Section Error Reference source not found presents a simple leak check procedure Section 11 3 2 1 details a more thorough procedure 11 3 2 1 PRESSURE LEAK CHECK Obtain a leak checker similar to the TAI P N 01960 which contains a small pump shut off valve and pressure gauge Alternatively a convenient so
176. UMENT AND VOID WARRANTY Most PLC s have internal provisions for limiting the current that the input will draw from an external device When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature an external dropping resistor must be used to limit the current through the transistor output to less than 50 mA At 50 mA the transistor will drop approximately 1 2V from its collector to emitter The status outputs are accessed via a 12 pin connector on the analyzer s rear panel labeled STATUS see Figure 3 4 Pin outs for this connector are STATUS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 D ty SYSTEM OK CONC VALID HIGH RANGE ZERO CAL SPAN CAL DIAG MODE Optional CAL o 5V to external device Figure 3 11 Status Output Connector j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 48 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer o 2 e o et fb et c o c et c et 2 5 D o REAR PANEL LABEL STATUS DEFINITION SYSTEM OK ON if no faults are present OFF any time the HOLD OFF feature is active such as during calibration or when other faults exist possibly invalidating the current concentration measurement example sample flow rate is outside of acceptable limits ON if concentration measurement is valid HIGH RANGE ON if unit is in high range of either the DUAL or AUTO range modes CONDITION CONC VALID ZERO CAL ON whenever the instrument s ZERO point is being calibrated SPAN CAL ON wh
177. US capabilities installed e MODBUS compatible software TAI uses MODBUS Poll for testing see www modbustools com e Personal computer e Communications cable Ethernet or USB or RS232 e Possibly null modem adapter or cable MODBUS Setup Set Com Mode parameters Comm Ethernet Using the front panel menu go to SETUP MORE COMM INET scroll through the INET submenu until you reach TCP PORT 2 the standard setting is 502 then continue to TCP PORT 2 MODBUS TCP IP press EDIT and toggle the menu button to change the setting to ON then press ENTR Change Machine ID if needed see Slave ID USB RS232 Using the front panel menu go to SETUP MORE COMM COM2 EDIT scroll through the COM2 EDIT submenu until the display shows COM2 MODBUS RTU OFF press OFF to change the setting to ON Scroll NEXT to COM2 MODBUS ASCII and ensure it is set to OFF Press ENTR to keep the new settings If RTU is not available with your communications equipment set the COM2 MODBUS ASCII setting to ON and ensure that COM2 MODBUS RTU is set to OFF Press ENTR to keep the new settings Slave ID A MODBUS slave ID must be set for each instrument Valid slave ID s are in the range of 1 to 247 If your analyzer is connected to a serial network i e RS 485 a unique Slave ID must be assigned to each instrument To set the slave ID for the instrument go to SETUP MORE COMM ID The default MACHINE ID is the same as the model number Toggle
178. VARIATION TYPE1 SET SET EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET until HESSEN RESPONSE MODE CMD SET SET EDIT EXIT HESSEN RESPONSE MODE CMD BCC TEXT CMD ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Use these buttons to E setting choose the Hessen ENTR accepts the new setting Response type j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 156 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 6 7 3 HESSEN PROTOCOL GAS LIST ENTRIES 6 7 3 1 HESSEN PROTOCOL GAS ID The GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer keeps a list of available gas types Each entry in this list takes the following format GAS TYPE RANGE GAS ID REPORTED WHERE GAS TYPE The type of gas to be reported e g CO etc RANGE The concentration range for this entry in the gas list This feature permits the user to select which concentration range will be used for this gas list entry The GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer has two ranges RANGE1 or LOW amp RANGE2 or HIGH See Section 5 4 1 0 The HESSEN protocol to use whatever range is currently active 1 The HESSEN protocol will always use RANGE1 for this gas list entry 2 The HESSEN protocol will always use RANGE2 for this gas list entry 3 Not applicable to the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer GAS ID An identification number assigned to a specific gas In the case of the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer in its base configuration there is only one gas CO and its d
179. Vapor It should have a dew point of 5 C or less If your application is not a measurement in ambient air the zero calibration gas should be matched to the composition of the gas being measured e Pure nitrogen can be used as a zero gas for applications where CO is measured in nitrogen e f your analyzer is equipped with an external zero air scrubber option it is capable of creating zero air from ambient air For analyzers without the zero air scrubber a zero air generator such as the Teledyne T701 can be used Please visit the company website for more information 9 1 1 2 SPAN GAS Span Gas is a gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type of gas being measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range It is recommended that the span gas used have a concentration equal to 80 90 of the full measurement range If Span Gas is sourced directly from a calibrated pressurized tank the gas mixture should be CO mixed with Zero Air or N at the required ratio For oxygen measurements using the optional O sensor we recommend a reference gas of 2196 in e For quick checks ambient air can be used at an assumed concentration of 20 8 e Generally concentration in dry ambient air varies by less than 1 9 1 1 3 CALIBRATION GAS STANDARDS AND TRACEABILITY All equipment used to produce calibration gases should be verified against standards of the National Institute for Standards a
180. X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT Contact your IT Network Administrator j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 147 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 6 6 USB PORT OPTION FOR REMOTE ACCESS The analyzer can be operated through a personal computer by downloading the Teledyne USB driver and directly connecting their respective USB ports 1 Install the Teledyne T Series USB driver on your computer downloadable from the TAI website under Help Center gt Software Downloads www teledyne api com software 2 Run the installer file TAPIVCPInstaller exe ie Teledyne API USB COM Port Driver Driver Installer ga Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation Teledyne API USB COM Port Driver Installation Location Driver Version 6 1 C Program FilesATAPIVCP Driverl Change Install Location 3 Connect USB cable between the USB ports on your personal computer and your analyzer The USB cable should be a Type A Type B cable commonly used as a USB printer cable 4 Determine the Windows XP Com Port number that was automatically assigned to the USB connection Start Control Panel System Hardware Device Manager This is the com port that should be set in the communications software such as APIcom or Hyperterminal Device Manager File Action View Help g SDAENPC21 1 Computer we Disk drives 2 Display adapters 3 DV
181. YSTEM RESET Suppfesses the TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP warning messages 12 RANGE XXX XPPM TST TST gt CAL MSG SETUP MSG returns the active warnings to the message field artifact of the warm up period TEST CAL CLR SETUP Press CLR to clear the current message If more than one warning is active the next message will take SYSTEM SYSTEM RESET its place lt TST TST gt CAL CLR SETUP Once the last warning has been cleared the RANGE function will be displayed in the analyzer s main STANDBY RANGE 50 0 PPB CO XX XX TST TST gt CAL MSG SETUP MESSAGE FIELD Viewing and Clearing GFC7001T GFC7001TM WARNING Messages 4 2 CALIBRATION MODE IMPORTANT Pressing the CAL button switches the GFC7001T GFC7001TM into calibration mode In this mode the user can calibrate the instrument with the use of calibrated zero or span gases This mode is also used to check the current calibration status of the instrument e For more information about setting up and performing standard calibration operations or checks see Section 9 e For more information about setting up and performing EPA equivalent calibrations see Section 10 e Ifthe instrument includes one of the available zero span valve options the SAMPLE mode display will also include CALZ and CALS buttons Pressing either of these buttons also puts the instrument into calibration mode e The CALZ button is used to initiate a calibration of the analyzer s zero
182. ability to calculate it All pressure measurements are represented in terms of absolute pressure Absolute atmospheric pressure is 29 92 in Hg A at sea level It decreases about 1 in Hg per 300 m gain in altitude A variety of factors such as air conditioning and passing storms can cause changes in the absolute atmospheric pressure Table 4 2 Test Functions Defined PARAMETER DISPLAY TITLE UNITS MEANING Standard deviation of CO concentration readings Data points are bili STABIL PPM recorded every ten seconds using the last 25 data points This Stability UGM MGM function can be reset to show or CO stability in instruments with those sensor options installed RANGE PPB PPM The full scale limit at which the reporting range of the analyzer is Range RANGE1 UGM MGM currently set THIS IS NOT the Physical Range of the instrument RANGE2 See Section 5 4 1 for more information j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 87 OverviewTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO AnalyzerTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer O2 Range 1 O2 RANGE The range setting for the optional O2 Sensor Range CO RANGE The range setting for the optional CO Sensor The demodulated peak IR detector output during the measure CO Measure CO MEAS portion of the Wheel cycle The demodulated peak IR detector output during the reference CO Reference REF portion of the
183. ach the output to be configured DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 5V OVR NOCAL lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 RANGE 5V SET gt EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET gt until DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 AUTO CAL ON lt SET SET gt EDIT ENTR accepts the new setting EXIT ignores the new setting p gt DIAG AIO ON CONC_OUT_2 AUTO CAL ON ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 AUTO CAL OFF OFF ENTR EXIT 5 9 3 4 AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS To calibrate the outputs as a group with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command select the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION submenu see Figure 5 3 then press j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 122 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Before performing this procedure make sure that the AUTO CAL for each analog output is enabled See Section 5 9 3 3 From the AlO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION CONC_OUT_3 is only active PREV NEXT on analyzers with the optional O2 sensor installed DIAG AIO SET gt ENTR AOUTS CALIBRATED NO CAL DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC OUT 1 This message cu DIAG AIO NOT AUTO CAL OUT 2 Wh automatically AUTO CAL is calibrates all k A channels for which DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC OUT 3 poe or AUTO CAL is turned a channel DIAGAIO AUTO CALIBRATING TEST_OUTPUT If any of the
184. after the analyzer has come up to operating temperature whether the PHT DRIVE voltage has returned to an acceptable level The two large transistor type devices mounted to the side of the Absorption Bench have come loose from the bench e Tighten the retaining screws and note whether there is an improvement in the PHT DRIVE voltage The photo detector has failed Contact the factory for instructions The sync demodulator circuit board has failed Contact the factor for instructions 12 4 2 EXCESSIVE NOISE Noise is continuously monitored in the TEST functions as the STABIL reading and only becomes meaningful after sampling a constant gas concentration for at least 10 minutes Compare the current STABIL reading with that recorded at the time of manufacture included in the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Final Test and Validation Data Sheet P N 04271 shipped with the unit from TAI l The most common cause of excessive noise is leaks Leak check and flow check the instrument described in Section 11 3 2 and 11 3 3 Detector failure caused by failure of the hermetic seal or over temperature due to poor heat sinking of the detector can to the optical bench e In addition to increased noise due to poor signal to noise ratio another indicator of detector failure 1s a drop in the signal levels of the CO MEASURE signal and CO REFERENCE signal Sync Demod Board failure There are many delicate high impedance parts on this board Check the CO ME
185. al RS 232 RS 485 Ethernet communication channels The SETUP mode is also used for performing various diagnostic tests during troubleshooting 9 826 PPM Figure 4 1 Front Panel Display ji Teledyne Analytical Instruments OverviewTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO AnalyzerTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer The mode field of the front panel display indicates to the user which operating mode the unit is currently running Besides SAMPLE and SETUP other modes the analyzer can be operated in are Table 4 1 Analyzer Operating Modes DIAG One of the analyzer s diagnostic modes is active refer to Section 5 9 LO CAL A Unit is performing LOW SPAN midpoint calibration initiated automatically by the analyzer s AUTOCAL feature LO CAL R Unit is performing LOW SPAN midpoint calibration initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital control inputs M P CAL This is the basic calibration mode of the instrument and is activated by pressing the CAL button SAMPLE Sampling normally flashing text indicates adaptive filter is on SAMPLE A Indicates that unit is in SAMPLE mode and AUTOCAL feature is activated SETUP X SETUP mode is being used to configure the analyzer The gas measurement will continue during this process NET ive filter SPAN CALA Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated automatically by the analyzers AUTOCAL feature SPAN CAL R Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated remot
186. amp SLOPE ENTR CONC EX values for the CO measurement Press EXIT to leave the STABIL XXXX PPM calibration unchanged and return to the previous ENTR CONC EXIT menu EXIT at this point returns to the SAMPLE menu _ Press EXIT to leave the calibration j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 207 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 3 3 3 USE OF ZERO SPAN VALVE WITH REMOTE CONTACT CLOSURE Contact closures for controlling calibration and calibration checks are located on the rear panel CONTROL IN connector Instructions for setup and use of these contacts can be found in Section 3 3 1 6 When the appropriate contacts are closed for at least 5 seconds the instrument switches into zero or span calibration mode and any internal zero span valves installed will be automatically switched to the appropriate configuration e The remote calibration contact closures may be activated in any order e tis recommended that contact closures remain closed for at least 10 minutes to establish a reliable reading e The instrument will stay in the selected mode for as long as the contacts remain closed If contact closures are being used in conjunction with the analyzer s AutoCal see Section 9 4 feature and the AutoCal attribute CALIBRATE is enabled the GFC7001T GFC7001TM will not recalibrate the analyzer until the contact is opened At this point the n
187. an initial functional check is in order Turn on the instrument The exhaust fan should start immediately The display will briefly show a momentary splash screen of the TAI logo and other information during the initialization process while the CPU loads the operating system the firmware and the configuration data at the start of initialization The analyzer should automatically switch to Sample Mode after completing the boot up sequence and start monitoring CO gas However there is an approximately one hour warm up period before reliable gas measurements can be taken During the warm up period the front panel display may show messages in the Parameters field 3 4 2 WARNING MESSAGES Because internal temperatures and other conditions may be outside the specified limits during the analyzer s warm up period the software will suppress most warning conditions for 30 minutes after power up If warning messages persist after the 60 minutes warm up period is over investigate their cause using the troubleshooting guidelines in Section 12 To view and clear warning messages press j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 72 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer NOTE E If a warning message persists after S h SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET COPO several attempts to clear it the message uppresses the TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP may indicate a real problem and not an warning messages artifact of the warm up period SAMPLE R
188. anges regardless of the analyzer s range mode To change the concentration units SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP RANGE MODE MENU The following equations give approximate conversions between volume volume units and weight volume units MODE SET UNIT DIL co CO ppb x 1 25 CO ug m CO ppm x 1 25 CO mg ng SETUP RANGE MODE SNGL SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT SETUP X X CONC UNITS PPB PPB PPM UGM MGM ENTR EXIT i Toggle these buttons EXIT discards the new to select the units of setting measure for the ENTR accepts the new setting 2 reporting ranges IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA In order to avoid a reference temperature bias the analyzer must be recalibrated after every change in reporting units IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Concentrations displayed in mg m and ug m use 0 C and 760 mmHg for Standard Temperature and Pressure STP Consult your local regulations for the STP used by your agency Example US EPA uses 25 C as the reference temperature Once the Units of Measurement have been changed from volumetric ppb or ppm to mass units ug m or mg m the analyzer MUST be recalibrated as the expected span values previously in effect will no longer be valid Simply entering new expected span value
189. ank j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 84 OverviewTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 4 OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES Note To assist in navigating the analyzer s software a series of menu trees can be found in Appendix A of this manual Some control buttons on the touch screen do not appear if they are not applicable to the menu that you re in the task that you are performing the command you are attempting to send or to incorrect settings input by the user For example the ENTR button may disappear if you input a setting that is invalid or out of the allowable range for that parameter such as trying to set the 24 hour clock to 25 00 00 Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value the ENTR button will re appear The GFC7001T GFC7001TM software has a variety of operating modes Most commonly the analyzer will be operating in Sample Mode In this mode a continuous read out of the CO concentration can be viewed on the front panel and output as an analog voltage from rear panel terminals calibrations can be performed and TEST functions and WARNING messages can be examined If the analyzer is configured to measure a second gas e g CO along with or the display will show a readout of both concentrations The second most important operating mode is SETUP mode This mode is used for performing certain configuration operations such as for the DAS system the reporting ranges or the seri
190. ar in the SETUP gt MORE gt COMM gt CON 1 OR 2 gt MODE menu The default setting for this feature is ON Do not disable unless instructed to by TAI s Customer Service personnel Communication Modes for each COM port must be configured independently To turn on or off the communication modes for either COMI or COMO access the SETUP gt MORE gt COM1 or COM2 menu and at the COMI 2 Mode menu press EDIT j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 140 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Select which COM SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU port to configure D INET COM1 COM2 The sum of the mode IDs of the selected COM1 MODE 32 modes is displayed here SET gt EDIT SETUP X X COM1 QUIET MODE OFF NEXT ENTR EXIT Continue pressing NEXT to scroll through the available Modes and press the ON or OFF button to enable or disable each mode Figure 6 1 COM1 2 Communication Modes Setup 6 2 2 COM PORT BAUD RATE To select the baud rate of either COM Port go to SETUP gt MORE gt COMM and select either COMI or COM2 as follows use COM2 to view match your personal computer baud rate when using the USB port Section 6 6 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 141 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM V
191. atio is too high e air is contaminated e Failed IR photo detector PRES See Table 12 1 for SAMPLE PRES WARN SAMPLE FL Check for gas flow problems see Section 12 2 SAMP TEMP SAMPLE TEMP should be close to BENCH TEMP Temperatures outside of the specified range or oscillating temperatures are cause for concern BENCH Bench temp control improves instrument noise stability and drift Temperatures outside of the specified range TEMP or oscillating temperatures are cause for concern Table 12 1 for BENCH TEMP WARNING WHEEL Wheel temp control improves instrument noise stability and drift Outside of set point or oscillating TEMP temperatures are causes for concern See Table 12 1 for WHEEL TEMP WARNING j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 254 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer TEST FUNCTIONS As Displayed INDICATED FAILURE S BOX TEMP If the box temperature is out of range check fan in the power supply module Areas to the side and rear of instrument should allow adequate ventilation See Table 12 1 for BOX TEMP WARNING PHT DRIVE If this drive voltage is out of range it may indicate one of several problems e A poor mechanical connection between the photodetector its associated mounting hardware and the absorption cell housing An electronic failure of the IR Photo Detector s built in cooling circuitry e temperature problem inside the
192. between JP2 pins 21 lt gt 22 in last instrument of multidrop chain Figure 3 17 RS 232 Multidrop PCA Host Analyzer Interconnect Diagram 7 BEFORE communicating from the host power on the instruments and check that the Machine ID code is unique for each Section 5 7 1 a In the SETUP Mode menu go to SETUPPMORE COMNWMPID The default ID is typically the model number or 0 b to change the identification number press the button below the digit to be changed c Press select ENTER to accept the new ID for that instrument 8 Next the SETUP gt MORE gt COMM gt COM1 menu do not use the COM2 menu for multidrop edit the COM1 MODE parameter as follows press select EDIT and set only QUIET MODE COMPUTER MODE and MULTIDROP MODE to ON Do not change any other settings 9 Press select ENTER to accept the changed settings and ensure that COM1 MODE now shows 35 10 Press select SET to go to the COM1 BAUD RATE menu and ensure it reads the same for all instruments edit as needed so that all instruments are set at the same baud rate Note The Instrument ID s should not be duplicated The communication Host instrument can only address one instrument ata time Note TAI recommends setting up the first link between the Host and the first 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 58 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer RS 485 CONNECTION As delivered from the factory COM2 is c
193. ble confidence that the GFC7001T is operating properly Checks should be carried out at least every 3 months as the possibility of malfunction is always present If the linearity error is excessive and cannot be attributed to outside causes check the GFC7001T system for e Sample pressure higher than ambient pressurized sample gas e Leaks e Correct flow e Miscalibrated span gas tanks or bad zero gas e Miscalibrated sample pressure transducer j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 234 EPA Calibration Protocol Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Failed IR detector GFC Wheel or Sync Demod Board Contaminated optical bench or sample lines 10 6 REFERENCES N Co Az Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume II Part 1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program Quality System Development EPA 454 R 98 004 August 1998 United States Environmental Protection Agency Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards CFR Title 40 Protection of Environment PART 53 AMBIENT AIR MONITORING REFERENCE AND EQUIVALENT METHODS 53 20 General provisions 53 23 Test procedures CFR Title 40 Protection of Environment PART 50 NATIONAL PRIMARY AND SECONDARY AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS Appendix C to Part 50 Measurement Principle and Calibration Procedure for the Measurement of Carbon Monoxide in the Atmosphere Non Dispersive Infrared Photometry Quality Assura
194. ble to front panel LCD CPU COM1 CPU CON2 is not 01 1 connector used in Multidrop Figure 3 16 Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode Note If you are adding an instrument to the end of a previously configured chain remove the shunt between Pins 21 lt gt 22 of JP2 on the Multidrop LVDS PCA in the instrument that was previously the last instrument in the chain 4 Close the instrument 5 Referring to Figure 3 17 use straight through DB9 male DB9 female cables to interconnect the host RS232 port to the first analyzer s RS232 port then from the first analyzer s COM2 port to the second analyzer s RS232 port from the second analyzer s COM2 port to the third analyzer s RS232 port etc connecting in this fashion up to eight analyzers subject to the distance limitations of the RS 232 standard 6 Onthe rear panel of each analyzer adjust the DCE DTE switch so that the green and the red LEDs RX and TX of the COM1 connector labeled RS232 are both lit Ensure you are using the correct RS 232 cables internally wired specifically for RS 232 communication see Table 1 1 Analyzer Options Communication Cables and Section 3 3 1 9 Connecting the Communications Inerfaces RS 232 Connection j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 57 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer ey Female DB9 65575 Male DB9 Analyzer Analyzer Analyzer Last Analyzer COM2 COM2 COM2 Ensure jumper is installed
195. bration gas source pressure a needle valve restrictor critical orifice or combination there should be deployed to achieve this Do not directly apply significant pressure to the inlet of the unit under any circumstances as damage and or personal injury may result EXHAUST OUTLET Attach an exhaust line to the analyzer s EXHAUST outlet fitting The exhaust line should be e PTEF tubing minimum 1 4 e Maximum length of 10 meters e Vented outside the analyzer s enclosure 3 3 2 4 PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR ZERO SPAN VALVE OPTION sempe INSTRUMENT CHASSIS In GAS INLET PRESSURE SPAN INLET Sample Cal Particulate Filter SAMPLE CHAMBER Sample Pressure Sensor EXHAUST GAS OUTLET a Sample Gas Flow Control Figure 3 22 Internal Pneumatic Flow 50A Zero Span Valves j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 64 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Table 3 8 Zero Span Valve Operating States for Option 50A MODE VALVE CONDITION SAMPLE Sample Cal Open to SAMPLE inlet Normal State Zero Span Open to IZS inlet Sample Cal Open to ZERO SPAN valve ZERO CAL Zero Span Open to IZS inlet Sample Cal Open to ZERO SPAN valve SPAN CAL Zero Span Open to PRESSURE SPAN inlet e PTEF tubing minimum O D 1 4 10 meters long max e Vented outside the analyzer s enclosure 3 3 2 5 PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR INTERNAL
196. bration procedures and calibration checks programmed using the submenus and functions found under the ACAL menu A menu tree showing the ACAL menu s entire structure can be found in Appendix A 1 of this manual Instructions for using the ACAL feature are located in the Section 9 4 of this manual along with all other information related to calibrating the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer 5 3 SETUP DAS INTERNAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM Use the SETUP gt DAS menu to capture and record data Refer to Section 7 for CO XX XX SAMPLE RANGE 50 00 PPM SETUP lt TST TST gt CAL PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP X X CFG ACAL DAS RANG PASS CLK MORE EXIT Accesses AutoCal setup menus configuration and operation details 5 4 SETUP gt RNGE ANALOG OUTPUT REPORTING RANGE CONFIGURATION Use the SETUP gt RNGE menu to configure output reporting ranges including scaled reporting ranges to handle data resolution challenges This section also describes configuration for Single Dual and Auto Range modes 5 4 1 ANALOG OUTPUT RANGES FOR CO CONCENTRATION The analyzer has several active analog output signals accessible through the ANALOG OUT connector on the rear panel j Teledyne Analytical Instruments These automatic procedures are SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer ANALOG OUT CO concentration Only active if the Optional outputs CO or Sensor is Test Channel A1
197. centration alarms and set the limit points press SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until the desired Alarm is selected SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT SETUP X X CO ALRM 2 DISALBED NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X CO ALRM 2 OFF ON ENTR EXIT Toggle this button to enable disable the alarm DIAG FCAL CO ALARM 2 300 00 PPM 3 0 0 0 0 ENIR EXIT EXIT discards the new Toggle these setting buttons to Set the alarm point ENTR accepts the new setting 7 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 137 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer This page intentionally left blank j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 138 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 6 COMMUNICATIONS SETUP AND OPERATION This instrument rear panel connections include an Ethernet port a USB port option and two serial communications ports labeled RS232 which is the COMI port and COM2 located on the rear panel refer to Figure 3 4 These ports give the user the ability to communicate with issue commands to and receive data from the analyzer through an external computer system or terminal This section provides pertinent information regarding communication equipment describes the instrument s communications modes presents configuration instruct
198. channels have not DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO been calibrated or if at least one channel has AUTO CAL turned SET gt CAL OFF this message will read NO IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Manual calibration should be used for any analog output set for a 0 1V output range or in cases where the outputs must be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 123 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 9 3 5 INDIVIDUAL CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS To use the AUTO CAL feature to initiate an automatic calibration for an individual analog output select the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION submenu see Figure 5 3 then press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR AOUTS CALIBRATED NO CAL Continue pressing SET gt until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 5V CONC2 NOCAL lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 RANGE 5V SET EDIT Continue pressing SET until DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CALIBRATED NO SET SET CAL EXIT DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC OUT 2 DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CALIBRATED YES SET SET CAL EXIT j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 124 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 9 3 6 MANUAL CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS CONFIGURED FOR VOLTAGE RANGES For highest accuracy the voltages of the analog outputs can be
199. chattering During conditions of constant or nearly constant concentration the software by default computes an average of the last 750 samples or approximately 150 seconds This provides the calculation portion of the software with smooth stable readings If a rapid change in concentration is detected the filter includes by default the last 48 samples approximately 10 seconds of data to allow the analyzer to more quickly respond If necessary these boxcar lengths can be changed between 1 and 1000 samples but with corresponding tradeoffs in rise time and signal to noise ratio contact customer service for more information Two conditions must be simultaneously met to switch to the short filter First the instantaneous concentration must exceed the average in the long filter by a fixed amount Second the instantaneous concentration must exceed the average in the long filter by a portion or percentage of the average in the long filter j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 313 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 13 5 2 CALIBRATION SLOPE AND OFFSET Calibration of the analyzer is performed exclusively in software During instrument calibration see Section 9 the user enters expected values for zero and span via the front panel control buttonand commands the instrument to make readings of calibrated sample gases for both levels The readings taken are adjusted linearized and compared to the expected
200. components of those components 13 4 2 3 GFC WHEEL A synchronous AC motor turns the GFC Wheel motor For analyzers operating on 60Hz line power this motor turns at 1800 rpm For those operating on 50Hz line power the spin rate is 1500 rpm The actual spin rate is unimportant within a large range since a phase lock loop circuit is used to generate timing pulses for signal processing In order to accurately interpret the fluctuations of the IR beam after it has passed through the sample gas the GFC Wheel several other timing signals are produced by 49i Teledyne Analytical Instruments 300 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer other photo emitters detectors These devices consist of a combination LED and detector mounted so that the light emitted by the LED shines through the same mask on the GFC Wheel that chops the IR beam KEY Detection Beam shining 2 a through MEASUREMENT 2 side of Wheel P4 Detection Beam shining through REFERENCE side of GFC Wheel Figure 13 11 GFC Light Mask M R SENSOR This emitter detector assembly produces a signal that shines through a portion of the mask that allows light to pass for half of a full revolution of the wheel The resulting light signal tells the analyzer whether the IR beam is shining through the measurement or the reference side of the GFC Wheel SEGMENT SENSOR Light from this emitter detector pair shines through a portion of the
201. cott Specialty Gases etc See Table 3 12 for a list of appropriate SRMs 10 1 4 CALIBRATION FREQUENCY To ensure accurate measurements of the CO concentrations calibrate the analyzer at the time of installation and recalibrate it e No later than three months after the most recent calibration or performance audit which indicate the analyzer s calibration to be acceptable e When there is an interruption of more than a few days in analyzer operation e When any repairs have taken place which might affect its calibration e After a physical relocation of the analyzer e When any other indication including excessive zero or span drift of possible significant inaccuracy of the analyzer exists Following any of the activities listed above the zero and span should be checked to determine if a calibration is necessary Table 10 2 Activity Matrix for Quality Assurance Checks Characteristic Acceptance limits Frequency andi methed er Action if requirements are not met measurement Mean temperature between 22 C and 28 C 72 and 82 F daily fluctuations not greater Check thermograph chart Mark strip chart for the affected time Shelter temperature weekly for variations greater period than 2 C than 2 4 F Repair or adjust temperature control No moisture foreign material leaks obstructions sample line Weekly visual inspection Clean repair or replace as needed connected to manifold Sample introduction sy
202. ctric charging happens when someone ji Teledyne Analytical Instruments Teledyne Technical Manual Model T300 Family CO Analyzers ESD wearing leather or rubber soled shoes walks across a nylon carpet or linoleum tiled floor With each step electrons change places and the resulting electro static charge builds up quickly reaching significant levels Pushing an epoxy printed circuit board across a workbench using a plastic handled screwdriver or even the constant jostling of Styrofoam pellets during shipment can also build hefty static charges Table 14 1 Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities Moving around in a chair padded 1 500V 18 000V with urethane foam 14 2 HOW ELECTRO STATIC CHARGES CAUSE DAMAGE Damage to components occurs when these static charges come into contact with an electronic device Current flows as the charge moves along the conductive circuitry of the device and the typically very high voltage levels of the charge overheat the delicate traces of the integrated circuits melting them or even vaporizing parts of them When examined by microscope the damage caused by electro static discharge looks a lot like tiny bomb craters littered across the landscape of the component s circuitry A quick comparison of the values in Table 14 1 with the those shown in the Table 14 2 listing device susceptibility levels shows why Semiconductor Reliability News estimates that approximately 6095 of device fail
203. d the analyzer performs an electrical test which generates a voltage intended to simulate the measure and reference outputs of the SYNC DEMOD board to verify the signal handling and conditioning of these signals Disconnects the preamp from synchronous demodulation circuitry on the SYNC DEMOD PCA to establish the dark offset values for the measure and reference channel Allows the user to calibrate the sample pressure sensor DIAG SIGNAL DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT DIAG ANALOG CONFIGURATI ON DIAG ELECTRICAL TEST DIAG DARK CALIBRATION DIAG PRESSURE CALIBRATION This function is used to calibrate the gas flow output DIAG FLOW 5 9 7 and signals of sample gas and ozone supply CALIBRATION 9 6 3 Selects one of the available test channel signals to output over the A4 analog output channel These settings are retained after exiting DIAG mode DIAG TEST 5 9 8 and CHAN OUTPUT 12 582 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 113 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer To access the DIAG functions press the following buttons SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XXXX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP DIAG SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP ENTER PASSWORD 818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT DIAG ELECTRICAL TE
204. d Span calibration can be checked in a variety of different ways They include e Manual Zero Span Check Zero and Span can be checked from the front panel touchscreen The procedure is in Section 9 3 of this manual e Automatic Zero Span Checks After the appropriate setup Z S checks can be performed automatically every night See Section 9 3 of this manual for setup and operation procedures If using the AutoCal feature to perform a calibration check set the CALIBRATE parameter to NO e Zero Span checks via remote contact closure Zero Span checks can be initiated via remote contact closures on the rear panel See Section 9 3 3 3 of this manual e Zero Span via RS 232 port Z S checks can be controlled via the RS 232 port See Section 9 3 3 3 and Appendix A 6 of this manual for more details 10 2 2 PRECISION CHECK A periodic check is used to assess the data for precision A one point precision check must be carried out at least once every 2 weeks on each analyzer at a CO concentration between 8 0 ppm and 10 0 ppm The analyzer must be operated in its normal sampling mode and the precision test gas must pass through all filters scrubbers conditioners and other components used during normal ambient sampling The standards from which precision check test concentrations are obtained must be traceable to NIST SRM Those standards used for calibration or auditing may be used To perform a precision check during the instrument s
205. d be connected to the VENT SPAN outlet on the back of the analyzer EXHAUST OUTLET Attach an exhaust line to the analyzer s EXHAUST outlet fitting The exhaust line should be e PTEF tubing minimum 4 e A maximum of 10 meters long e Vented outside the analyzer s enclosure 3 3 2 9 PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR ZERO SCRUBBER AMBIENT SPAN OPTION c Dr INSTRUMENT CHASSIS GAS INLET Sample Cal Span PRESSURE SPAN INLET Particulate Filter ae ZERO AIR Gas wer SAMPLE CHAMBER ZERO Air Scrubber Sample Pressure Sensor EXHAUST GAS OUTLET Sample Gas Flow Control Figure 3 27 Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50H Zero Scrubber Ambient Span Table 3 11 Zero Span Valve Operating States for Option 50H MODE VALVE CONDITION SAMPLE Sample Cal Open to SAMPLE inlet Normal State Zero Span Open to ZERO AIR scrubber Sample Cal Open to ZERO SPAN valve ZERO CAL Zero Span Open to ZERO AIR scrubber Sample Cal Open to ZERO SPAN valve SPAN CAL Zero Span Open to PRESSURE SPAN inlet j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 70 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 3 3 2 10 CALIBRATION GASES Zero air and span gas are required for accurate calibration ZERO AIR Zero air is a gas that is similar in chemical composition to the earth s atmosphere but scrubbed of all components that might affect the
206. d be in operation for at least several hours preferably overnight before calibration so that it is fully warmed up and its operation has stabilized 5 Ifthe instrument will be used on more than one range it should be calibrated separately on each applicable range 6 Calibration documentation should be maintained with each analyzer and also in a central backup file 7 The true values of the calibration gases used must be traceable to NIST SRMs See Table 3 12 10 1 2 CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT SUPPLIES AND EXPENDABLES The measurement of CO in ambient air requires a certain amount of basic sampling equipment and supplemental supplies The Quality Assurance Handbook Section 2 6 contains information about setting up the appropriate systems 10 1 2 1 DATA RECORDING DEVICE Either a strip chart recorder data acquisition system digital data acquisition system should be used to record the data from the Mode GFC7001T RS 232 port or analog outputs If analog readings are being used the response of that system should be checked against a NIST referenced voltage source or meter Data recording device should be capable of bi polar operation so that negative readings can be recorded 10 1 2 2 SPARE PARTS AND EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES In addition to the basic equipment described in the Q A Handbook it is necessary to maintain an inventory of spare parts and expendable supplies Section 11 describes the parts that require periodic replacement and the
207. d in order to ensure that the gases input do not exceed the maximum inlet pressure of the analyzer as well as to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects These vents should be e Atleast 0 2m long e No more than 2m long and e Vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument A similar vent line should be connected to the VENT SPAN outlet on the back of the analyzer EXHAUST OUTLET Attach an exhaust line to the analyzer s EXHAUST outlet fitting The exhaust line should be e PTEF tubing minimum O D 1 4 e A maximum of 10 meters long e Vented outside the analyzer s enclosure j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 67 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 3 3 2 7 PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR ZERO SCRUBBER PRESSURIZED SPAN OPTION Sample Ea INSTRUMENT CHASSIS GAS INLET Shutoff PRESSURE as Particulate 1n SPAN INLET rcm Filter Valve Sample Cal Span Gas Flow Control VENT SPAN Zero Span Valve Zero ZERO AIR Gas EXHAUST GAS OUTLET 2 In Sample Gas Flow Control SAMPLE CHAMBER Figure 3 25 Internal Pneumatic Flow Zero Scrubber Pressurized Span Calibration Valves Opt 50E Table 3 10 Zero Span Valve Operating States for Option 50E Mode Valve Condition Sample Cal Open to SAMPLE inlet SAMPLE Zero Span Open to internal ZERO AIR Normal State scrubber Shutoff Valve Closed
208. d offline and then uploaded through a specific transfer procedure The commands that are used to operate the analyzer in this mode are listed in Table 8 1 and in Appendix A 8 2 1 1 HELP COMMANDS IN INTERACTIVE MODE Table 8 1 Interactive Mode Software Commands Switches the analyzer to terminal mode echo edit If mode flags 1 amp 2 are OFF the Control T SC 1 interface can be used in interactive mode with a terminal emulation program Control C CR carriage return BS backspace ID CR Switches the analyzer to computer mode no echo no edit A carriage return is required after each command line is typed into the terminal computer The command will not be sent to the analyzer to be executed until this is done On personal computers this is achieved by pressing the ENTER button Erases one character to the left of the cursor location ESC escape Erases the entire command line This command prints a complete list of available commands along with the definitions of their functionality to the display device of the terminal or computer being used The ID number of the analyzer is only necessary if multiple analyzers are on the same communications line such as the multi drop setup 8 2 1 2 COMMAND SYNTAX Commands are not case sensitive and all arguments within one command i e ID numbers key words data values etc must be separated with a space character All Commands follow the syntax X ID COMMA
209. de for documentation and accountability of activities a checklist should be compiled and then filled out by the field operator as each activity is completed Table 10 3 Definition of Level 1 and Level 2 Zero and Span Checks Q A Handbook Vol II Part1 Section 12 3 amp 12 4 LEVEL 1 ZERO AND SPAN CALIBRATION A Level 1 zero and span calibration is a simplified two point analyzer calibration used when analyzer linearity does not need to be checked or verified Sometimes when no adjustments are made to the analyzer the Level 1 calibration may be called a zero span check in which case it must not be confused with a Level 2 zero span check Since most analyzers have a reliably linear or near linear output response with concentration they can be adequately calibrated with only two concentration standards two point concentration Furthermore one of the standards may be zero concentration which is relatively easily obtained and need not be certified Hence only one certified concentration standard is needed for the two point Level 1 zero and span calibration Although lacking the advantages of the multipoint calibration the two point zero and span calibration because of its simplicity can be and should be carried out much more frequently Also two point calibrations are easily automated Frequency checks or updating of the calibration relationship with a two point zero and span calibration improves the quality of the
210. den dee ed nee Sa aene booa pede eae 129 Test Channels Functions available on the GFC7001T GFC7001TM s Analog Output 135 CO Concentration Alarm Default Settings ssssssseeem emen 137 COMM Port Communication Modes ssssssssssseseseeseeeee eren nennen eterne nennen 140 Ethernet Status Indicatots ein cess nt e aaepe pitt e nee ead ae sa aue atte X 143 LAN Internet Default Configuration Properties em 144 RS 232 Communication Parameters for Hessen 152 Teledyne s Hessen Protocol Response 156 Default Hessen Status Flag Assignments 160 Front Panel LED Status Indicators for 163 DAS Data Channel enne eene nennen nennen 165 DAS Data Parameter Functions ssssssssssssssseee eene 173 Interactive Mode Software enne 186 Teledyne s Serial 1 0 Command Types sss eene 186 NIST SRMs Available for Traceability of CO Calibration Gases 194 AUTOCAL MOdSs err te eee i e t
211. e GFC7001T GFC7001 TM s COMM ports see Section 6 2 2 To change the rest of the COMM port parameters listed in Table 6 4 see Section 6 2 and Table 6 1 IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Ensure that the communication parameters of the host computer are also j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 152 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Note The instrument software has a 200 ms latency before it responds to commands issued by the host computer This latency should present no problems but you should be aware of it and not issue commands to the instrument too quickly 6 7 2 2 ACTIVATING HESSEN PROTOCOL Once the COMM port has been properly configured the next step in configuring the GFC7001T GFC7001TM to operate over a Hessen protocol network is to activate the Hessen mode for COMM ports and configure the communication parameters for the port s appropriately To activate the Hessen Protocol press j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 153 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID COM1 COM2 CS Combined Mode ID 1 MODE 0 displayed here LT SET SET EDIT COM1 QUIET MODE OFF PREV NEXT OFF EXIT Use the PREV and _ NEXT butto
212. e analyzer are controlled by a set of electronic switches located on the relay board These switches under CPU control supply the 12VDC needed to activate each valve s solenoid 13 4 4 4 IR SOURCE The relay board supplies a constant 11 5 VDC to the IR Source Under normal operation the IR source is always on 13 4 4 5 STATUS LEDS Eight LEDs are located on the analyzer s relay board to show the current status on the various control functions performed by the relay board They are listed on Table 13 4 Table 13 4 Relay Board Status LEDs LED COLOR FUNCTION STATUS WHEN LIT STATUS WHEN UNLIT D1 RED Watch Dog Circuit i On Off every 3 seconds under direct control of the analyzer s D2 YELLOW Wheel Heater HEATING NOT HEATING D3 YELLOW Bench Heater HEATING NOT HEATING D4 YELLOW Spare N A N A D5 GREEN mat rk valve Valve Open to CAL GAS FLOW Valve Open to SAMPLE Gas Flow D6 GREEN Zero Span Gas Valve Option Valve Open to SPAN GAS FLOW Valve Open to ZERO GAS FLOW D7 GREEN Shutoff Valve Option Valve Open to CAL GAS FLOW Valve CAL GAS D8 GREEN IR SOURCE Source ON Source OFF j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 306 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer DC VOLTAGE TEST POINTS ZEEE STATUS LED s Figure 13 15 Location of relay board Status LEDs 13 4 4 6 I2C WATCH DOG CIRCUITRY Special circuitry on the relay
213. e operation of the analyzer The following flowchart shows an example of how to use the Signal I O menu to view the raw voltage of an input signal or to control the state of an output voltage or control signal See also Sections 5 9 1 and 12 5 8 1 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 255 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XXXX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT DIAG SIGNAL I O SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU NEXT COMM VARS DIAG EXIT DIAG I O 0 EXT_ZERO_CAL OFF SETUP ENTER PASSWORD 818 PREV NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT Press PREV and 1 8 ENTR EXIT LL NEXT to cycle through the signal types DIAG I O 1 EXT_SPAN_CAL OFF EDIT PRNT EXIT Press JUMP to go directly to a specific signal see Appendix A for a list DIAG I O JUMPTO 0 of all O SIGNALS gt 0 0 JUMP ENTR EXIT LLL PREV NEXT JUMP Toggle to set location No of the EXAMPLE VAR to JUMP to DIAG I O JUMPTO 22 2 2 JUMP ENTR EXIT DIAG I O 22 RELAY_WATCHDOG ON PREV NEXT JUMP OFF PRNT EXI On status signals this Pressing PRNT will send a formatted button toggles the printout to the serial port and can be signal ON OFF 5 captured with a computer or other output device Figure 12 2 Example of Signal I O Function Note Any I O signals changed while in the signal I O menu will remain in effect ONLY unti
214. e performed on the analyzer as described in the maintenance schedule Table 11 1 Procedures for correctly performing leak checks can be found in Section 11 3 2 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 294 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer The sample gas is to be made available to the analyzer at a pressure slightly above ambient but sufficient to allow for a proper flow though the sample lines The internal sample system has been designed with minimal restriction allowing sufficient flow at very low pressure The input pressure must be reduced and regulated from the process pressure using a pressure regulator needle valve restrictor critical orifice or any combination thereof before entering the analyzer I Sample Gas Flow Control a aa EN GEN INSTRUMENT CHASSIS SAINT Particulate Filter Lo 2l m I i GFC Wheel l Housing i I SAMPLE CHAMBER i I I I SAMPLE PRESSURE I o_ ff SENSOR GAS OUTLET ceca l m I I I Figure 13 7 Internal Pneumatic Flow Basic Configuration 13 3 FLOW RATE CONTROL To maintain a constant flow rate of the sample gas through the instrument the GFC7001T GFC7001 TM uses a special flow control assembly located in the exhaust gas line In instruments with the sensor installed a second flow control assembly is located between the O sensor assembly and the exhaust port These assembli
215. e rear panel and turn on power to the machine 9 Ifthe replacement DOM carries a firmware revision re enter all of the setup information j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 286 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 7 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS The following is a list from Teledyne s Customer Service Department of the most commonly asked questions relating to the GFC7001T GFC7001TM CO Analyzer QUESTION ANSWER Why does the ENTR button During certain types of adjustments or configuration operations the sometimes disappear on the Front ENTR button will disappear if you select a setting that is out of the Panel Display allowable range for that parameter such as trying to set the 24 hour clock to 25 00 00 or selecting a DAS hold off period of more than 20 minutes Once you adjust the setting in question to an allowable value the ENTR button will re appear Why is the ZERO or SPAN button The GFC7001T GFC7001TM disables these buttons when the expected not displayed during calibration span or zero value entered by the users is too different from the gas concentration actually measured value at the time This is to prevent the accidental recalibration of the analyzer to an out of range response curve EXAMPLE The span set point is 40 ppm but gas concentration being measured is only 5 ppm For more information see Sections 12 3 3 and 12 3 4 How do I enter or chang
216. e results of a previous calibration press SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 8 1 8 ENTR SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT Continue pressing NEXT until DARK CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR DIAG DARK CO DARK CALIBRATION VIEW CAL EXIT Calibration runs automatically DIAG DARK REF DARK OFFSET 0 0mV DIAG DARK DARK CAL 1 COMPLETE EXIT EXIT DIAG DARK MEAS DARK OFFSET 0 0mV DIAG DARK DARK CALIBRATION ABORTED EXIT EXIT 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 215 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 6 2 PRESSURE CALIBRATION IMPORTANT A sensor at the sample chamber outlet continuously measures the pressure of the sample gas These data are used to compensate the final CO concentration calculation for changes in atmospheric pressure and is stored in the CPU s memory as the test function PRES also viewable via the front panel See also Section 5 9 6 IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA This calibration must be performed when the pressure of the sample gas is equal to ambient atmospheric pressure Before performing the following pressure calibration procedure disconnect the sample gas line vent from the rear panel sample gas inlet To cause the analyzer to measure and record a value for PRES press SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP
217. e sample chamber continuously measures the pressure of the sample gas The data are used to compensate the final CO concentration calculation for changes in atmospheric pressure and are stored in the CPU s memory as the test function PRES also viewable via the front panel For details see Section 9 6 2 5 9 7 FLOW CALIBRATION The flow calibration allows the user to adjust the values of the sample flow rates as they are displayed on the front panel and reported through COMM ports to match the actual flow rate measured at the sample inlet This does not change the hardware measurement of the flow sensors only the software calculated values For details see Section 9 6 3 5 9 8 TEST CHAN OUTPUT When activated output channel A4 can be used in the standard configuration to report one of the test functions viewable from the SAMPLE mode display See also Section 12 5 8 2 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 134 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 9 8 1 SELECTING A TEST CHANNEL FUNCTION FOR OUTPUT A4 The test functions available to be reported are listed in Table 5 9 Table 5 9 Test Channels Functions available on the GFC7001T GFC7001TM s Analog Output TEST CHANNEL DESCRIPTION ZERO FULL SCALE TEST CHANNEL IS TURNED OFF The demodulated peak IR detector output CO MEASURE during the measure portion of the GFC Wheel 5000 mV cycle The demodulated peak IR detector output CO REFERENCE durin
218. e sensor Relay controlling the wheel heater Entire relay board bus 12 1 2 FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH TEST FUNCTIONS Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools the test functions viewable from the front panel can be used to isolate and identify many operational problems when combined with a thorough understanding of the analyzer s Theory of Operation see Section 13 The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in the Nominal Range column of the analyzer Final Test and Validation Data Sheet GFC7001T P N 04307 and GFC7001TM P N 04311 shipped with the instrument Values outside these acceptable ranges indicate a failure of one or more of the analyzer s subsystems Functions whose 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 253 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Note values are still within the acceptable range but have significantly changed from the measurement recorded on the factory data sheet may also indicate a failure A worksheet has been provided in Appendix C to assist in recording the value of these test functions This worksheet also includes expected values for the various test functions The following table contains some of the more common causes for these values to be out of range Table 12 2 Test Functions Indicated Failures TEST FUNCTIONS As Displayed INDICATED FAILURE S Time of day clock is too fast or slow
219. e stabilized j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 74 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer RANGE 50 0 PPM lt TST TST gt CAL Toggle lt TST TST gt UN to scroll through list of functions 1 This will match the currently selected units of measure for the range being displayed Only appears if CO sensor option is installed 3 Only appears if sensor option is installed The STABILE function can be set to display data related to any of the gasses the analyzer measures e g if either the CO or the sensor options are installed Only appears if analog output A4 is actively reporting a TEST FUNCTION 3 4 4 INITIAL CALIBRATION To perform the following calibration you must have sources for zero air and span gas available for input into the sample port on the back of the analyzer See Section 3 3 2 CO XX XX SETUP e RANGE Value PPB 1 e RANGE1 Value PPB 1 e RANGE2 Value PPB e CO2 RANGE Value O2 RANGE Value e STABIL Value PPM e COMEAS Value MV e COREF Value MV e MR RATIO Value e PRESS z Value IN HG A e SAMP FL Value CC M e SAMPLE TEMP ValuePC e BENCH TEMP ValuePC e WHEEL TEMP ValuePC e O2 CELL TEMP ValueP C e BOX TEMP ValuePC e PHT DRIVE Value MV e SLOPE Value e OFFSET Value MV e CO2 SLOPE Valuef e CO2 OFFSET Value MV e O2 SLOPE Valuef e O2 OFFSET Value MV e TEST Value MV e TI
220. e the value Press the CONC button found under the CAL or CALS buttons of the of my Span Gas main SAMPLE display menus to enter the expected CO span concentration See Section 0 for more information Why does the analyzer not There could be something wrong with a span gas tank or a span gas respond to span gas concentration was entered incorrectly or there could be a pneumatic leak Section 12 3 3 addresses these issues Is there an optional midpoint There is an optional mid point linearity adjustment however midpoint calibration adjustment is applicable only to applications where CO measurements are expected above 100 ppm Call Teledyne Customer Service Department for more information on this topic What do do if the concentration This most commonly occurs for one of the following reasons on the instrument s front panel display does not match the value recorded or displayed on my data logger even if both instruments are A scale problem with the input to the data logger properly calibrated The analog outputs of the GFC7001T GFC7001TM can be manually adjusted to compensate for either or both of these effects see Section 5 9 3 9 e The analog outputs are not calibrated which can happen after a firmware upgrade Both the electronic scale and offset of the analog outputs can be adjusted see Section 5 9 3 2 Alternately use the data logger itself as the metering device during calibration procedures e A differe
221. eS TSMR ee Only appears if either the SAMPLE GAS TO CAL CO Oz or the CO sensor is ik COE S ENTR EXIT installed SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL LOW Analyzers enters LOW HIGH ENTREXIT ZERO cal edd oe le po Gee DU er Jet a ied mode ZERO CALM STABIL XXXX PPM CO XXXX Press ENTR to change the OFFSET lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC EXIT amp SLOPE values for the CO measurement Only appears if the DUAL E AUTO cance ZEROCALM STABILs XXXX PPM CO XXXX unchanged and retim i the selected lt TST TST gt ENTR CONC EXIT Previous menu Use these buttons to choose the appropriate range Allow span gas to enter the sample port Repeat entire me P at the rear of the analyzer Wait until STABIL falls below 0 2 PPM for T300 or 1 0 PPM for T300M PLE STABILE XXXX PPM This may take several minutes for each range Only appears if IST TST gt CAL CALZCALS SETUP either the O2 or the 2 sensor is installed When the analyzer enters SPAN cal mode the SPAN button appears You may see both buttons during the transition from ENTR EX ZERO to SPAN modes IL If either the ZERO or SPAN button fails to appear see Section 11 for troubleshooting tips ENTR EX ISAMPLE RANGE TO CAL LOW STABIL XXXX PPM COZX XXX ZERO SPAN CONC EX STABIL XXXX PPM CO X XXX Press ENTR to change the OFFSET
222. each analyzer model the list of available data parameters is different fully defined and not customizable Appendix A 5 lists firmware specific data parameters for the GFC7001T GFC7001TM DAS parameters include things like CO concentration measurements temperatures of the various heaters placed around the analyzer pressures and flows of the pneumatic subsystem and other diagnostic measurements as well as calibration data such as stability slope and offset Most data parameters have associated measurement units such as mV ppb cm min etc although some parameters have no units e g SLOPE With the exception of concentration readings none of these units of measure can be changed To change the units of measure for concentration readings see Section 5 4 4 concentration value and DAS data files may contain concentrations in more than one type of unit if the unit was changed during data acquisition j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 172 DAC and APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Each data parameter has user configurable functions that define how the data are recorded refer to Table 7 3 Table 7 3 DAS Data Parameter Functions FUNCTION EFFECT PARAMETER Instrument specific parameter name SAMPLE MODE INST Records instantaneous reading AVG Records average reading during reporting interval SDEV Records the standard deviation of the data points recorded during the reporting interval MIN Records
223. ects of Interfering Gas on CO MEAS amp CO REF Thus the difference in the peak heights and the resulting M R ratio is only due to CO and not to interfering gases In this case GFC rejects the effects of interfering gases and so that the analyzer responds only to the presence of CO To improve the signal to noise performance of the IR photo detector the GFC Wheel also incorporates an optical mask that chops the IR beam into alternating pulses of light and dark at six times the frequency of the measure reference signal This limits the detection bandwidth helping to reject interfering signals from outside this bandwidth improving the signal to noise ratio The IR Signal as the Photo Detector sees it after being chopped by the GFC Wheel Wim mm 1 T CO MEAS CO REF Figure 13 6 Chopped IR Signal 13 2 1 3 SUMMARY INTERFERENCE REJECTION The basic design of the GFC7001T GFC7001TM rejects most of this interference at a 300 1 ratio The two primary methods used to accomplish this are e The 4 7um band pass filter just before the IR sensor which allows the instrument to only react to IR absorption in the wavelength affected by CO e Comparison of the measure and reference signals and extraction of the ratio between them e Pneumatic Operation CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD It is important that the sample airflow system is both leak tight and not pressurized A over ambient pressure Regular leak checks should b
224. ed e Uude oei e ie e Read es Rede Rede 208 AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters sss eene nennen 209 Example AutoCal seen nennen enne nennen nnn 210 Calibration Data Quality Evaluation ssseeee em emm emn 214 Matrix for Calibration Equipment amp Supplies sse 228 Activity Matrix for Quality Assurance Checks ssssseeee enne 229 Definition of Level 1 and Level 2 Zero and Span 230 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Maintenance Schedule sse 243 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Test Function 244 Predictive uses for Test 245 Warning Messages Indicated Failures esee een emen 252 Test Functions Indicated 254 Sync Demod Board Status Failure Indications 258 BG Status LED Fall re drdiGatiofis s onerat et lados tian a a Ge tope oda satin see 259 Relay Board Status LED Failure Indications ssesese emn 260 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments xviii Table of ContentsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Table 12 6 Table 12 7 Table 12 8
225. eer 268 12 4 1 3 GFC Wheel Temperature et a eea entnehmen tenni innen erir 269 12 4 1 4 IR Photo Detector TEC mee errem 269 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments xiii Table of ContentsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 124 2 Excessive el ee ee ee i ee a a ade ee aiat ines eb a le ee dete 270 12 5 Subsystem CheckOlt aaa aoe deme end ee e EE Ie cei di 271 12 54 AC Mains Configurations ccs eoe rte Ete PEE e REED eo fene de POR EOD eee elite ced 271 12 5 2 DC Power Supply attri ae tad edes ti eta rm eese ti eae Mire de hed 271 BUS ostiis us in herein Ute aatia Ott Oo sp pir Ota 272 12 5 4 Touchscreen Interface etre eee e nene eit eere dane 272 12 5 5 LCD Display Module eaire aeie a a uie Det Lt d i PO n 272 12 5 6 og Lodo tere dL ee era de EG e Ue der d UELLE e reas 272 12 57 Sensor Asseribly 3 5 ero edere Hes po di Hp re eir e b eere 273 12 5 7 1 Sync Demodulator Assembly eene nennen eren 273 12 5 72 Electrical eer t REO Moneta agate desk a itat erede 274 12 5 7 3 Opto Pickup Assembly o tdm rt d RE Fer f EO Ee Od ER ee tees aati e eec as 274 12 5 A GFO Wheel DING aiti e te d VR a ma des v ER ett deme 274 12 5 7 5 R SOUE CO T Ce
226. efault GAS ID is 310 This ID number should not be modified REPORT States whether this list entry is to be reported or not reported when ever this gas type or instrument is polled by the HESSEN network If the list entry is not to be reported this field will be blank While the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer is a single gas instrument that measures CO it can have additional optional sensors for CO or installed The default gas list entries for these three gases are CO 0 310 REPORTED CO 0 311 REPORTED O5 0 312 REPORTED These default settings cause the instrument to report the concentration value of the currently active range If you wish to have just concentration value stored for a specific range this list entry should be edited or additional entries should be added to the list EXAMPLE Changing the above CO gas list entry to read CO 2 310 REPORTED would cause only the last CO reading while RANGE2 HIGH range was active to be recorded j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 157 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 6 7 3 2 EDITING OR ADDING HESSEN GAS LIST ENTRIES To add or edit an entry to the Hessen Gas List press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB NOX XXXX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT HESSEN VARIATION TYPE1 lt SET SET
227. el of the output CONC_OUT_1 A1 e REC OFS Allows them input of a DC offset to let the user manually adjust the output level e AUTO CAL Enables Disables the AOUT CALIBRATED feature e CALIBRATED Performs the same calibration as AOUT CALIBRATED but on this one channel only CONC_OUT_2 A2 Same as for CONC OUT 1 but for analog channel A2 CONC OUT 3 A3 Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel A3 but only if either the optional or CO sensors are installed TEST OUTPUT A4 e Same as for CONC OUT 1 but for analog channel A4 TEST CHANNEL AIN N A Initiates a calibration of the A to D Converter circuit located on the CALIBRATED Motherboard XIN1 For each of 8 external analog input channels shows the gain offset engineering units and whether the channel is to show up as a Test function XIN8 i Any changes made to RANGE or REC_OFS require recalibration of this output j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 117 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Toggle these buttons to enter the correct PASSWORD To access the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION submenu press SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT DIAG SIGNAL I O NEXT ENTR EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until DIAG ANALOG I O CONFI
228. elevant EDIT DHCP OFF SET INST IP 000 000 000 000 SET SET EDIT g ursor location is indicated by brackets INST IP 0 00 000 000 lt CH CH gt DEL 0 ENTR EXIT GATEWAY IP 000 000 000 000 lt SET SET gt EDIT GATEWAY IP 0 00 000 000 lt CH CH gt DEL ENTR EXIT SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 SET SET m SUBNET MASK 2 55 255 255 0 TCP PORT 3000 lt CH CH gt DEL ENTR EXIT lt SET The PORT number must remain at 3000 ere causes the Ethernet option to reinitialize its internal interface firmware INITIALIZING INET 0 any of the above INITIALIZING INET 100 Do not change this setting unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel display menus INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED INITIALIZATION FAILED SETUP ID COMMUNI CATIONS MENU COM2 Contact your IT Network Administrator EXIT Figure 6 4 COMM LAN Internet Manual Configuration 4 Teledyne Anal ytical Instruments 145 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 6 5 2 CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATION USING DYNAMIC HOST CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL DHCP The default Ethernet setting is DHCP 1 See your network administrator to affirm that your network server is running DHCP 2
229. ely through the COM ports or digital control inputs ZERO CAL Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated automatically by the AUTOCAL feature ZERO CAL M Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated manually by the user ZERO CAL R Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital control inputs 1 Only Appears on units with Z S valve or IZS options The revision of the analyzer firmware is displayed following the word SETUP e g SETUP G 3 SPAN CAL M Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated manually by the user 4 1 SAMPLE MODE This is the analyzer s standard operating mode In this mode the instrument is analyzing the gas in the sample chamber calculating CO concentration and reporting this information to the user via the front panel display the analog outputs and if set up properly the RS 232 RS 485 Ethernet USB ports 4 1 1 TEST FUNCTIONS A series of TEST functions is available for viewing at the front panel whenever the analyzer is at the SAMPLE mode These parameters provide information about the present operating status of the instrument and are useful during troubleshooting refer to Section 12 1 2 They can also be recorded in one of the DAS channels refer to Section 7 2 for data analysis To view the test functions press one of the TST TST gt buttons repeatedly in either direction j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 86
230. en peripheral devices and a host controller such as a mouse and or keyboard and a personal computer or laptop VARS Variables the variable settings of the instrument V F Voltage to Frequency ZIS Zero Span j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 326
231. enever the instrument s SPAN point is being calibrated DIAG MODE ON whenever the instrument is in DIAGNOSTIC mode If this analyzer is equipped with an optional sensor this Output is ON when that CAL sensor is in calibration mode Otherwise this output is unused If this analyzer is equipped with an optional O2 sensor this Output is ON when that CAL sensor is in calibration mode Otherwise this output is unused EMITTER BUS The emitters of the transistors on pins 1 8 are bussed together SPARE DC POWER 5 VDC 300 mA source maximum Digital Ground The ground level from the analyzer s internal DC power supplies 3 3 1 6 CONNECTING THE CONTROL INPUTS To remotely activate the zero and span calibration modes several digital control inputs are provided through a 10 pin connector labeled CONTROL IN on the analyzer s rear panel There are two methods for energizing the control inputs The internal 5V available from the pin labeled is the most convenient method However if full isolation is required an external 5 VDC power supply should be used j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 49 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer CONTROL IN CONTROL IN A BC up D E F z Z 2 2 ol al fl al a vj wf 2 2 5 VDC Power Supply Local Power Connections External Power Connections Fi
232. ennen enne nennen enne 92 5 SETUP MENU 93 5 1 SETUP gt CFG Configuration Information sss eene nennen nennen ener nnns 93 5 2 SETUP gt ACAL Automatic Calibration sesisih enne nnne nens 94 5 3 SETUP DAS Internal Data Acquisition System ssssssssssssssseeeneeeeneenen nennen 94 5 4 SETUP gt RNGE Analog Output Reporting Range Configuration eee 94 5 4 1 Analog Output Ranges for CO Concentration 94 5 4 2 Physical Range vs Analog Output Reporting 95 5 4 3 Reporting Range Modes Single Dual Auto Ranges 96 5 4 3 1 SINGLE Range Mode SNGL ATS 98 9 4 3 2 DUAL Range Mode DUAL y pte hb Roter PEE Rb a HR den 99 9 4 3 3 AUTO Range Mode AUTO ETUR AUS 101 95 4 4 Range errat nation laa 103 5 4 5 Dilutiori Ratio Optiori asses niit pater eo ri D ete eni c pta e Beute qat Bode 104 5 5 SETUP PASS Password Protection iiec phe e Deinde m eR eee 105 5 6 SETUP gt CLK Setting the Internal Time of Day Clock and Adjusting 108 5 6 1 1 Setting the Internal Clock s Time and Day sssssssenm em emm eem 108 5 6 1 2 Adj
233. ent is powered off in the middle of a REPORT PERIOD the samples accumulated so far during that period are lost Once the instrument is turned back on the DAS restarts taking samples and temporarily stores them in volatile memory as part of the REPORT PERIOD currently active at the time of restart At the end of this REPORT PERIOD PERIOD only the sample readings taken since the instrument was turned back on will be included in any AVG SDEV MIN or MAX calculation Also the STORE NUM SAMPLES feature will report the number of sample readings taken since the instrument was restarted j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 176 DAC and APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 7 1 8 NUMBER OF RECORDS The number of data records in the DAS is limited to about a cumulative one million data points in all channels one megabyte of space on the Disk on Module However the actual number of records is also limited by the total number of parameters and channels and other settings in the DAS configuration Every additional data channel parameter number of samples setting etc will reduce the maximum amount of data points In general however the maximum data capacity is divided amongst all channels max 20 and parameters max 50 per channel The DAS will check the amount of available data space and prevent the user from specifying too many records at any given point If for example the DAS memory space can accommodate 375 more
234. ents 324 Teledyne Technical Manual Model T300 Family CO Analyzers ESD IP Internet Protocol IZS Internal Zero Span LAN Local Area Network LCD Liquid Crystal Display LED Light Emitting Diode LPM Liters Per Minute MFC Mass Flow Controller M R Measure Reference MOLAR MASS the mass expressed in grams of 1 mole of a specific substance Conversely one mole is the amount of the substance needed for the molar mass to be the same number in grams as the atomic mass of that substance EXAMPLE The atomic weight of Carbon is 12 therefore the molar mass of Carbon is 12 grams Conversely one mole of carbon equals the amount of carbon atoms that weighs 12 grams Atomic weights can be found on any Periodic Table of Elements NDIR Non Dispersive Infrared NIST SRM National Institute of Standards and Technology Standard Reference Material PC Personal Computer PCA Printed Circuit Assembly the PCB with electronic components ready to use PC AT Personal Computer Advanced Technology PCB Printed Circuit Board the bare board without electronic component PFA Perfluoroalkoxy an inert polymer one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as Teflon PLC Programmable Logic Controller a device that is used to control instruments based on a logic level signal coming from the analyzer PLD Programmable Logic Device PLL Phase Lock Loop PMT Photo Multiplier Tube a vacuum tube of electr
235. eplaced by two separate functions e RANGEI The range setting for the Al output e RANGEZ The range setting for the A2 output To select the DUAL range mode press following buttonstroke sequence SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP RANGE MODE MENU MODE SET UNIT DIL PX X RANGE MODE SNGL L DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT SETUP X X RANGE MODE DUAL SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT SETUP X X RANGE CONTROL MENU MODE SET UNIT DIL When the instrument s range mode is set to DUAL the concentration field in the upper right hand corner of the display alternates between displaying the low range value and the high range value The concentration currently being displayed is identified as follows C1 LOW or A1 and C2 HIGH or A2 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 99 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA In DUAL range mode the LOW and HIGH ranges have separate slopes and offsets for computing CO concentrations The two ranges must be independently calibrated To set the upper range limit for each independent reporting range press SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X RANGE CONTROL MENU MODE SET UNIT DIL SETUP X X LOW RANGE 50 0 Conc 0 0 0 5 0 0 ENTR EXIT C i
236. er disconnect PCAs wiring harnesses or electronic subassemblies while instrument is under power 3 1 1 VENTILATION CLEARANCE Whether the analyzer is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument rack be sure to leave sufficient ventilation clearance Table 3 1 Ventilation Clearance AREA MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE Back of the instrument 4 in Sides of the instrument 1 in Above and below the instrument 1 in Various rack mount kits are available for this analyzer See Table 1 1 of this manual for more information 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 34 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 3 2 INSTRUMENT LAYOUT Instrument layout includes front panel and display rear panel connectors and internal chassis layout 3 2 1 FRONT PANEL Figure 3 1 shows the analyzer s front panel layout followed by a close up of the display screen in Figure 3 2 which is described in Table 3 2 The two USB ports on the front panel are provided for the connection of peripheral devices e Plug in mouse not included to be used as an alternative to the thouchscreen interface e Thumb drive not included to download updates to instruction software contact TAI Customer Service for information USB Power Ports Switch Figure 3 1 Front Panel Layout j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 35 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer ATTENTION
237. er nemen 152 6 7 2 2 Activating Hessen Protocol sarrasin aeiiae aiia tenant nete aka a REPE tha dd qr nada 153 6 7 2 3 Selecting a Hessen Protocol Type ssssssssssssseeeee nenne enne nnn nnns 154 6 7 2 4 Setting The Hessen Protocol Response Mode sssssseee emm 156 6 7 3 Hessen Protocol Gas List Entries mener enne 157 0 7 3 1 Hessen Protocol Gas D ect rer dine tiae eun 157 6 7 3 2 Editing or Adding HESSEN Gas List Entries ssssssssseseeeee emen 158 6 7 3 3 Deleting HESSEN Gas ennemis 159 6 7 3 4 Setting Hessen Protocol Status Flags sssssssssssssee eene ennemis 160 0 3 5 Instrument D eme Rn ete n nu 161 7 DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM DAS AND 163 tee rr neut Ped peter Seres ets ette meet errr reece redes 164 fslsT3DAS Data Ghannels 2 otra rit eine DIE 164 151 2 Detault DAS Channel Ses x 165 7 1 3 Viewing DAS Channels and Individual Records sessssssseeeeeee enne 168 A Eding DAS CHANNA E ies or titt ro REI OR NO Ht US 169 7 1 4 1 Editing DAS Data Channel Names sssssssseseeeeeneeenen mener nennen nennen nnns 170 G25 Editing DAS Trig
238. es consist of e A critical flow orifice e Two o rings Located just before and after the critical flow orifice the o rings seal the gap between the walls of assembly housing and the critical flow orifice e spring Applies mechanical force needed to form the seal between the o rings the critical flow orifice and the assembly housing 13 3 1 1 CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICE The most important component of this flow control assembly is the critical flow orifice j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 295 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Critical flow orifices are a remarkably simple way to regulate stable gas flow rates They operate without moving parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics By restricting the flow of gas though the orifice a pressure differential is created As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice continues to drop the speed that the gas flows through the orifice continues to rise Once the ratio of upstream pressure to downstream pressure is greater than 2 1 the velocity of the gas through the orifice reaches the speed of sound As long as that ratio stays at least 2 1 the gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations surges or changes in downstream pressure because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are therefore cancelled out by the sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical flow orifice CRITICAL FLOW
239. et up the sources of zero air and sample gas and procedures should conform to those described in Section 9 2 for analyzers with no valve options or with an IZS valve option installed and Section 9 3 1 for analyzers with Z S options installed with the following exception e Connect the analyzer to a precision gas that has a CO concentration between 8 0 ppm and 10 0 ppm If a precision check is made in conjunction with a zero span check it must be made prior to any zero or span adjustments e Record this value Information from the check procedure is used to assess the precision of the monitoring data see CFR 40 CFR 58 for procedures for calculating and reporting precision j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 231 EPA Calibration Protocol Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 10 3 PRECISION CALIBRATION Calibration must be performed with a calibrator that meets all conditions specified in QA Handbook Vol II Part 1 App 15 Sec 4 4 amp 5 4 The user should be sure that all flow meters are calibrated under the conditions of use against a reliable standard All volumetric flow rates should be corrected to 25 C 77 F and 760 mm Hg 29 92in Hg Make sure the calibration system can supply the range of the concentration at a sufficient flow over the whole range of concentration that will be encountered during calibration All operational adjustments to the GFC7001T should be completed prior to the calibration The follow
240. ether an individual component or subsystem is the cause of the problem being investigated 12 5 1 AC MAINS CONFIGURATION The analyzer is correctly configured for the AC mains voltage in use if e The Wheel motor is spinning LEDs D1 amp D2 located on the sync demod PCA should be flashing e If incorrect power is suspected check that the correct voltage and frequency is present at the line input on the rear panel Note If the unit is set for 230 VAC and is plugged into 115VAC or 100VAC the sample pump if equipped will not start and the heaters will not come up to temperature If the unit is set for 115 or 100 VAC and is plugged into a 230 VAC circuit the circuit breaker built into the ON OFF Switch on the Front Panel will __trip to the OFF position immediately after power is switched on 12 5 2 DC POWER SUPPLY If you have determined that the analyzer s AC mains power is working but the unit is still not operating properly there may be a problem with one of the instrument s switching power supplies The supplies can have two faults namely no DC output and noisy output To assist tracing DC Power Supply problems the wiring used to connect the various printed circuit assemblies and DC Powered components and the associated test points on the relay board follow a standard color coding scheme as defined in the following table Table 12 6 DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes
241. ew calibration values will be recorded before the instrument returns to Sample Mode If the AutoCal attribute CALIBRATE is disabled the instrument will return to Sample Mode leaving the instrument s internal calibration variables unchanged 9 4 AUTOMATIC ZERO SPAN CAL CHECK AUTOCAL The AutoCal system allows unattended periodic operation of the ZERO SPAN valve options by using the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer s internal time of day clock AutoCal operates by executing SEQUENCES programmed by the user to initiate the various calibration modes of the analyzer and open and close valves appropriately It is possible to program and run up to three separate sequences SEQ1 SEQ2 and SEQ3 Each sequence can operate in one of three modes or be disabled Table 9 2 AUTOCAL Modes MODE NAME ACTION DISABLED Disables the Sequence ZERO Causes the Sequence to perform a Zero calibration check ZERO SPAN Causes the Sequence to perform a Zero point calibration check followed by a Span point calibration check SPAN Causes the Sequence to perform a Span concentration calibration check only j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 208 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer For each mode there are seven parameters that control operational details of the SEQUENCE see Table 9 3 Table 9 3 AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters Number of days to skip between each Sequence execution DELTA DAYS
242. file or word processor following a strict syntax see below for example The script is then uploaded via the instrument s RS 232 port s Instrument HyperTerminal DER File Edt Vew Call Transfer Heip nig ol 3 cla SETUP PROPERTIES FOR ENGDAT NAME ENGDAT EVENT RTIMER REPORT PERIOD 000 00 02 NUMBER OF RECORDS 2000 RS 232 REPORT ON CHANNEL ENABLED CAL HOLD OFF OFF PARAMETERS 14 PARAMETER RCTEMP MODE AVG PRECISTON 4 STORE_SAMPLES OFF PRRRMETER CNVTMP MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE_SAMPLES OFF PRRRMETER PMTTMP MODE fiV6 PRECISION 4 STORE SHMPLES OFF PARAMETER BOXTMP MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PRRRMETER O3FLOM MODE QVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PARAMETER SMPFLW MODE AVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PRRRMETER SMPPRS MODE AVG PRECISION 4 STORE_SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER RCPRES MODE AVG PRECISION 4 STORE_SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER AZERO MODE RVG PRECISION 4 amp STORE_SAMPLES OFF PRRRMETER HVPS MODE AYG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PRRRMFTER PMTDET MODE RUG PRECISION 4 STORF_SAMPIES OFF PARAMETER RF4096 MODE RVG PRECISION amp STORE SRMPLES OFF PARAMETER REFGND MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF Connected 00 01 32 Ato detect 1 NUM Figure 7 4 DAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program Both of the above steps are best started by 1 2 3 4 Downloading the default DAS configuration Getting familiar with its command
243. g DAS data collection it is conveniently uploaded to the instrument and can be stored on a computer for later review alteration or documentation and archival 7 2 1 DAS CONFIGURATION VIA APICOM Figure 7 2 shows examples of APICOM s main interface which emulates the look and functionality of the instrument s actual front panel Figure 7 3 shows an example of APICOM being used to remotely configure the DAS feature The APICOM user manual Teledyne P N 039450000 is included in the APICOM installation file which can be downloaded at __http www teledyne api com software apicom 9 870 PPM zfg APICOM Graphical Interface DER Figure 7 2 APICOM Remote Control Program Interface 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 181 DAC and APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Local Instrument at iDAS Configuration and Downloaded Data C CONC ATIMER 4032 Records Maximum CONCI PPB AVG Set 0 0 Records STABIL PPB AVG Set 0 0 Records C PNUMTC 360 Records Maximum Data C SMPFLW cc m AVG Set 0 0 Record CI SMPPRS InHg AVG Set 0 0 Records C CALDAT SLPCHG 200 Records Maximum CI SLOPE1 PPM mV INST Set 0 0 Rec OFSET1 mV INST Set 0 0 Records ZSCNCI PPB INST Set 0 0 R E i e i i E i iDAS Channel Properties C Samples Selection Basic Advanced Bas
244. g Outputs Configured for Voltage 125 5 9 3 7 Manual Adjustment of Current Loop Output Span and 127 5 9 3 8 Turning an Analog Output Over Range Feature ON OFF 130 5 9 3 9 Adding a Recorder Offset to an Analog Output eem 131 5 9 3 10 AIN Galibratlohi EE Ele D o die RU 132 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments x Table of ContentsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 9 3 11 Analog Inputs XIN1 XIN8 Option Configuration ssseemm mem 133 5 9 4 Electrical Test unge eeepc pede aee ce i de uc e i 133 5 9 5 Dark Calibration calce eee duce deque c pude educ e idu e coque ce e de d 134 5 9 6 Pressure Calibration eeu nid dee le e ide eue nin 134 5 9 7 Flow Calibration ae eee rude eade de dee odas Pe de ade ia 134 5 9 8 Test Chan iioi ai edad ieee eden eel Re elie Me dde I Re do a 134 5 9 8 1 Selecting a Test Channel Function for Output A4 sssssssssseeee eme 135 5 10 SETUP gt MORE gt Option Using the Gas Concentration 136 5 10 1 Setting the GFC7001T Concentration Alarm Limits sse ee 137 6 COMMUNICATIONS SETUP AND OPERATION
245. g the reference portion of the GFC 5000 mV Wheel cycle The absolute pressure of the Sample gas as SAMPLE PRESSURE measured by a pressure sensor located inside 0 Hg 40 Hg the sample chamber SAMPLE FLOW Sample mass flow rate as measured by the 0 cm m 1000 cm m flow rate sensor in the sample gas stream SAMPLE TEMP The temperature of the gas inside the sample 70 C chamber BENCH TEMP Optical bench temperature O CELL TEMP The current temperature of the O2 sensor ame measurement cell CHASSIS TEMP The temperature inside the analyzer chassis The drive voltage being supplied to the PHT DRIVE thermoelectric coolers of the IR photo 5000 mV detector by the Sync Demod Board e Maximum test signal value at full scale of test channel output e When option installed Once a function is selected the instrument not only begins to output a signal on the analog output but also adds TEST to the list of test functions viewable via the front panel display j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 135 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer To activate the TEST Channel and select the CO MEASURE function press SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to enter the correct PASSWORD SIGNAL I O DA PREV NEXT
246. ge as it is connected to ground a discharge will occur Whenever a sensitive device is moved into the field of an existing electro static field a charge may be induced on the device in effect discharging the field onto the device If the device is then momentarily grounded while within the electrostatic field or removed from the region of the electrostatic field and grounded somewhere else a second discharge will occur as the charge is transferred from the device to ground 14 3 COMMON MYTHS ABOUT ESD DAMAGE I didn t feel a shock so there was no electro static discharge The human nervous system isn t able to feel a static discharge of less than 3500 volts Most devices are damaged by discharge levels much lower than that I didn t touch it so there was no electro static discharge Electro Static charges are fields whose lines of force can extend several inches or sometimes even feet away from the surface bearing the charge It still works so there was no damage Sometimes the damaged caused by electro static discharge can completely sever a circuit trace causing the device to fail immediately More likely the trace will be only partially occluded by the damage causing degraded performance of the device or worse weakening the trace This weakened circuit may seem to function fine for a short time but even the very low voltage and current levels of the device s normal operating levels will eat away at the defect over time causing
247. gering EVets 2 ine te cer rr RC n DER ERO RR ORE Data fi ta pO nr it aas 171 15156 Edita DAS Parameters ion ctt c RP ORE POR PERIOD POR HR Sade pea eae 172 7 1 7 Sample Period and Report 175 7 4 8 Number of Records eee Hie cea oed a c de suce pue oce nuce iu ce uc 177 7 1 9 RS 232 Report Function eene eren nennen tnit nnn nennen 178 7 1 9 1 The Compact Report 178 7 1 9 2 The Starting Date Feature 24 cni eddie died ded da e d il dtd edi tti epe 179 7 1 10 Disabling Enabling Data 179 1 T1 HOLDOFEF e rite eue es ae apu deed ee 180 7 2 Remote DAS Configurations tto meint redemit 181 7 2 1 DAS Configuration via nennen iners 181 7 2 2 DAS Configuration Using Terminal Emulation 183 8 REMOTE OPERATIGQN RR aA RRRAXRANURRARRRAIARAMRRRRARE REA ERRMERRRARAR RR RPM RAUS 185 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments xi Table of ContentsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 8 1 Computer Mode eelnes aa ee ettet ettet e tete eee eee 185 8 1 1 Remote Control via APICOM z
248. ggle these buttons to cycle through the list of available parameters LU SETUP X X SAMPLE MODE AVG1 SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP XX PARAMETER AVG1 Pressing SET INST AVG SDEV MIN MAX ENTR EXIT returns to the es Press the button for previous Function the desired MODE SETUP PRECISION 1 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP XX PRECISION 4 ENTR EXIT Toggle this button to set from 1 to 4 SETUP X X STOR NUM SAMPLE OFF lt SET EDIT EXIT sETUPXX STOR NUM SAMPLE OFF OFF ENTR EXIT Toggle this button to turn ON OFF Note When the STORE NUM SAMPLES feature is turned on the instrument will store how many measurements were used to compute the AVG SDEV MIN or MAX value but not the actual measurements themselves j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 174 DAC and APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 7 1 7 SAMPLE PERIOD AND REPORT PERIOD The DAS defines two principal time periods by which sample readings are taken and permanently recorded Sample and Report periods e SAMPLE PERIOD Determines how often DAS temporarily records a sample reading of the parameter in volatile memory SAMPLE PERIOD is only used when the DAS parameter s sample mode is set for AVG SDEV MIN or MAX The SAMPLE PERIOD is set to one minute by default and generally cannot be accessed from the standard DAS front panel menu but is available via the instrument s communication ports by using A
249. gure 3 12 Control Input Connector Table 3 7 Control Input Signals INPUT STATUS DEFINITION ON CONDITION The analyzer is placed in Zero Calibration mode The mode field of the BEMOTEZERS GAL display will read ZERO CAL R The analyzer is placed in span calibration mode as part of performing a low REMOTE SPAN CAL span midpoint calibration The mode field of the display will read LO CAL R The analyzer is forced into high range for zero or span calibrations This C REMOTE CAL HIGH RANGE only applies when the range mode is either DUAL or AUTO The mode field of the display will read HI CAL R D E Digital Ground The ground level from the analyzer s internal DC power supplies same as chassis ground External Power input Input pin for 5 VDC required to activate pins A F Internally generated 5V DC power To activate inputs A F place a jumper 5 VDC output between this pin and the U pin The maximum amperage through this port is 300 mA combined with the analog output supply if used 3 3 1 7 CONCENTRATION ALARM RELAY OPTION 61 STANDARD CONFIGURATION The concentration alarm option is comprised of four 4 dry contact relays on the rear panel of the instrument This relay option is different from and in addition to the Contact Closures that come standard on all TAI instruments Each relay has 3 pins Normally Open NO Common C and Normally Closed NC j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 50
250. h Gas Outlet Optional Shut Off Valve Flow Sensor Assy Optional Zero Span Valve Optional Sample Cal Valve Optical Bench Gas Inlet Syne Demod PCA Filter JS E Figure 3 6 Internal Layout GFC7001TM Fan Assy Power Entry Optional 4 20mA Current Output Transmitter PCA Relay Board PCA Power Supply 5V 415V Power Supply 12V Sample Gas Temperature Sensor 115 240V Pump Assy if equipped Optional 240v 50Hz Pump Assy 800cc Flow Control Assy IR Source GFC Motor Hub Assy Interface PCA LCD Module e On Off Switch Touchscreen Control Module ji Teledyne Analytical Instruments 42 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Sample Gas Outlet Sample Gas Flow fitting _ Sensor M lt Sample Chamber P S T Sync Demod PCA Housing Pressure Sensor s Bench Temperature Thermistor Shock Absorbing Mounting Bracket Opto Pickup PCA Purge Gas Pressure Regulator IR Source GFC Wheel Heat Sync Wheel Motor GFC Temperature Sensor Purge Gas Inlet E GFC Heater Figure 3 7 Optical Bench Layout shorter bench GFC7001TM shown 3 3 CONNECTIONS AND SETUP This section presents the electrical Section 3 3 1 and pneumatic Section 3 3 2 connections for setup and preparing for instrument opera
251. h one of the tanks 2 Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 11 3 2 3 Make sure that the expected span gas concentration entered into the instrument during calibration is the correct span gas concentration and not too different from expected span value This can be viewed via the CONC submenu of the Sample Displays 4 Check to make sure that there is no ambient air or zero air leaking into span gas line 12 3 4 INABILITY TO ZERO NO ZERO BUTTON CALZ 1 Confirm that there is a good source of zero air Dilute a tank of span gas with the same amount of zero air from two different sources If the CO concentration of the two measurements is different there is a problem with one of the sources of zero air 2 Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in 11 3 2 3 Ifthe analyzer has had zero span valve options the CO scrubber may need maintenance 4 Check to make sure that there is no ambient air leaking into zero air line j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 267 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 4 OTHER PERFORMANCE PROBLEMS Dynamic problems i e problems which only manifest themselves when the analyzer is monitoring sample gas can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and resolve The following provides an itemized list of the most common dynamic problems with recommended troubleshooting checks and corrective actions 12
252. han zero but is too low and or unstable 3 Flow is zero no flow When troubleshooting flow problems it is crucial to confirm the actual flow rate without relying on the analyzer s flow display The use of an independent external flow meter to perform a flow check as described in Section 11 3 3 is essential The flow diagrams found in a variety of locations within this manual depicting the GFC7001T GFC7001TM in its standard configuration and with options installed can help in trouble shooting flow problems For your convenience they are collected here j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 261 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 2 1 GFC7001T GFC7001TM INTERNAL GAS FLOW DIAGRAMS INSTRUMENT CHASSIS GFC Wheel Housing SAMPLE CHAMBER SAMPLE PRESSURE E SENSOR I I t Sample Gas I I Flow Control Figure 12 6 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Basic Internal Gas Flow Sample INSTRUMENT CHASSIS GAS INLET i J I l PRESSURE SPAN INLET Sample Cal Zero Span Valve SAMPLE CHAMBER Sample Pressure Sensor Sample Gas Flow Control Figure 12 7 Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50A Zero Span Valves OPT 50A amp 50B 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 262 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer INSTRUMENT CHASSIS Sample Shutoff Sample Cal Partic
253. have more than one GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer on your network press SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU SETUP X X DHCP ON COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT Continue pressing until SETUP X X HOSTNAME SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X HOSTNAME BUTTON FUNCTION CH CH INS DEL ENTR EXIT CH Moves the cursor one character to the left CH Moves the cursor one character to the right INS Inserts a character before the cursor location DEL Deletes a character at the cursor location Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and characters available for Use these buttons to edit the HOSTNAME insertion 0 9 A Z space 96 amp EHI lt A 2 ENTR Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu SETUP X X HOSTNAME T300 STATION 2 example name EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu CH CH INS DEL ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts Some keys only appear as needed the new setting EXIT ignores the new setting gt SETUP INITIALIZING INET 0 INITIALIZATION process proceeds automatically SETUP X X INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED SETUP X X INITIALIZATION FAILED SETUP X
254. he factory Choosing this option disallows use of the USB port 6 5 ETHERNET When using the Ethernet interface the analyzer can be connected to any standard 10BaseT or 100BaseT Ethernet network via low cost network hubs switches or routers The interface operates as a standard TCP IP device on port 3000 This allows a remote computer to connect through the network to the analyzer using APICOM terminal emulators or other programs The Ethernet cable connector on the rear panel has two LEDs indicating the Ethernet s current operating status Table 6 2 Ethernet Status Indicators LED FUNCTION amber link On when connection to the LAN is valid green activity Flickers during any activity on the LAN j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 143 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer The analyzer is shipped with DHCP enabled by default This allows the instrument to be connected to a network or router with a DHCP server The instrument will automatically be assigned an IP address by the DHCP server Section 6 5 2 This configuration is useful for quickly getting an instrument up and running on a network However for permanent Ethernet connections a static IP address should be used Section 6 5 1 below details how to configure the instrument with a static IP address 6 5 1 CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATION MANUALLY STATIC IP ADDRESS To configure Ethernet communication manually 1 Co
255. he rear of the analyzer Wait until STABIL falls below 0 2 PPM for T300 or 1 0 PPM for T300M SAMPLE STABIL XXXX PPM CO XXXX This may take several minutes lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SL ae eS ae ee Only appears if either the C2 or CO2 Sensors are installed SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL LOW HIGH EXIT et us ae ec ENIR Press ENTR to changes the OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the CO measurement lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC EXIT Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous M P CAL STABIL XXXX PPM CO XXXX M P CAL STABIL XXXX CO X XXX lt TST TST gt ENTR CONC EXIT Only appears if the DUAL Wait until STABIL falls or AUTO range modes are selected Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer Use these buttons to below 0 2 PPM for choose the appropriate T300 or 1 0 PPM for range T300M Repeat entire procedure SAMPLE STABIL XXXX PPM CO XXXX This may take several for each range WA minutes lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP GAS TO CAL CO Only appears if either the Os or the sensor is installed ISAMPLE RANGE TO CAL LOW LOW HIGH ENTREX STABIL XXXX PPM CO X XXX Press ENTR to change the OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the CO The SPAN button now measurement appears during the transition STABIL XXXX PPM CO X XXX Press EXIT to leave the T ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT from zero to span ca
256. her gases such as water vapor that also absorb IR The analyzer passes the IR beam through a spinning wheel made up of two separate chambers one containing a high concentration of CO known as the reference and the other containing a neutral gas known as the measure The concentration of CO in the sample chamber is computed by taking the ratio of the instantaneous measure and reference values and then compensating the ratio for sample temperature and pressure The GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer s multi tasking software gives the ability to track and report a large number of operational parameters in real time These readings are compared to diagnostic limits kept in the analyzers memory and should any fall outside of those limits the analyzer issues automatic warnings Built in data acquisition capability using the analyzer s internal memory allows the logging of multiple parameters including averaged or instantaneous concentration values calibration data and operating parameters such as pressure and flow rate Stored data are easily retrieved through the serial port or Ethernet port via our APICOM software or from the front panel allowing operators to perform predictive diagnostics and enhanced data analysis by tracking parameter trends Multiple averaging periods of one minute to 365 days are available for over a period of one year j Teledyne Analytical Instruments IntroductionTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 1 2
257. his continuous readjustment of calibration parameters can often mask subtle fault conditions in the analyzer It is recommended that if CALIBRATE is enabled the analyzer s test functions slope and offset values be checked frequently to assure high quality and accurate data from the instrument j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 210 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 4 1 SETUP gt ACAL PROGRAMMING AND AUTO CAL SEQUENCE Note If at any time an illegal entry is selected for example Delta Days 366 the ENTR label will disappear from the control button To program the example sequence shown in Table 9 4 press SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL CALZ CZLS SETUP SETUP X X CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SEQ 1 DISABLED NEXT MODE EXIT SETUP X X SEQ 2 DISABLED PREV NEXT MODE EXIT SETUP X X MODE DISABLED NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP X X MODE ZERO PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT E SETUP X X MODE ZERO SPAN PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP SEQ 2 ZERO SPAN 1 00 00 PREV NEXT MODE SET EXIT Hi SETUP X X TIMER ENABLE ON SET EDIT EXIT 1 SETUP STARTING DATE 01 JAN 07 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT j SETUP X X STARTING DATE 01 JAN 02 0 4 SEP 0 8 ENTR EXIT CONTINUE NEXT PAGE With STARTING TIME Toggle buttons to set
258. hould the AC power circuit breaker trip investigate and correct the condition causing this situation before turning the analyzer back on 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 310 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer KEY Sensor Control LOGIC DEVICES ANALOG SENSORS amp VO Loge e g CPU and iS Sene m e g Temp peripheral devices C Sensors Fow Pre Ampiifiers bus MotherBoard etc BPOPOWER quu 505 amp Amplifiers risk sd ia ll dmn PMT HVPS etc i 4 Optiond O2 L Sensor ops 5 VDC 1 If Equipped 15 VDC GFC Wheel AC HEATERS 12 VDC Solenoid Drivers AC POWER IN p E ERS MODEL SPECIFIC optiona COOLING Lop VALVES VALVES FANS co2 PROBE eg M RValves saplelCa zaro SS SSS Auto zero valves Spans etc l tU RELAY PCA Figure 13 16 Power Distribution Block Diagram j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 311 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 13 4 8 FRONT PANEL TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY INTERFACE Users can input data and receive information directly through the front panel touchscreen display The LCD display is controlled directly by the CPU board The touchscreen is interfaced to the CPU by means of a touchscreen controller that connects to the CPU via the internal USB bus and
259. ic A D is functioning properly If not then the motherboard is bad 2 Choose a parameter in the Signal I O function such as SAMPLE PRESSURE SAMPLE FLOW CO MEASURE or CO REFERENCE e Compare these voltages at their origin see interconnect drawing P N 04215 and interconnect list P N 04216 with the voltage displayed through the signal I O function e If the wiring is intact but there is a large difference between the measured and displayed voltage 10 mV then the motherboard is bad See also Sections 5 9 1 and 12 1 3 12 5 8 2 TEST CHANNEL ANALOG OUTPUTS VOLTAGE The ANALOG OUTPUT submenu located under the SETUP gt MORE gt DIAG menu is used to verify that the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer s analog outputs are working properly The test generates a signal on functioning outputs simultaneously as shown in the following table See also Section 5 9 2 j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 276 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Table 12 10 Analog Output Test Function Nominal Values Voltage Outputs FULL SCALE OUTPUT OF VOLTAGE RANGE see Section 5 9 3 1 100MV 1V 5V 10V STEP NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 20 20 mV 0 2 1 2 3 40 40 mV 0 4 2 4 4 60 60 mV 0 6 3 6 5 80 80 mV 0 8 4 8 6 100 100 mV 1 0 5 10 For each of the steps the output should be within 1 of the nominal value listed in the table below except for
260. ic Settings Channel Name 100 Number of Records Trigger Event ATIMER Delete Enable Channel C Print Reports Hold Off Compact Reports Automatic Timer Settings Start Date 12 1 2010 Y iDAS Parameter Properties Start Time 12 00 00 AM Sample Period Parameter s DDD HH MM Sample Mode INST Y Precision 0 C Store number of samples in average Report Period DDD HH MM Figure 7 3 APICOM User Interface for Configuring the DAS Once a DAS configuration is edited which can be done offline and without interrupting DAS data collection it is conveniently uploaded to the instrument and can be stored on a computer for later review alteration or documentation and archival Refer to the APICOM manual for details on these procedures The APICOM user manual Teledyne P N 039450000 is included in the APICOM installation file which can be downloaded at http www teledyne api com manuals 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 182 DAC and APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 7 2 2 DAS CONFIGURATION USING TERMINAL EMULATION PROGRAMS Although TAI recommends the use of APICOM the DAS can also be accessed and configured through a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal see example in Figure 7 4 IMPORTANT T o do this All configuration commands must be created and edited off line e g cut amp pasted in from a text
261. idual ranges press the following control button sequence j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 101 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS PA CLK MORE Avoid accidentally setting the LOW RNGE PASS range 1 of the instrument with a higher span limit than the HIGH range RANGE2 SETUP X X RANGE MODE MENU This will cause the unit to stay in MODE SET UNIT DIL the low reporting range perpetually and defeat the function of the AUTO range mode SETUP X X RANGE MODE SNGL SNGL DUAL AUTO DIL SETUP X X RANGE MODE AUTO The LOW and HIGH SNGL DUAL AUTO ranges have separate slopes and offsets for computing the CO concentration MODE SET UNIT DIL SETUP X X RANGE CONTROL MENU The two ranges must be independently SETUP LOW RANGE 50 0 Conc calibrated 0 0 0 5 0 0 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X HIGH RANGE 200 0 Conc EXIT discards the new 0 0 2 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons setting to select the upper SPAN limit for the reporting range j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 102 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 4 4 RANGE UNITS The GFC7001T GFC7001TM can display concentrations in parts per million 10 mols per mol PPM or milligrams per cubic meter mg m MG Changing units affects all of the display COMM port and DAS values for all reporting r
262. iguration Protocol protocol used by LAN or Internet servers to automatically set up the interface protocols between themselves and any other addressable device connected to the network DIAG Diagnostics the diagnostic settings of the analyzer DOM Disk On Module a 44 pin IDE flash drive with up to 128MB storage capacity for instrument s firmware configuration settings and data DOS Disk Operating System DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory DR DOS Digital Research DOS DTE Data Terminal Equipment EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory also referred to as a FLASH chip or drive ESD Electro Static Discharge ETEST Electrical Test Ethernet a standardized IEEE 802 3 computer networking technology for local area networks LANs facilitating communication and sharing resources FEP Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene polymer one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as Teflon Flash non volatile solid state memory FPI Fabry Perot Interface a special light filter typically made of a transparent plate with two reflecting surfaces or two parallel highly reflective mirrors GFC Gas Filter Correlation lC bus a clocked bi directional serial bus for communication between individual analyzer components IC Integrated Circuit a modern semi conductor circuit that can contain many basic components such as resistors transistors capacitors etc in a miniaturized package used in electronic assemblies j Teledyne Analytical Instrum
263. igure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 Figure 9 5 Front Panel Layout eani orte n ta timi ed 35 Display Screen and Touch Control ssssssesssseesee eene enne 36 Display Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts 38 Rear Parnel Layout anie RIED 39 Internal Layout GFG7001T iiir tre ene e PR RR Ra e ea eR RR 41 Internal Layout GFC7001TM nemen nnne nnne nnn nns 42 Optical Bench Layout shorter bench GFC7001TM 43 Analog In Gonnector iD QR e ra RR e aU 45 Analog Output Connector e dace sea e Pe RE t Re ne PR RR Rene ania eA RUE 46 Current Loop Option Installed on Motherboard sssssssesssseee eme 47 Status Output COMME GOK ea e P REIR EX RE eaa heinen 48 Control I
264. in connector just below the sample temperature sensor on the bench pin 1 is the pointed end e It should be approximately 275 ohms 2 Assuming that the bus is working and that there is no other failure with the relay board the solid state relay K1 on the relay board may have failed e Using the WHEEL_HEATER parameter under the signal I O function as described above turn on and off K1 D2 on the relay board should illuminate as the heater is turned on e Check the AC voltage present between pin and 4 WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Hazardous Voltages are present during this test 3 Ifthe relay has failed there should be no change in the voltage across pins and 4 e K1 is socketed for easy replacement 4 If KI checks out OK the thermistor temperature sensor located at the front of the filter wheel assembly may have failed 5 Unplug the connector labeled Wheel and measure the resistance of the thermistor The resistance near the 68 C set point is 5 7k ohms 12 4 1 4 IR PHOTO DETECTOR TEC TEMPERATURE If the PHT DRIVE test parameter described in Table 11 3 is out of range there are four possible causes of failure 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 269 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 1 The screws retaining the IR photo detector to the absorption bench have become loose e Carefully tighten the screws hand tight and note whether
265. ined at constant temperatures above their normal operating ranges BENCH TEMPERATURE To minimize the effects of ambient temperature variations on the sample measurement the sample chamber is heated to 48 C 8 degrees above the maximum suggested ambient operating temperature for the analyzer A strip heater attached to the underside of the chamber housing is the heat source The temperature of the sample chamber is sensed by a thermistor also attached to the sample chamber housing WHEEL TEMPERATURE To minimize the effects of temperature variations caused by the near proximity of the IR Source to the GFC Wheel on the gases contained in the wheel it is also raised to a high temperature level Because the IR Source itself is very hot the set point for this heat circuit is 68 C A cartridge heater implanted into the heat sync on the motor is the heat source The temperature of the wheel motor assembly is sensed by a thermistor also inserted into the heat sync Both heaters operate off of the AC line voltage supplied to the instrument 13 4 2 2 IR SOURCE The light used to detect CO in the sample chamber is generated by an element heated to approximately 1100 C producing infrared radiation across a broad band This radiation is optically filtered after it has passed through the GFC Wheel and the sample chamber and just before it reaches the photo detector to eliminate all black body radiation and other extraneous IR emitted by the various
266. ing software features must be set into the desired state before calibration e Ifthe instrument will be used for more than one range it should be calibrated separately on each applicable range e Automatic temperature pressure compensation should be enabled See Section 5 7 e Alternate units make sure ppm units are selected for EPA monitoring See Section 5 44 The analyzer should be calibrated on the same range used for monitoring 10 3 1 PRECISION CALIBRATION PROCEDURES To perform a precision calibration during the instrument set up the input sources of zero air and sample gas and procedures should conform to those described in Section 9 2 for analyzers with no valve options or with an IZS valve option installed and Section 9 3 for analyzers with Z S options installed 10 4 AUDITING PROCEDURE An audit is an independent assessment of the accuracy of data Independence is achieved by having the audit made by an operator other than the one conducting the routine field measurements and by using audit standards and equipment different from those routinely used in monitoring The audit should be a true assessment of the measurement process under normal operations without any special preparation or adjustment of the system Routine quality control checks conducted by the operator are necessary for obtaining and reporting good quality data but they are not considered part of the auditing procedure Audits are recommended once per quarter
267. instruments and for logging these signals in the analyzer s internal DAS The input voltage range for each analog input is 0 10 VDC 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 44 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Figure 3 8 Analog In Connector Pin assignments for the Analog In connector are presented in Table 3 4 Table 3 4 Analog Input Pin Assignments PIN DESCRIPTION ARAMETER 1 Analog input 1 AIN 1 2 Analog input 2 AIN 2 3 Analog input 3 AIN 3 4 Analog input 4 AIN 4 5 Analog input 5 AIN 5 6 Analog input 6 AIN 6 7 Analog input 7 AIN 7 8 Analog input 8 AIN 8 GND Analog input Ground N A See Section 7 for details on setting up the DAS 3 3 1 3 CONNECTING ANALOG OUTPUTS The GFC7001T is equipped with several analog output channels accessible through a connector on the back panel of the instrument The standard configuration for these outputs is mVDC An optional current loop output is available for each When the instrument is in its default configuration channels A1 and A2 output a signal that is proportional to the CO concentration of the sample gas Either can be used for connecting the analog output signal to a chart recorder or for interfacing with a datalogger Output is only used on the GFC7001T GFC7001TM if the optional CO or sensor is installed Channel A4 is special It can be set by the user see Section 5 9
268. ions for the communications ports and provides instructions for their use including communications protocol Data acquisition is presented in Section 7 6 1 DATA TERMINAL COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT DTE DCE RS 232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment DTE and data communication equipment DCE Basic terminals always fall into the DTE category whereas modems are always considered DCE devices The difference between the two is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data Transmit functions e DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3 e DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2 To allow the analyzer to be used with terminals DTE modems DCE and computers which can be either a switch mounted below the serial ports on the rear panel allows the user to set the RS 232 configuration for one of these two data devices This switch exchanges the Receive and Transmit lines on RS 232 emulating a cross over or null modem cable The switch has no effect on COM2 6 2 COMMUNICATION MODES BAUD RATE AND PORT TESTING Use the SETUP gt MORE gt COMM menu to configure COMI labeled RS232 on instrument rear panel and or COM2 labeled COM2 on instrument rear panel for communication modes baud rate and or port testing for correct connection If using a USB option communication connection setup requires configuring the COM2 baud rate Section 6 2 2 6 2 1 COMMUNICATION MO
269. is 230 10 2 1 Zero Span Check Procedures nnne nennen 231 10 2 2 Precision Check on ee ere ma Rede e ee wera LAU erue deat ac eras 231 10 3 Presion Calibration n 2 5 rec Perdu een et NS 232 10 3 1 Precision Calibration Procedures 232 10 4 Auditing Procedure iret ete ete dedo ose pu dos ug eee ANTE TH E Te du e dec duo 232 10 4 1 Calibration Audit eon e pee eens de ee a aped de Ue e ee 232 10 4 2 Data Fedu ction AUGE eee stat eet arta teat t Dex tete orte b Ibat E ete 233 10 4 3 System Audit nennen nennen nennen enne eia 233 10 5 Dynamic Multipoint Calibration Procedure 233 10 9 Linean test iver enter eR eri eta Um eb e d t ee bL eatin 233 10 6 References cio t ere due tiet nisu eee E 235 PART Ill TECHNICAL INFORMATION 237 11 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE amp nnmnnn 241 LEl Maintenance Schedule 5t ate ma ete e e dde ta a tied eras 241 11 2 Predicting Failures Using the Test Functions ssssssssssssseseeeeee eene nnne 245 11 3 Maintenatice Procedures score Sa Ded ede ted dk et de re ed a d iad hate a
270. l Instruments 80 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 3 4 4 3 O2 SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE If your GFC7001T GFC7001TM is equipped with the optional sensor this sensor should be calibrated during installation of the instrument See Section 9 7 1 for instructions Refer to any addenda that may accompany this instrument for custom configuration such as an optional sensor 3 4 4 4 SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE If your GFC7001T GFC7001 TM is equipped with the optional CO sensor this sensor should be calibrated during installation of the instrument See Section 9 7 2 for instructions Refer to any addenda that may accompany this instrument for custom configuration such as an optional CO sensor Note Once you have completed the above set up procedures please fill out the Quality Questionnaire that was shipped with your unit and return it to TAI This information is vital to our efforts in continuously improving our service and our products THANK YOU j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 81 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer This page intentionally left blank j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 82 Part IITeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer PART Il OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments Part Il Opeerating InstructionsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer This page intentionally left bl
271. l T300 T300M CO Analyzer This page intentionally left blank j Teledyne Analytical Instruments XX Part General InformationTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer PART GENERAL INFORMATION 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments Part General Information Teledyne Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer This page intentionally left blank j Teledyne Analytical Instruments xxii IntroductionTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 1 INTRODUCTION FEATURES AND OPTIONS This section provides an overview of the Model GFC7001T or GFC7001TM Analyzer its features and its options followed by a description of how this user manual is arranged 1 1 GFC7001T FAMILY OVERVIEW The family includes the GFC7001T and the GFC7001TM Gas Filter Correlation Carbon Monoxide Analyzer The GFC7001T family of analyzers is a microprocessor controlled analyzer that determines the concentration of carbon monoxide CO in a sample gas drawn through the instrument It uses a method based on the Beer Lambert law an empirical relationship that relates the absorption of light to the properties of the material through which the light is traveling over a defined distance In this case the light is infrared radiation IR traveling through a sample chamber filled with gas bearing a varying concentration of CO The GFC7001T GFC7001TM uses Gas Filter Correlation GFC to overcome the interfering effects of various ot
272. l T300 T300M CO Analyzer The A D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in the GFC7001T GFC7001TM is used in uni polar mode with a 5 V full scale The converter includes a 1 over and under range This allows signals from 0 05 V to 5 05 V to be fully converted For calibration purposes two reference voltages are supplied to the A D converter Reference Ground and 4 096 VDC During calibration the device measures these two voltages outputs their digital equivalent to the CPU The CPU uses these values to compute the converter s offset and slope and uses these factors for subsequent conversions See Section 5 9 3 2 for instructions on performing this calibration 13 4 5 2 SENSOR INPUTS The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A D through the master multiplexer from two connectors on the motherboard 100K terminating resistors on each of the inputs prevent cross talk from appearing on the sensor signals Co MEASURE AND REFERENCE These are the primary signals that are used in the computation of the CO concentration They are the demodulated IR sensor signals from the sync demodulator board SAMPLE PRESSURE AND FLOW These are analog signals from two sensors that measure the pressure and flow rate of the gas stream at the outlet of the sample chamber This information is used in two ways First the sample pressure is used by the CPU to calculate CO concentration Second the pressure and flow
273. l signal I O menu is exited The Analyzer regains control of these signals upon exit See Appendix A 4 for a complete list of the parameters available for review under this menu 12 1 4 STATUS LEDS Several color coded light emitting diodes LEDs are located inside the instrument to assist in determining if the analyzer s CPU bus and relay board Wheel and the sync demodulator board are functioning properly 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 256 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 1 4 1 MOTHERBOARD STATUS INDICATOR WATCHDOG 055 a red LED that is located on upper portion of the motherboard just to the right of the CPU board flashes when the CPU is running the main program loop After power up approximately 30 to 60 seconds 055 should flash on and off If characters are written to the front panel display but 055 does not flash then the program files have become corrupted If after 30 60 seconds neither the 055 is flashing or no characters have been written to the front panel display then the CPU is bad and must be replaced CPU Status LED Figure 12 3 CPU Status Indicator 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 257 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 1 4 2 SYNC DEMODULATOR STATUS LEDS Two LEDs located on the Sync Demod Board and are there to make it obvious that the GFC Wheel is spinning and the synchronizatio
274. le pressure is lt 10 in hg Blocked particulate filter Blocked sample inlet gas line Failed pressure sensor circuitry If sample pressure is gt 35 in hg Pressurized sample gas Install vent Blocked vent line on pressurized sample zero span gas supply Bad pressure sensor circuitry Table 13 1 Warning Messages Indicated Failures cont WARNING MESSAGE FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES SAMPLE TEMP WARN Sample temperature is 10 C or 100 C Ambient temperature outside of specified range Failed bench heater Failed bench temperature sensor Relay controlling the bench heater Failed relay board bus SOURCE WARNING Occurs when CO Ref is 1250 mVDC or gt 4950 mVDC Either of these conditions will result in an invalid M R ratio GFC Wheel stopped Failed sync demod board If status LEDs on the sync demod board ARE flashing the cause is most likely a failed IR source Relay board bus IR photo detector SYSTEM RESET The computer has rebooted This message occurs at power on If you have not cycled the power on your instrument Failed 5 VDC power Fatal error caused software to restart Loose connector wiring WHEEL TEMP WARNING The filter wheel temperature is controlled at 68 2 C Blocked cooling vents below GFC Assembly Make sure that adequate clear space beneath the analyzer Analyzer s top cover removed Wheel heater Wheel temperatur
275. lectricity occurs why it is so dangerous to electronic components and assemblies as well as how to prevent that damage from occurring 14 1 HOW STATIC CHARGES ARE CREATED Modern electronic devices such as the types used in the various electronic assemblies of your analyzer are very small require very little power and operate very quickly Unfortunately the same characteristics that allow them to do these things also make them very susceptible to damage from the discharge of static electricity Controlling electrostatic discharge begins with understanding how electro static charges occur in the first place Static electricity is the result of something called triboelectric charging which happens whenever the atoms of the surface layers of two materials rub against each other As the atoms of the two surfaces move together and separate some electrons from one surface are retained by the other Materials Makes Contact Materials Separate PROTONS 3 PROTONS 3 PROTONS 3 PROTONS 3 ELECTRONS 3 ELECTRONS 3 ELECTRONS 2 ELECTRONS 4 Tener eroe spear wed HEU ERU E MET V NET CHARGE 0 NET CHARGE 0 Net CHARGE 1 NET CHARGE 1 Figure 14 1 Triboelectric Charging If one of the surfaces is a poor conductor or even a good conductor that is not grounded the resulting positive or negative charge cannot bleed off and becomes trapped in place or static The most common example of triboele
276. ler Control Circuit E Test A Gate E Test B Gate Dark Test Gate em pact Measure Gate ere ere a eee ee Programmable Measure Dark Gate _ _ _ _ _ _ _ i Logic Device Reference Gate _ _ ____ _ _ Reference Dark Gate DAMM M PETS M R Sensor Phase Lock Warning From GFC Segment Wheel Seo Segment Clock E Test Control X1 Reference From CPU W AA Dark Switch via Moer X10 Clock M R Segment Phase Lock Status LED Status LED Figure 13 13 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Sync Demod Block Diagram 13 4 3 1 SIGNAL SYNCHRONIZATION AND DEMODULATION The signal emitted by the IR photo detector goes through several stages of amplification before it can be accurately demodulated The first is a pre amplification stage that raises the signal to levels readable by the rest of the sync demod board circuitry The second is a variable amplification stage that is adjusted at the factory to compensate for performance variations of mirrors detectors and other components of the optical bench from instrument to instrument The workhorses of the sync demod board are the four sample and hold circuits that capture various voltage levels found in the amplified detector signal needed to determine the value of CO MEAS and CO REF They are activated by logic signals under the control of a compact Programmable Logic Device PLD which in turn responds to the output of the Segment Sensor and M R Sensor as shown in Figure 13 9
277. libration unchanged and return to the previous You may see both buttons gt ENTR CONC menu If either the ZERO or SPAN buttons fail to appear see STABIL XXXX PPM Section 11 for EXIT at this point troubleshooting tips gt ENTR CONC returns to the SAMPLE menu __ j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 200 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 3 MANUAL CALIBRATION WITH ZERO SPAN VALVES There are a variety of valve options available on the GFC7001T GFC7001TM for handling calibration gases see Table 1 1 for descriptions of each Generally performing calibration checks and zero span point calibrations on analyzers with these options installed is similar to the methods discussed in the previous sections of this section The primary differences are e On instruments with Z S valve options zero air and span gas is supplied to the analyzer through other gas inlets besides the sample gas inlet e The zero and span calibration operations are initiated directly and independently with dedicated buttons CALZ amp CALS 9 3 1 SETUP FOR CALIBRATION USING VALVE OPTIONS Each of the various calibration valve options requires a different pneumatic setup that is dependent on the exact nature and number of valves present Sample and cal gas input pressure to be a fraction Source of of a PSI above atm SAMPLE GAS Removed during calibration N
278. lyzer are presented in Table 1 1 with name option number a description and or comments and if applicable cross references to technical details in this manual such as setup and calibration To order these options or to learn more about them please contact the Sales department of Teledyne Analytical Instruments at 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 24 IntroductionTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer TELEDYNE ELECTRONIC TECHNOLOGIES Analytical Instruments 16830 Chestnut Street City of Industry CA 91748 Telephone 626 934 1500 Fax 626 961 2538 Web www teledyne ai com or your local representative Table 1 1 Analyzer Options Option n ia Description Notes Reference Pumps Pumps meet all typical AC power supply standards while exhibiting same pneumatic performance 10A External Pump 100V 120V 60 Hz N A 10B External Pump 220V 240V 50 Hz N A 10C External Pump 220V 240V 60 Hz N A 10D External Pump 100V 12V 50 Hz N A 10E External Pump 100V 60 Hz N A 11 Pumpless internal or external Pump Pack N A 13 High Voltage Internal Pump 240V 50Hz N A ae Mouni Options for mounting the analyzer in standard 19 racks 20A Rack mount brackets with 26 in chassis slides N A 20B Rack mount brackets with 24 in chassis slides N A 21 Rack mount brackets only compatible with carrying strap Option 29 N A 23 Rack mount for external pump pack no slides N A Carryi
279. manually calibrated Note The menu for manually adjusting the analog output signal level will only appear if the AUTO CAL feature is turned off for the channel being adjusted see Section 5 9 3 3 Calibration is performed with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals and by changing the actual output signal level using the front panel buttons in 100 10 or 1 count increments See Figure 3 9 for pin assignments and diagram of the analog output connector V OUT VIN ANALYZER Recording Device Figure 5 4 Setup for Checking Calibrating DCV Analog Output Signal Levels Table 5 7 Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL Calibration SPAN MINIMUM ADJUSTMENT FULL SCALE ZERO TOLERANCE SPAN VOLTAGE TOLERANCE 1 count 0 1 VDC 0 0005V 0 001V 0 02 mV 1 VDC 0 001V 900 mV 0 001V 0 24 mV 5 VDC 0 002V 4500 mV 0 003V 1 22 mV 10 VDC 0 004V 4500 mV 0 006V 2 44 mV j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 125 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer To adjust the signal levels of an analog output channel manually select the ANALOG CONFIGURATION submenu see Figure 5 3 then press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR AOUTS CALIBRATED NO CAL DISPLAYED AS CONC OUT 1 CONC OUT 2 CHANNEL A1 A2 A3 4 gt CONC_OUT 3 TEST OUTPUT DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 5V CONC2 NOCAL lt SET SET gt EDIT DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 RANGE 5V
280. mask that is divided into the same number of segments as the IR detector ring It is used by the synchronous demodulation circuitry of the analyzer to latch onto the most stable part of each measurement and reference IR pulse 9i Teledyne Analytical Instruments 301 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Measurement Pulses Reference Pulses IR Beam Pulses Segment Sensor 07 MR Sensor Ll Lf L Pues Figure 13 12 Segment Sensor and M R Sensor Output SCHMIDT TRIGGERS To ensure that the waveforms produced by the Segment Sensor and the M R Sensor are properly shaped and clean these signals are passed through a set of Schmidt Triggers circuits 13 4 2 4 IR PHOTO DETECTOR The IR beam is converted into an electrical signal by a cooled solid state photo conductive detector The detector is composed of a narrow band optical filter a piece of lead salt crystal whose electrical resistance changes with temperature and a two stage thermo electric cooler When the analyzer is on a constant electrical current is directed through the detector The IR beam is focused onto the detector surface raising its temperature and lowering its electrical resistance that results in a change in the voltage drop across the detector During those times that the IR beam is bright the temperature of the detector is high the resistance of the detector
281. minal program to be sent to the analyzer IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Sending a DAS configuration to the analyzer through its COM ports will replace the existing configuration and will delete all stored data Back up any existing data and the DAS configuration before uploading new settings j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 166 DAC and APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Triggering Events and Data Parameters Functions for these default channels are List of Channels List of Parameters Name CONC Event ATIMER Parameters 1 Report Period 000 01 00 No of Records 800 RS 232 Report OFF Channel Enabled ON Cal Hold OFF ON Name CALDAT Event SLPCHG Parameters 3 Report Period N A No of Records 200 RS 232 Report OFF Channel Enabled ON Cal Hold OFF OFF Name PNUMTC STORE NUM SAMPLES PARAMETER PRECISION SLOPE1 OFFSET1 ZSCNC1 INST I NST INST Event ATIMER 44 Parameters 2 Report Period 000 01 00 No of Records 360 RS 232 Report OFF Channel Enabled ON Cal Hold OFF OFF Name STBZERO Event 2 _ Parameters 3 Report Period N A No of Records 200 RS 232 Report OFF Channel Enabled ON Cal Hold OFF OFF Name STBSPN Event EXITSP 1 Parameters 2 Report Period 7 No of Records 200 RS 232 Report OFF Channel Enabled ON Cal Hold OFF OFF Name TEM
282. minal value listed in the table below Table 12 11 Analog Output Test Function Nominal Values Voltage Outputs OUTPUT RANGE 2 20 4 20 NOMINAL OUTPUT VALUES STEP CURRENT V 250 OHMS CURRENT V 250 OHMS 1 0 2mA 0 5V 4 1 2 20 5 6 1 4 7 2 1 8 3 40 9 2 2 3 10 4 2 6 4 60 12 8 3 2 13 6 3 4 5 80 16 4 4 1 16 8 4 2 6 100 20 5 20 5 12 5 8 4 STATUS OUTPUTS The procedure below can be used to test the Status outputs 1 Connect a jumper between the D pin and the V pin on the status output connector 2 Connect a 1000 ohm resistor between the pin and the pin for the status output that is being tested 3 Connect a voltmeter between the V pin and the pin of the output being tested see table below Under the DIAG SIGNAL I O menu see Section 12 1 3 scroll through the inputs and outputs until you get to the output in question Alternately turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter it should vary between 0 volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF Table 12 12 Status Outputs Check PIN LEFT TO RIGHT STATUS SYSTEM OK CONC VALID HIGH RANGE ZERO CAL SPAN CAL DIAG MODE SPARE SPARE co Oo o0 5 Ww ry j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 278 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 5 8 5 CONTROL INPUTS REMOTE ZERO SPAN The control input bits ca
283. mit is exceeded the oldest data is 1 to 1 million limited by RECORDS ovetswifien available storage space Enables the analyzer to automatically report esos e REPORT channel values to the RS 232 ports CHANNEL Enables or disables the channel Allows a channel ENABLED to be temporarily turned off without deleting it Disables sampling of data parameters while PAL HOLD OEE instrument is in calibration mode 2 OFF or ON OFF or ON OFF or ON 1 More with APICOM but only the first six are displayed on the front panel When enabled records are not recorded until the DAS HOLD OFF period is passed after calibration mode DAS HOLD OFF SET in the VARS menu see Section 7 1 11 7 1 2 DEFAULT DAS CHANNELS A set of default Data Channels has been included in the analyzer s software for logging CO concentration and certain predictive diagnostic data These default channels include but are not limited to CONC Samples CO concentration at one minute intervals and stores an average every hour with a time and date stamp Readings during calibration and calibration hold off are not included in the data By default the last 800 hourly averages are stored PNUMTC Collects sample flow and sample pressure data at five minute intervals and stores an average once a day with a time and date stamp This data is useful for monitoring the condition of the critical flow orifice sample flow and the sample filter clogging indicated by a drop in sam
284. mmends that you obtain a copy of the publication Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume 2 Part 1 Ambient abbreviated Q A Handbook Volume II This manual can be purchased from e USEPA Order Number EPA454R98004 or NTIS Order Number PB99 129876 e National Technical Information Service phone 800 553 6847 or Center for Environmental Research Information or the U S Government Printing Office at http www gpo gov The Handbook can also be located on line by searching for the title at http www epa gov e Special attention should be paid to Section 2 6 of that which covers CO analyzers of this type Specific regulations regarding the use and operation of ambient CO analyzers can be found in Reference at the end of this Section A bibliography and references relating to CO monitoring are listed in Section 10 6 10 1 1 CALIBRATION OF EQUIPMENT GENERAL GUIDELINES In general calibration is the process of adjusting the gain and offset of the GFC7001T against some recognized standard In this section the term dynamic calibration is used to express a multipoint check against known standards and involves introducing gas samples of known concentration into the instrument in order to adjust the instrument to a predetermined sensitivity and to produce a calibration relationship This relationship is derived from the instrumental response to successive samples of different known concentrations As a minimum
285. mmon Myths About ESD Damage sse enne nennen nennen terrere nennen en 317 14 4 Basic Principles of Static Control sess 318 14 4 1 edid teilt edid decidi dd e Oh edid eed d dte obedece tcd 318 14 4 2 Basic anti ESD Procedures for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance 319 14 4 2 1 Working at the Instrument RACK ssssssssssseee eene eene nennen ener ener nene 320 14 4 2 2 Working at an Anti ESD Work Bench sss enne menn nennen nnns 320 14 4 2 3 Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and 320 14 4 2 4 Opening Shipments from Teledyne Customer 321 14 4 2 5 Packing Components for Return to Teledyne Customer Service 322 GLOSSARY NNNM 323 LIST OF APPENDICES APPENDIX A VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION APPENDIX B GFC7001T GFC7001TM SPARE PARTS LIST APPENDIX C REPAIR QUESTIONNAIRE GFC7001T APPENDIX D SCHEMATICS j Teledyne Analytical Instruments XV Table of ContentsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer LIST OF FIGURES Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 F
286. monitoring data by helping to keep the calibration relationship more closely matched to any changes drifts in the analyzer response LEVEL 2 ZERO AND SPAN CHECK A Level 2 zero and span check is an unofficial check of an analyzer s response It may include dynamic checks made with uncertified test concentrations artificial stimulation of the analyzer s detector electronic or other types of checks of a portion of the analyzer etc Level 2 zero and span checks are not to be used as a basis for analyzer zero or span adjustments calibration updates or adjustment of ambient data They are intended as quick convenient checks to be used between zero and span calibrations to check for possible analyzer malfunction or calibration drift Whenever a Level 2 zero or span check indicates a possible calibration problem a Level 1 zero and span or multipoint calibration should be carried out before any corrective action is taken If a Level 2 zero and span check is to be used in the quality control program a reference response for the check should be obtained immediately following a zero and span or multipoint calibration while the analyzer s calibration is accurately known Subsequent Level 2 check responses should then be compared to the most recent reference response to determine if a change in response has occurred For automatic Level 2 zero and span checks the first scheduled check following the calibration should be used for the
287. n 2 meters long e Maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should not exceed 1 5 in Hg above ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure e In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold a vent must be placed on the sample gas before it enters the analyzer CALIBRATION GAS SOURCES SPAN GAS e Attach a gas line from the source of calibration gas e g a TAI s T700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator to the SPAN inlet ZERO AIR e Zero air is supplied internally via a zero air scrubber that draws ambient air through the IZS inlet INLET PRESSURE RATING CONSIDERATION This instrument has no significant internal restriction other than the flow control device and pressure sensor shown in Figure 3 20 Sample must be introduced to the inlet fitting at a fraction of a PSI above ambient pressure just enough to drive the flow to the proper value range If a pressurized source is used both the zero air supply and sample gas line MUST be vented in order to ensure that the gases input do not exceed the maximum inlet pressure of the analyzer as well as to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects These vents should be j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 69 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer e At least 0 2m long e No more than 2m long and e Vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument A similar vent line shoul
288. n alarm options It is possible to assign more than one flag to the same Hessen status bit This allows the grouping of similar flags such as all temperature warnings under the same status bit Be careful not to assign conflicting flags to the same bit as each status bit will be triggered if any of the assigned flags is active j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 160 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer To assign or reset the status flag bit assignments press SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT COMMUNICATIONS MENU HESSEN STATUS FLAGS ID HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT lt SET EDIT EXIT HESSEN VARIATION TYPE1 SETUP X X SOURCE WARNING 0004 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until Continue pressing NEXT until desired flag message is displayed SETUP X X SAMPLE TEMP WARNING 0020 PREV NEX EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X TEMP WARNING 0 008 The lt CH and CH gt CH CH DEL 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the buttons move the a new setting cursor brackets ENTR accepts the new setting 7 left and right along the bit string Press the button repeatedly to cycle through the available character set 0 9 DEL deletes the character currently NOTE Values of A F can also be set but are
289. n be tested by the following procedure 1 Jumper the 5 pin on the Status connector to U on the Control In connector 2 Connect a second jumper from the pin on the Status connector to the A pin on the Control In connector The instrument should switch from Sample Mode to ZERO CAL R mode 3 Connect a second jumper from the pin on the Status connector to the B pin on the Control In connector The instrument should switch from Sample Mode to SPAN CAL R mode 4 Ineach case the GFC7001T GFC7001TM should return to Sample Mode when the jumper is removed 12 5 9 CPU There are two major types of CPU board failures a complete failure and a failure associated with the Disk On Module DOM If either of these failures occurs contact the factory For complete failures assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the wiring is intact the CPU is faulty if on power on the watchdog LED on the motherboard is not flashing In some rare circumstances this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard specifically U57 the large 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board If this is true removing U57 from its socket will allow the instrument to start up but the measurements will be invalid If the analyzer stops during initialization the front panel display shows a fault or warning message it is likely that the DOM the firmware or the configuration and data files have been corrupted 12 5 10
290. n signals are present Table 12 3 Sync Demod Board Status Failure Indications FAULT STATUS INDICATED FAILURE S LED FUNCTION GFC Wheel is not turning M R Sensor Status M R Sensor on Opto Pickup Board failed D1 LED is stuck Sync Demod Board failed ON or OFF y JP 4 Connector Wiring faulty Failed Faulty 5 VDC Power Supply PS1 GFC Wheel is not turning Flashes slowly Segment Sensor Segment Sensor on Opto Pickup Board failed D2 SNS LEDS stuck Sync Demod Board failed id eae tor Wiring fault Flashes quickly onnector Wiring faulty Failed Faulty 5 VDC Power Supply PS1 JP4 Connector to Opto Pickup D1 M R Sensor Status Board D2 Segment Sensor Status a ole eje z ojo m Figure 12 4 Sync Demod Board Status LED Locations 9i Teledyne Analytical Instruments 258 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 1 4 3 RELAY BOARD STATUS LEDS There are eight LEDs located on the Relay Board The most important of which is D1 which indicates the health of the C bus If D1 is blinking the other faults following LEDs can be used in conjunction with DIAG menu signal I O to identify hardware failures of the relays and switches on the relay see Section 12 1 3 and Appendix D Table 12 4 12 Status LED Failure Indications LED FUNCTION FAULT STATUS INDICATED FAILURE S Failed Halted CPU D1 bus Health Continuously ON Fa
291. n window Read Write Definition Slave ID Function 04 Read Input Registers 3 Address 0 Appl Quantity 52 Scan Rate 1000 ms Read Write Enabled Read Write Once View Rows 910 O20 O50 100 Hide Alias Columns C Address in Cell Display Float inverse JPLC Addresses Base 1 Example Connection Setup window Connection Setup Connection 12 Modbus Poll Mbpoll1 Eile Edit Connection Setup Functions Display View Window Help Dee Kk SS 05 06 15 16 22 23 101 9 Mbpollt Tx 3103 Err 0 ID 1 F 04 SR 1000ms Alias 00000 00030 00040 oj COREF 2825 489 0 000000 0 000000 1 000000 4646 791 4096 228 1 2 Type Parameter name herel 0 114132 0 000000 0 000000 25 474514 4636 899 3 4 0 000000 0 000000 30 966089 0 511390 30 960850 5 6 1 000000 0 000000 1 000000 29 772381 30 960850 ki 8 1 000000 0 000000 30 960850 0 114132 0 050724 9 For Help press F1 Port 4 115200 8 N 1 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 151 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 6 7 2 HESSEN Note IMPORTANT properly set The Hessen protocol is a multidrop protocol in which several remote instruments are connected via a common communications channel to a host computer The remote instruments are regarded as slaves of the host computer The remote instrumen
292. nalyzer e Optimal value for CO MEAS is 4500 mV 300 mV If it is not adjust the value 12 6 3 2 ADJUSTING THE SYNC DEMODULATOR CIRCUIT GAIN To adjust the sync demodulator circuit gain Make sure that the analyzer is turned on and warmed up Set the analyzer display to show the STABIL or CO STB test function Apply Zero Air to Sample Inlet of the analyzer Wait until the stability reading falls below 1 0 ppm Change the analyzer display to show the CO MEAS Remove the Sync Demod Housing ON EA d OD B L e Remove the two mounting screws e Carefully lift the housing to reveal the sync demod PCA Housing Mounting Screws Sync Demod PCA Housing Optical Bench Figure 12 19 Location of Sync Demod Housing Mounting Screws 7 Adjust potentiometer VR1 until CO MEAS reads 4500 mV 300 mV VR1 Adjustment Made Here Figure 12 20 Location of Sync Demod Gain Potentiometer 9i Teledyne Analytical Instruments 285 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 6 4 DISK ON MODULE REPLACEMENT ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY Servicing of circuit components requires electrostatic discharge protection i e ESD grounding straps mats and containers Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty Refer to Section 13 for more information on preventing ESD damage Replacing the Disk on Module
293. nce Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume Il Ambient Air Specific Methods EPA 600 4 77 027a 1977 CFR Title 40 Protection of Environment AMBIENT AIR QUALITY SURVEILLANCE j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 235 Part Ill Technical InformationTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer PART Ill TECHNICAL INFORMATION 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments Part IIITeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer This page intentionally left blank 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments MaintenanceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 11 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE amp PROCEDURES Predictive diagnostic functions including data acquisition records failure warnings and test functions built into the analyzer allow the user to determine when repairs are necessary without performing painstaking preventative maintenance procedures There are however a minimal number of simple procedures that when performed regularly will ensure that the analyzer continues to operate accurately and reliably over its lifetime Repairs and troubleshooting are covered in Section 12 of this manual 11 1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Table 11 1 shows a typical maintenance schedule for the analyzer Please note that in certain environments i e dusty very high ambient pollutant levels some maintenance procedures may need to be performed more often than shown Note A Span and Zero Calibration Check see CAL CHECK
294. nce in circuit ground between the analyzer and the data logger or a wiring problem j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 287 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer QUESTION ANSWER How do perform a leak check Section 11 3 2 provides leak check instructions How do measure the sample flow Sample flow is measured by attaching a calibrated rotameter wet test meter or other flow measuring device to the sample inlet port when the instrument is operating The sample flow should be 800 cm min 10 See Section 11 3 3 How long does the IR source last Typical lifetime is about 2 3 years Can automate the calibration of my analyzer Any analyzer with zero span valve or IZS option can be automatically calibrated using the instrument s AutoCal feature The setup of this option is located in Section 9 4 Can use the IZS option to calibrate the analyzer Yes However whereas this may be acceptable for basic calibration checks the IZS option is not permitted as a calibration source in applications following US EPA protocols To achieve highest accuracy it is recommended to use cylinders of calibrated span gases in combination with a zero air source Q What is the averaging time for an GFC7001T GFC7001TM A The default averaging time optimized for ambient pollution monitoring is 150 seconds for stable concentrations and 10 seco
295. nd damaging it 14 4 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF STATIC CONTROL It is impossible to stop the creation of instantaneous static electric charges It is not however difficult to prevent those charges from building to dangerous levels or prevent damage due to electro static discharge from occurring 14 4 1 GENERAL RULES Only handle or work on all electronic assemblies at a properly set up ESD station Setting up an ESD safe workstation need not be complicated A protective mat properly tied to ground and a wrist strap are all that 1s needed to create a basic anti ESD workstation Protective Mat SE Stre Ground Point Figure 14 2 Basic anti ESD Workbench For technicians that work in the field special lightweight and portable anti ESD kits are available from most suppliers of ESD protection gear These include everything needed to create a temporary anti ESD work area anywhere j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 318 Teledyne Technical Manual Model T300 Family CO Analyzers ESD Always wear an Anti ESD wrist strap when working on the electronic assemblies of your analyzer An anti ESD wrist strap keeps the person wearing it at or near the same potential as other grounded objects in the work area and allows static charges to dissipate before they can build to dangerous levels Anti ESD wrist straps terminated with alligator clips are available for use in work areas where there is no available grounded plug
296. nd Technology NIST To ensure NIST traceability we recommend to acquire cylinders of working gas that are certified to be traceable to NIST Standard Reference Materials SRM These are available from a variety of commercial sources Table 9 1 NIST SRMs Available for Traceability of CO Calibration Gases NIST SRM Type Nominal Concentration 680b CO in N2 500 ppm 1681b CO in 1000 ppm 2613a CO in Zero Air 20 ppm 2614a CO in Zero Air 45 ppm 2659a1 O in No 21 by weight 2626a CO in 4 by weight 27452 CO in 16 by weight 1 Used to calibrate optional sensor Used to calibrate optional CO sensor j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 194 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Note It is generally a good idea to use 80 of the reporting range for that channel for the span point calibration For instance if the reporting range of the instrument is set for 50 0 PPM the 9 1 2 DATA RECORDING DEVICES A strip chart recorder data acquisition system or digital data acquisition system should be used to record data from the serial or analog outputs of the GFC7001T GFC7001TM e If analog readings are used the response of the recording system should be checked against a NIST traceable voltage source or meter e Data recording devices should be capable of bi polar operation so that negative readings can be recorded e For electronic data rec
297. nds for rapidly changing concentrations see Section 13 5 1 for more information However it is adjustable over a range of 0 5 second to 200 seconds please contact Customer Service for more information 12 8 TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE If this manual and its troubleshooting repair sections do not solve your problems technical assistance may be obtained from TELEDYNE ELECTRONIC TECHNOLOGIES Analytical Instruments 16830 Chestnut Street City of Industry CA 91748 Telephone 626 934 1500 Fax 626 961 2538 Web www teledyne ai com or your local representative Before you contact TAI Customer Service fill out the problem report form in Appendix C j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 288 Theory of OperationTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 13 THEORY OF OPERATION The GFC7001T GFC7001TM Gas Filter Correlation Carbon monoxide Analyzer is a microprocessor controlled analyzer that determines the concentration of carbon monoxide CO in a sample gas drawn through the instrument It requires that the sample and calibration gases be supplied at or very close to ambient atmospheric pressure in order to establish a stable gas flow through the sample chamber where the gases ability to absorb infrared radiation is measured Calibration of the instrument is performed in software and does not require physical adjustments to the instrument During calibration the microprocessor measures the current state
298. ned on this mode switches the COM port settings from PARITY 8 DATA BITS 1 stop bit to EVEN PARITY 7 DATA BITS 1 stop bit RS 485 1024 Configures the COM2 Port for RS 485 communication RS 485 mode has precedence over multidrop mode if both are enabled SECURITY 4 When enabled the serial port requires a password before it will respond see Section 5 5 If not logged on the only active command is the request for the help screen MULTIDROP 32 Multidrop protocol allows a multi instrument configuration on a single communications PROTOCOL channel Multidrop requires the use of instrument IDs ENABLE 64 Enables to send a modem initialization string at power up Asserts certain lines in the MODEM RS 232 port to enable the modem to communicate ERROR 128 Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations CHECKING XON XOFF 256 Disables XON XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking HANDSHAKE Enables CTS RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking This style of data HARDWARE i d ons gt HANDSHAKE 8 transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems or terminal emulation protocols as well as by Teledyne Instrument s APICOM software HARDWARE 512 Disables the HARDWARE FIFO First In First Out When FIFO is enabled it improves FIFO data transfer rate for that COM port COMMAND 4096 Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode PROMPT 1 Modes are listed in the order in which they appe
299. ng SET gt until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 5V OVR NOCAL lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 RANGE 5V SET gt EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 OVERRANGE ON lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT Toggle this DIAG AIO OUT 2 OVERRANGE ON button to turn the Over ON ENTR EXIT Range feature ON OFF J gt DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 OVERRANGE OFF OFF ENTR EXIT j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 130 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 9 3 9 ADDING A RECORDER OFFSET TO AN ANALOG OUTPUT Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal is significantly different from the baseline of the recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise around the zero point This can be achieved in the GFC7001T GFC7001TM by defining a zero offset a small voltage e g 10 of span add a zero offset to a specific analog output channel select the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION submenu see Figure 5 3 then press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET gt CAL EXIT Continue pressing SET gt until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 5V OVR NOCAL lt SET SET gt EDIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 OUTPUT 5V SET EDIT Continue pressing SET until DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 REC OFS 0 mV SET SET EDIT Toggle these DIAG AIO C
300. ng Strap Handle Side mounted strap for hand carrying analyzer 29 Extends from flat position to accommodate hand for carrying Recesses to 9mm 3 8 dimension for storage Can be used with rack mount brackets Option 21 Cannot be used with rack mount slides CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD A fully loaded GFC7001T with valve options weighs about 18 kg or 40 Ibs GFC7001TM weighs 22 7 kg or 50 Ibs To avoid personal injury we recommend that two persons lift and carry the analyzer Disconnect all cables and tubing from the analyzer before moving it N A Analog Inputs Used for connecting external voltage signals from other instrumentation such as meteorological instruments 64 Also can be used for logging these signals in the analyzer s internal Sections 3 3 1 2 DAS 5 9 3 11 and 7 Current Loop Analog Outputs Adds isolated voltage to current conversion circuitry to the analyzer s analog outputs 41 Can be configured for any output range between 0 and 20 mA 2 3 May be ordered separately for any of the analog outputs 5 9 2 and 5 9 3 7 46 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 25 IntroductionTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Option Option Description Notes Reference Number Can be installed at the factory or retrofitted in the field Parts Kits Spare parts and expendables Expendables Kit includes a recommended set of expendables for 42A one
301. nge spans e All current loop outputs have a 5 over range Ranges whose lower limit is set above 1 mA also have a 5 under range To switch an analog output from voltage to current loop follow the instructions in Section 5 9 3 1 select CURR from the list of options on the Output Range menu Adjusting the signal zero and span levels of the current loop output is done by raising or lowering the voltage output of the D to A converter circuitry on the analyzer s motherboard This raises or lowers the signal level produced by the current loop option circuitry The software allows this adjustment to be made in 100 10 or 1 count increments Since the exact amount by which the current signal is changed per D to A count varies from output to output and instrument to instrument you will need to measure the change in the signal levels with a separate current meter placed in series with the output circuit See Figure 3 9 for pin assignments and diagram of the analog output connector Ammeter I OUT IIN Recording Device ANALYZER Figure 5 5 Setup for Checking Calibration Current Output Signal Levels Using an Ammeter CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD Do not exceed 60 V peak voltage between current loop outputs and instrument ground 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 127 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer To adjust the zero and span signal levels of the current outputs selec
302. nications ports If the analyzer responds to remote commands and the display changes accordingly the touchscreen interface may be faulty 12 5 5 LCD DISPLAY MODULE Verify the functioning of the front panel display by observing it when power is applied to the instrument Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies are operating properly the display screen should light and show the splash screen with logo and other indications of its state as the CPU goes through its initialization process 12 5 6 RELAY BOARD The relay board PCA P N 04135 can be most easily checked by observing the condition of the its status LEDs on the relay board as described in Section 12 1 4 3 and 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 272 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer the associated output when toggled on and off through signal I O function in the diagnostic menu see Section 12 1 3 1 Ifthe front panel display responds to button presses and D1 on the relay board is NOT flashing then either the wiring between the touchscreen and the relay board is bad or the relay board is bad 2 IfD1 on the relay board is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question heater power valve drive etc toggles properly using the signal I O function then the associated control device on the relay board is bad e Several of the control devices are in sockets and can be easily replaced
303. nly e Zero span valve options e Option 50A Sample Cal valves or e Option 50B Sample Cal valves with span shutoff amp flow control e Internal zero span IZS option with either e Option 51A Sample Cal valves or e Option 51C Sample Cal valves with span shutoff amp flow control e 4 20mA isolated output 2 3 APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATIONS The TAI Model GFC7001T GFC7001TM analyzer was tested and certified for Safety and Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC This section presents the compliance statements for those requirements and directives j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 31 SpecificationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 2 3 1 SAFETY IEC 61010 1 2001 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use CE 2006 95 EC Low Voltage Directive North American cNEMKO Canada CAN CSA C22 2 No 61010 1 04 NEMKO CCL US UL No 61010 1 2nd Edition 2 3 2 EMC EN 61326 1 IEC 61326 1 Class A Emissions Industrial Immunity EN 55011 CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A Emissions FCC 47 CFR Part 15B Class A Emissions CE 2004 108 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2 3 3 OTHER TYPE CERTIFICATIONS MCERTS Sira MC 050069 04 For additional certifications please contact Customer Service j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 32 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 3 GETTING STARTED This section firs
304. nnect a cable from the analyzer s Ethernet port to a Local Area Network LAN or Internet port 2 From the analyzer s front panel touchscreen access the Communications Menu SETUP gt MORE gt COMM 3 Enter the Ethernet menu INET follow the setup sequence as shown in Figure 6 4 and edit the Instrument and Gateway IP addresses and Subnet Mask to the desired settings Alternatively from the computer enter the same information through an application such as HyperTerminal Table 6 3 shows the default Ethernet configuration settings Table 6 3 LAN Internet Default Configuration Properties PROPERTY DEFAULT STATE DESCRIPTION ON This displays whether the DHCP is turned ON or OFF Press DHCP EDIT and toggle ON for automatic configuration after first consulting network administrator INSTRUMENT IP This string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each e g ADDRESS 192 168 76 55 is the address of the analyzer itself Can only be edited when DHCP is set to OFF GATEWAY IP 0 0 0 0 A string of numbers very similar to the Instrument IP address ADDRESS e g 192 168 76 1 that is the address of the computer used by your LAN to access the Internet Can only be edited when DHCP is set to OFF Also a string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each e g 255 255 252 0 that identifies the LAN to which the device is 0 0 0 0 connected SUBNET MASK All addressable devices and computers on a LAN must have the same subnet mask
305. np t 34 ter ne tert Rt e Ee deen ee Re eae 50 Concentration Alarm Relay eere ele ret videa te ede eed ete duae dead 51 Rear Panel Connector Pin Outs for RS 232 Mode sse eene 54 Default Pin Assignments for CPU COM Port connector 5 232 55 Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode sss ener 57 RS 232 Multidrop PCA Host Analyzer Interconnect 58 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Bottled Span 61 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Gas Dilution Calibrator 61 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Internal Gas Flow eee ener 62 Pneumatic Connections Option 50A Zero Span Calibration 63 Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50A Zero Span Valves sss 64 Internal Pneumatic Flow Zero Span Shutoff Valves Opt 50 65 Pneumatic Connections Zero Scrubber Pressurized Span Calibration Valves Opt 50E 66 Internal Pneumatic Flow Zero Scrubber Pressurized Span Calibration Valves Opt 5OE 68 Pneumatic Connections Option 50H Zero Span Calibration Valves 69 Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50H Zer
306. ns to between the available modes L Continue pressing NEXT until COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL OFF Activate Deactivate PREV NEXT OFF the HESSEN mode EXIT by toggling the ON OFF button COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL ON EXIT discards the new setting PREV NEXT ON ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the 1 MODE 16 new setting 77 lt SET SET gt EDIT COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID HESN COM1 2 6 7 2 3 SELECTING A HESSEN PROTOCOL TYPE Currently there are two versions of Hessen Protocol in use The original implementation referred to as TYPE 1 and a more recently released version TYPE 2 that has more flexibility when operating with instruments that can measure more than one type of gas For more specific information about the difference between TYPE 1 and TYPE 2 download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne API web site http www teledyne api com manuals To select a Hessen Protocol Type press j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 154 CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT HESSEN VARIATION TYPE1 SET SET EDIT HESSEN VARIATION TYPE1 TYP1 TYP2 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Use these setting buttons to
307. nstantaneous or averaged EXITZR EXITSP and SLPCHG exit zero exit span slope change Sampling at the end of irregularly occurring calibrations or when the response slope changes These triggering events create instantaneous data points e g for the new slope and offset concentration response values at the end of a calibration Zero and slope values are valuable to monitor response drift and to document when the instrument was calibrated WARNINGS Some data may be useful when stored if one of several warning messages appears such as WTEMPW GFC Wheel temperature warning This is helpful for troubleshooting by monitoring when a particular warning occurrs To edit the list of data parameters associated with a specific data channel follow the instruction shown in Section 7 1 4 then press 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 171 DAC and APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Note Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 1 800 PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X NAME CONC SET EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET until SETUP X X EVENT ATIMER SET SET EDIT EXIT EXIT discards the new W setting ENTR accepts the new setting J Toggle these buttons to cycle through the list of available trigger EVENT ATIMER event 77 prev NEXT ENTR EXIT 7 1 6 EDITING DAS PARAMETERS Data parameters are types of data that may be measured and stored by the DAS For
308. nt misuse neglect or repairs other than those performed by Teledyne or an authorized service center We assume no liability for direct or indirect damages of any kind and the purchaser by the acceptance of the equipment will assume all liability for any damage which may result from its use or misuse We reserve the right to employ any suitable material in the manufacture of our apparatus and to make any alterations in the dimensions shape or weight of any parts in so far as such alterations do not adversely affect our warranty Important Notice This instrument provides measurement readings to its user and serves as a tool by which valuable data can be gathered The information provided by the instrument may assist the user in eliminating potential hazards caused by his process however it is essential that all personnel involved in the use of the instrument or its interface be properly trained in the process being measured as well as all instrumentation related to it The safety of personnel is ultimately the responsibility of those who control process conditions While this instrument may be able to provide early warning of imminent danger it has no control over process conditions and it can be misused In particular any alarm or control systems installed must be tested and understood both as to how they operate and as to how they can be defeated Any safeguards required such as locks labels or redundancy must be provided by the user or
309. nte reb ee deba e nhe d rud e bee erede nie 304 13 4 3 3 Photo Detector Temperature mener 304 13 4 3 4 Dark Calibration Switch sssseseeseeeee enm nennen en enne nnns 305 13 4 3 5 Electric Test Switeli nette o etae beta eb E 305 13 4 4 Relay Board iine id decreti ied died dedi d pd ie d de ee ei eda 305 T3 4 4 1 Heater Control ote t etti dte etie bus i tablet etes Ulis bebat En 305 13 4 4 2 GF GC Wheel Motor teta tr etate et aee orte ubl aet nete eeu bt lub eran ex 305 13 4 4 3Zero Span Valve Optioris ine ttr tede e eet ee a tr a rn aeons 306 T3 4 4 4 IR SOUICO iet tate ettet bete arae Re E Ue Les rdc e Rb reu Eben da 306 T3 4 4 5 Status E EDS teet e etc tn ate Un bt Puedo iui a Fab ties ursus 306 13 4 4 6 12C Watch Dog CIFCUllby hr er tpe Ehe Pr REESE AED ERR 307 13 4 5 Em 307 Jem en E MBEG nici E 307 13 4 5 2 Sensor Inputs oe ibt ta teta ha 308 13 4 5 3 Thermistor Interface etre oct tet trc ect esa abt ec ln eo eet eeu Geb tes baee ebbe pee 308 13 4 5 4 Analog Outputs 22 ttal hentai sleeve req ander ta ees rege ecce aperta rs 309 13 4 5 5 Internal Digital Q cett rta tate ardt ne
310. nu 5 7 1 ID MACHINE IDENTIFICATION Press ID to display and or change the Machine ID which must be changed to a unique identifier number when more than one instrument of the same model is used e inan RS 232 multidrop configuration Sections 3 3 1 9 and 6 7 2 e onthe same Ethernet LAN Section 6 5 e when applying MODBUS protocol Section 6 7 1 e when applying Hessen protocol Section 6 7 2 The default ID is the same as the model number for the Model T100 the ID is 0100 Press any button s in the MACHINE ID menu Figure 5 2 until the Machine ID Parameter field displays the desired identifier SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU COM2 Toggle to cycle through the available character set 0 9 SETUP X MACHINE ID 300 ID ENTR accepts the new settings EXIT ignores the new ENTR EXIT settings Figure 5 2 COMM Machine ID The ID can be any 4 digit number and can also be used to identify analyzers in any number of ways e g location numbers company asset number etc 5 7 2 INET ETHERNET Use SETUP gt COMM gt INET to configure Ethernet communications whether manually or via DHCP Please see Section 6 5 for configuration details 5 7 3 COM1 AND COM2 MODE BAUD RATE AND TEST PORT Use SETUP gt COMM gt COM1 COM2 menus to e configure communication modes Section 6 2 1 e view set the baud rate Section 6 2 2 e test the connections of the com ports Section 6 2 3 Configuring COMI or COM2 require
311. nue pressing NEXT until SET SET EDIT SETUP X X O2 1 312 REPORTED PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT There is only one GAS SETUP XX DELETE TYPE available on YES NO the M400E O3 7 DELETED j Teledyne Analytical Instruments CommunicationsTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 6 7 3 4 SETTING HESSEN PROTOCOL STATUS FLAGS Teledyne s implementation of Hessen protocols includes a set of status bits that the instrument includes in responses to inform the host computer of its condition Each bit can be assigned to one operational and warning message flag The default settings for these bit flags are Table 6 6 Default Hessen Status Flag Assignments STATUS FLAG NAME DEFAULT BIT ASSIGNMENT INVALID CONC The Instrument s Front Panel Display Will Show The 0080 Concentration As Warnings OPERATIONAL FLAGS Instrument OFF 0100 In MANUAL Calibration Mode 0200 In ZERO Calibration Mode 0400 In O2 Calibration Mode if O2 sensor installed 0400 In CO Calibration Mode if sensor installed 0400 In SPAN Calibration Mode 0800 UNITS OF MEASURE FLAGS 0000 2000 4000 6000 SPARE UNUSED BITS 1000 8000 UNASSIGNED FLAGS 0000 REAR BOARD NOT DET 1 These status flags are standard for all instruments and should probably not be modified Only applicable if the optional internal span gas generator is installed Only applicable if the analyzer is equipped with a
312. o Air Scrubber 264 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Internal Pneumatics with Sensor Option 654A 264 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Internal Pneumatics with Sensor Option 67A 265 Location of Diagnostic LEDs onCO Sensor 280 Critical Flow Restrictor Assembly Disassembly sse emm 281 Opening the Wheel Housing sse enm 282 Removing the Opto Pickup ener enne 283 Removing the Wheel ener nene 283 Removing the GF G Wheel 2 2 roter trt rr etx eR oak AF RH ined leh 284 Location of Sync Demod Housing Mounting Screws sese 285 Location of Sync Demod Gain eene 285 Measurement Fundamentals 291 EP 291 Measurement Fundamentals with Wheel sss 292 Affect of CO in the Sample on CO MEAS amp CO REF 1 eese 293 Effects of Interfering Gas on CO MEAS amp CO REF sse eene 294 Chopped AIR Signal ERE 294 Internal Pneumatic Flow Basic Configuration ssseeenn een 295 Flow Control Assembly amp Critical Flow
313. o Scrubber Ambient Span 70 Zero Span Calibration Procedure 80 Front Panel ie Ete PERDRE nep ite d de DR E t 85 Viewing GFC7001T GFC7001TM Test Functions seeeeen emen 87 Viewing and Clearing GFC7001T GFC7001TM WARNING 90 Analog Output Connector Pin E 95 COMM Machine i it creer tnr ERE tte BOR EUR De cR ied aa 110 Accessing the Analog I O Configuration 118 Setup for Checking Calibrating DCV Analog Output Signal 125 Setup for Checking Calibration Current Output Signal Levels Using an Ammeter 127 Alternative Setup Using 2500 Resistor for Checking Current Output Signal Levels 129 DIAG Analog Inputs Option Configuration Menu seeem emn 133 COM1 2 Communication Modes 5 141 COMM Port Baud Rates Leder PER ed a pe dd deed iiia 142 COMM COMY Test Port nre needed petere dee LE ere de DeL ide epe e gatis 142 COMM LAN Internet Manual Configuration eme 145 COMM LAN Internet Automatic Configuration DHCP
314. o cavities When the beam is exposed to the reference cell the CO in the gas filter wheel strips the beam of most of the IR at 4 7um When the light beam is exposed to the measurement cell the in the filter wheel does not absorb IR light This causes a fluctuation in the intensity of the IR light striking the photo detector which results in the output of the detector resembling a square wave 13 2 1 2 THE MEASURE REFERENCE RATIO The GFC7001T GFC7001TM determines the amount of CO in the sample chamber by computing the ratio between the peak of the measurement pulse CO MEAS and the peak of the reference pulse CO REF If no gases exist in the sample chamber that absorb light at 4 7m the high concentration of CO in the gas mixture of the reference cell will attenuate the intensity of the IR beam by 60 giving a M R ratio of approximately 2 4 1 Adding CO to the sample chamber causes the peaks corresponding to both cells to be attenuated by a further percentage Since the intensity of the light passing through the measurement cell is greater the effect of this additional attenuation is greater This causes CO MEAS to be more sensitive to the presence of CO in the sample chamber than CO REF and the ratio between them M R to move closer to 1 1 as the concentration of CO in the sample chamber increases j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 292 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer IR unaffected by
315. oard or the IR photodetector are bad See Section 12 4 1 4 for problems with the IR photodetector TEC drive j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 273 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 5 7 2 ELECTRICAL TEST The electric test function substitutes simulated signals for CO MEAS and CO REF generated by circuitry on the sync demod board for the output of the IR photo detector While in this mode the user can also view the same test functions viewable from the main SAMPLE display When the test is running the concentration reported on the front panel display should be 40 0 ppm Also see Section 5 9 4 SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP ENTER PASSWORD 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until ELECTRICAL TEST Press lt TST TST gt to view Test Functions PREV NEXT ENTR NOTE CO MEAS and CO REF will be artificially altered to enforce a CO reading of 40 0 ppm All other Test Functions will report the correct DIAG ELEC RANGE 50 0 PPM operational value CO 40 lt TST TST gt CAL EXIT 12 5 7 3 OPTO PICKUP ASSEMBLY Operation of the opto pickup PCA P N 04088 can be verified with a voltmeter Measure the AC and DC voltage between digital ground on the relay board or touchscreen and TP2 and TP4 on
316. odes that multiply electrons collected and charged to create a detectable current signal P N or PN Part Number PSD Prevention of Significant Deterioration PTFE Polytetrafluoroethylene a very inert polymer material used to handle gases that may react on other surfaces one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as Teflon PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride a polymer used for downstream tubing 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 325 Teledyne Technical Manual Model T300 Family CO Analyzers ESD Rdg Reading RS 232 specification and standard describing a serial communication method between DTE Data Terminal Equipment and DCE Data Circuit terminating Equipment devices using a maximum cable length of 50 feet RS 485 specification and standard describing a binary serial communication method among multiple devices at a data rate faster than RS 232 with a much longer distance between the host and the furthest device SAROAD Storage and Retrieval of Aerometric Data SLAMS State and Local Air Monitoring Network Plan SLPM Standard Liters Per Minute of a gas at standard temperature and pressure STP Standard Temperature and Pressure TCP IP Transfer Control Protocol Internet Protocol the standard communications protocol for Ethernet devices TEC Thermal Electric Cooler TPC Temperature Pressure Compensation USB Universal Serial Bus a standard connection method to establish communication betwe
317. of other key components The relay board receives instructions in the form of digital signals over the bus interprets these digital instructions and activates its various switches and relays appropriately 13 4 4 1 HEATER CONTROL The two heaters attached to the sample chamber housing and the GFC Wheel motor are controlled by solid state relays located on the relay board The GFC Wheel heater is simply turned on or off however control of the bench heater also includes circuitry that selects which one of its two separate heating elements is activated depending on whether the instrument is running on 100 VAC 115 VAC or 230 VAC line power 13 4 4 2 GFC WHEEL MOTOR CONTROL The GFC Wheel operates from a AC voltage supplied by a multi input transformer located on the relay board The step down ratio of this transformer is controlled by factory installed jumpers to adjust for 100 VAC 115 VAC or 230 VAC line power Other circuitry slightly alters the phase of the AC power supplied to the motor during start up based on whether line power is 50Hz or 60 Hz Normally the GFC Wheel Motor is always turning while the analyzer is on A physical switch located on the relay board can be used to turn the motor off for certain diagnostic procedures j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 305 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 13 4 4 3 ZERO SPAN VALVE OPTIONS Any zero span shutoff valve options installed in th
318. of the IR Sensor output and various other physical parameters of the instrument and stores them in memory The microprocessor uses these calibration values the IR absorption measurements made on the sample gas along with data regarding the current temperature and pressure of the gas to calculate a final CO concentration This concentration value and the original information from which it was calculated are stored in one of the unit s internal data acquisition system DAS See Sections 7 as well as reported to the user via front panel display display or a variety of digital and analog signal outputs 13 1 MEASUREMENT METHOD This section presents measurement principles and fundamentals for this instrument 13 1 1 BEER S LAW The basic principle by which the analyzer works is called the Beer Lambert Law or Beer s Law It defines how light of a specific wavelength is absorbed by a particular gas molecule over a certain distance The mathematical relationship between these three parameters is l e ale Equation 13 1 Where lo is the intensity of the light if there was no absorption is the intensity with absorption 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer L is the absorption path or the distance the light travels as it is being absorbed C is the concentration of the absorbing gas in the case of the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Carbon Monoxide CO Q is
319. onfigured for RS 232 communications This port can be reconfigured for operation as a non isolated half duplex RS 485 port Using COM2 for RS 485 communication disables the USB port To configure the instrument for RS 485 communication please contact the factory 3 3 2 PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS This section provides not only pneumatic connection information but also important information about the gases required for accurate calibration it also illustrates the pneumatic layouts for the analyzer in its basic configuration and with options Before making the pneumatic connections carefully note the following cautionary and special messages CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD CARBON MONOXIDE CO IS A TOXIC GAS Do not vent calibration gas and sample gas into enclosed areas Obtain a Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS for this material Read and rigorously follow the safety guidelines described there CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD Sample and calibration gases should only come into contact with PTFE Teflon FEP glass stainless steel or brass It is important to conform to all safety requirements regarding exposure to CO j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 59 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY Maximum Pressure Ideally the maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should equal ambient atmospheric pressure and should
320. op or it can be reconfigured for half duplex RS 485 operation please contact the factory for this configuration Note that when the rear panel COM2 port is in use except for multidrop communication the rear panel USB port cannot be used Alternatively when the USB port is enabled COM2 port cannot be used except for multidrop A Code Activated Switch CAS can also be used on either port to connect typically between 2 and 16 send receive instruments host computer s printers data loggers analyzers monitors calibrators etc into one communications hub Contact TAI Sales for more information on CAS systems To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem there are activity indicators just above the RS 232 port Once a cable is connected between the analyzer and a computer or modem both the red and green LEDs should be on e Ifthe lights are not lit use small switch on the rear panel to switch it between DTE and DCE modes e If both LEDs are still not illuminated make sure the cable properly constructed To configure the analyzer s communication ports use the SETUP gt MORE gt COMM menu Refer to Section 5 7 3 for initial setup 6 4 RS 485 OPTION The COMZ port of the instrument s rear panel is set up for RS 232 communication but can be reconfigured for RS 485 communication Contact Customer Service If this option was elected at the time of purchase the rear panel was preconfigured at t
321. or not the record is exported via the analyzer s RS 232 port etc 7 1 1 DAS DATA CHANNELS The key to the flexibility of the DAS is its ability to store a large number of combinations of triggering events and data parameters in the form of data channels Users may create up to 50 data channels and each channel can contain one or more parameters For each channel the following are selected e One triggering event is selected e Up to 50 data parameters which can be the shared between channels e Several other properties that define the structure of the channel and allow the user to make operational decisions regarding the channel j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 164 DAC and APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Table 7 2 DAS Data Channel Properties DEFAULT PROPERTY DESCRIPTION SETTING SETTING RANGE NAME The name of the data channel NONE Up to 6 letters or digits TRIGGERING The event that triggers the data channel to measure ATIMER EVENT and store the datum NUMBER AND LIST OF PARAMETERS recorded in any given channel COMEAS REPORT PERIOD The amount of time between each channel data 000 01 00 point 1 hour Any available event see Appendix A 5 A User configurable list of data types to be Any available parameter see Appendix A 5 000 00 01 to 366 23 59 Days Hours Minutes The number of reports that will be stored in the data NUMBER OF file Once the li
322. ording the GFC7001T GFC7001TM provides an internal data acquisition system DAS which is described in detail in Section 7 APICOM a remote control program is also provided as a convenient and powerful tool for data handling download storage quick check and plotting see Section 7 2 1 9 2 MANUAL CALIBRATION IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA ZERO SPAN CALIBRATION CHECKS VS ZERO SPAN CALIBRATION Pressing the ENTR button during the following procedure resets the stored values for OFFSET and SLOPE and alters the instrument s Calibration This should ONLY BE DONE during an actual calibration of the GFC7001T GFC7001TM NEVER press the ENTR button if you are only checking calibration If you wish to perform a calibration CHECK do not press ENTR and refer to Section 9 2 2 9 2 1 SETUP FOR BASIC CALIBRATION CHECKS AND CALIBRATION STEP ONE Connect the Sources of Zero Air and Span Gas as shown below j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 195 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Source of Sample and cal gas input to be a fraction SAMPLE GAS Reese Calibrated Removed during of a PSI above atm CO Gas calibration at span gas concentration MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator EXHAUST GFC 7001T Figure 9 1 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Bottled Span Gas Source of SAMPLE GAS Sample and cal gas input pressure to be a fraction Calib
323. ore they affect the functionality of the analyzer The secondary use is for data analysis documentation and archival in electronic format To support the DAS functionality TAI offers APICOM a program that provides a visual interface for remote or local setup configuration and data retrieval of the DAS The APICOM manual which is included with the program contains a more detailed description of the DAS structure and configuration which is briefly described in this manual The GFC7001T GFC7001 TM is configured with a basic DAS configuration which is enabled by default New data channels are also enabled by default at their creation but all channels may be turned off for later or occasional use The green SAMPLE LED on the instrument front panel which indicates the analyzer status also indicates certain aspects of the DAS status Table 7 1 Front Panel LED Status Indicators for DAS LED STATE DAS STATUS Blinking System is in calibration mode Data logging can be enabled or disabled for this mode Calibration data are typically stored at the end of calibration periods concentration data are typically not sampled diagnostic data should be collected Instrument is in hold off mode a short period after the system exits calibrations DAS channels can be enabled or disabled for this period Concentration data are typically disabled whereas diagnostic should be collected Sampling normally 9i Teledyne Analytical Instrumen
324. ote All vents on the b Son 4 calibrator outlet must atspangas Model 700E gas be capped concentration Dilution Adjust to 30 Calibrator psig SAMPLE GFC 7001T EXHAUST VENT SPAN PRESSURE SPAN ZERO AIR MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator Figure 9 3 Pneumatic Connections Option 50A Ambient Zero Ambient Span Calibration Valves j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 201 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Sample and cal gas input Source of SAMPLE GAS pressure to be a fraction of a PSI above atm Removed during calibration SAMPLE Calibrated CO Gas EXHAUST at span gas concentration VENT SPAN GFC 7001T MODEL 701 Zero Gas ZEROAIR Generator PRESSURESPAN Figure 9 4 Pneumatic Connections Option 50B Ambient Zero Pressurized Span Calibration Valves Sample and cal gas input Source of pressure to be a fraction SAMPLE GAS of a PSI above atm Removed during cdibration Note All vents on the calibrator outlet must be capped Calibrated CO Gas Model 700 gas at span gas Dilution concentration Calibrator GFC 7001T Figure 9 5 Pneumatic Connections Option 50H Zero Span Calibration Valves ji Teledyne Analytical Instruments 202 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Sample and cal gas input Source of pressure to be a fraction SAMPLE GAS of a PSI above atm Removed during calibration Calibrated
325. ote The menu charts in this manual contain condensed representations of the analyzer s display during the various operations being described These menu charts are not intended to be exact visual representations of the 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 38 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 3 2 2 REAR PANEL cooling fan 4 option MODEL T100 SIN 1 070110000 YEAR 2010 PWR 100 120 V 60Hz 3 04 AC power label showing power specifications connector Figure 3 4 Rear Panel Layout Table 3 3 provides a description of each component on the rear panel 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 39 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Table 3 3 Rear Panel Description Component Function cooling fan Pulls ambient air into chassis through side vents and exhausts through rear AC Connector for three prong cord to apply AC power to the analyzer power CAUTION The cord s power specifications specs MUST comply with the power connector specs on the analyzer s rear panel Model number label Model specs label Identifies the analyzer model number and provides voltage and frequency specs Connect a gas line from the source of sample gas here SAMPLE Calibration gases are also inlet here on units without zero span shutoff valve options installed EXHAUST Connect an exhaust gas line of not more than 10 meters
326. ots and the instrument software can establish control 13 4 6 C DATA BUS is a two wire clocked bi directional digital serial I O bus that 1s used widely in commercial and consumer electronic systems A transceiver on the motherboard converts data and control signals from the PC 104 bus to The data is then fed to the relay board optional analog input board and valve driver board circuitry j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 309 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 13 4 7 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER The analyzer operates on 100 VAC 115 VAC or 230 VAC power at either 50Hz or 60Hz Individual units are set up at the factory to accept any combination of these five attributes As illustrated in Figure 13 14 power enters the analyzer through a standard IEC 320 power receptacle located on the rear panel of the instrument From there it is routed through the ON OFF Switch located in the lower right corner of the Front Panel A 6 75 Amp circuit breaker is built into the ON OFF Switch The bench and GFC Wheel heaters as well as the GFC Wheel receive AC power via the relay board AC Line power is converted stepped down and converted to DC power by two DC power supplies One supplies 12 VDC for valves and the IR source while a second supply provides 5 VDC and 15 VDC for logic and analog circuitry All DC voltages are distributed via the relay board CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD S
327. outputs an analog signal corresponding to the concentration of CO in the sample gas This analog signal is transformed into two pre amplified DC voltages CO MEAS and CO REF by a synchronous demodulator printed circuit assembly CO MEAS and CO REF are converted into digital data by a unipolar analog to digital converter located on the motherboard A variety of sensors report the physical and operational status of the analyzer s major components again through the signal processing capabilities of the motherboard These status reports are used as data for the CO concentration calculation and as trigger events for certain control commands issued by the CPU This information is stored in memory by the CPU and in most cases can be viewed but the user via the front panel display The CPU issues commands via a series of relays and switches also over the bus located on a separate printed circuit assembly to control the function of key electromechanical devices such as heaters motors and valves The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in several ways e Through the analyzer s front panel LCD touch screen interface e RS 232 and RS 485 serial I O channels j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 297 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Power Up Circuit Box Temp fos Thermistor Interface SAMPLE TEMP BENCH TEMP WHEEL e TEMP SENSOR TEMP optional
328. p to 200 data points are stored for up to 4 years of data on weekly calibration checks and a lifetime history of monthly calibrations e Review these data to see if the zero and span responses change over time e These channels also store the STABIL value standard deviation of CO concentration to evaluate if the analyzer response has properly leveled off during the calibration procedure e Finally the CALDAT channel also stores the converter efficiency for review and documentation If your instrument has either an or CO sensor option installed these should be calibrated as well j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 214 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 6 CALIBRATION OF THE GFC7001T GFC7001TM ELECTRONIC SUBSYSTEMS 9 6 1 DARK CALIBRATION TEST The dark calibration test interrupts the signal path between the IR photo detector and the remainder of the sync demod board circuitry This allows the instrument to compensate for any voltage levels inherent in the sync demod circuitry that might effect the calculation of CO concentration Performing this calibration returns two offset voltages one for CO MEAS and one for CO REF that are automatically added to the CPU s calculation routine The two offset voltages from the last calibration procedure may be reviewed by the user via the front panel display See also Section 5 9 5 To activate the dark calibration procedure or review th
329. pable of measuring flows in the 0 1000 cm min range to measure the gas flow rate though the analyzer DO NOT use the built in flow measurement viewable from the Front Panel of the instrument This measurement is only for detecting major flow interruptions such as clogged or plugged gas lines See Figure 3 4 for SAMPLE port location Attach the Flow Meter to the sample inlet port on the rear panel Ensure that the inlet to the Flow Meter is at atmospheric pressure 2 Sample flow should be 800 cm min 10 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 247 MaintenanceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 3 Once an accurate measurement has been recorded by the method described above adjust the analyzer s internal flow sensors See Section 9 6 3 Low flows indicate blockage somewhere in the pneumatic pathway typically a plugged sintered filter or critical flow orifice in one of the analyzer s flow control assemblies High flows indicate leaks downstream of the Flow Control Assembly 11 3 4 CLEANING THE OPTICAL BENCH The GFC7001T GFC7001TM sensor assembly and optical bench are complex and delicate Disassembly and cleaning is not recommended Please check with the factory before disassembling the optical bench 11 3 5 CLEANING EXTERIOR SURFACES OF THE GFC7001T GFC7001TM If necessary the exterior surfaces of the GFC7001T GFC7001TM can be cleaned with a clean damp cloth Do NOT submerge any part of the instr
330. parts 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments Model GFC7001T Carbon Monoxide Analyzer This page intentionally left blank 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments vi Safety Information Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Important safety messages are provided throughout this manual Please read these messages carefully A safety message alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others Each safety message is associated with a safety alert symbol These symbols are found in the manual and inside the instrument The definition of these symbols is described below WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard HAZARD Strong oxidizer GENERAL WARNING CAUTION Read the accompanying message for specific information CAUTION Hot Surface Warning Technician Symbol All operations marked with this symbol are to be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only DO NOT TOUCH Touching some parts of the instrument without protection or proper tools could result in damage to the part s and or the instrument Electrical Ground This symbol inside the instrument marks the central safety grounding point for the instrument OF PEEPS CAUTION General Safety Hazard This instrument should only be used for the purpose and in the manner described in this manual If you use this instrument in a manner other than that for which it was intended unpredictable behavior could ensue
331. ping as the packing materials vibrate and rub against each other To prevent these static charges from damaging the components or assemblies being shipped make sure that you Always unpack shipments from TAI Customer Service by l 2 3 Opening the outer shipping box away from the anti ESD work area Carry the still sealed anti ESD bag tube or bin to the anti ESD work area Follow steps 6 and 7 of Section 14 4 2 3 above when opening the anti ESD container at the work station Reserve the anti ESD container or bag to use when packing electronic components or assemblies to be returned to TAI j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 321 Teledyne Technical Manual Model T300 Family CO Analyzers ESD 14 4 2 5 PACKING COMPONENTS FOR RETURN TO TELEDYNE CUSTOMER SERVICE Always pack electronic components and assemblies to be sent to Teledyne Customer Service in anti ESD bins tubes or bags CAUTION ESD Hazard e DO NOT use pink poly bags e NEVER allow any standard plastic packaging materials to touch the electronic component assembly directly e This includes but is not limited to plastic bubble pack Styrofoam peanuts open cell foam closed cell foam and adhesive tape e DO NOT use standard adhesive tape as a sealer Use ONLY anti ESD tape Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti ESD bag or bin 1 Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate
332. ple pressure over time to predict when maintenance will be required The last 360 daily averages about 1 year are stored CALDAT Logs new slope and offset of CO measurements every time a zero or span calibration is performed and the result changes the value of the slope triggering event SLPCHG The CO stability data to evaluate if the calibration value was stable are also stored This data channel will store data from the last 200 calibrations and can be used to document analyzer calibration and is useful in the detection of the in slope and offset instrument response when performing predictive diagnostics as part of a regular maintenance schedule The CALDAT channel collects data based on events e g a calibration operation rather than a timed interval and therefore does not represent any specific length of time As with all data channels a date and time stamp is recorded for every logged data point j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 165 DAC and APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer These default Data Channels can be used as they are or they can be customized from the front panel to fit a specific application They can also be deleted to make room for custom user programmed Data Channels Appendix A 5 lists the firmware specific DAS configuration in plain text format This text file can either be loaded into APICOM and then modified and uploaded to the instrument or can be copied and pasted into a ter
333. point using internally generated zero air e The CALS button is used to calibrate the span point of the analyzer s current reporting range using span gas For more information concerning calibration valve options see Table 1 1 For information on using the automatic calibration feature ACAL in conjunction with the one of the calibration valve options see Section 9 4 IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA It is recommended that this span calibration be performed at 80 90 of full scale of the analyzer s currently selected reporting range EXAMPLES If the reporting range is set for 0 to 50 ppm an appropriate span point would be 40 45 ppm If the of the reporting range is set for 0 to 1000 ppb an appropriate span point would be 800 900 ppb j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 90 OverviewTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO AnalyzerTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 4 3 SETUP MODE The SETUP mode contains a variety of choices that are used to configure the analyzer s hardware and software features perform diagnostic procedures gather information on the instrument s performance and configure or access data from the internal data acquisition system DAS For a visual representation of the software menu trees refer to Appendix A Setup Mode is divided between Primary and Secondary Setup menus and can be protected through password security 4 3 1 PASSWORD SECURITY Setup Mode can be protected by password sec
334. position as described in Section 6 1 Check to make sure the set up command is correct See Section 8 3 4 Verify that the Ready to Send RTS signal is at logic high The GFC7001T GFC7001TM sets pin 7 RTS to greater than 3 volts to enable modem transmission 5 Make sure the BAUD rate word length and stop bit settings between modem and analyzer match See Section 8 3 6 Use the RS 232 test function to send w characters to the modem terminal or computer See Section 8 3 7 Get your terminal modem or computer to transmit data to the analyzer holding down the space bar is one way the green LED should flicker as the instrument is receiving data 8 Make sure that the communications software or terminal emulation software is functioning properly Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual RS 232 Programming Notes TAI P N 013500000 12 5 11 THE OPTIONAL CO SENSOR There are Two LEDs located on the sensor PCA LED V8 LED V9 Serial O Red Green Not Used AT z To CO2 Probe Q v cr 3 e i N 46 3 C SES OVDC 5VDC X A oc Analog 4 N ouput O Figure 12 13 Location of Diagnostic LEDs onCO Sensor PCA e Normal Operation V8 is not lit V9 is Blinking e Error State Both LEDs are blinking Check to make sure that the cable to the CO probe is properly connected j Teledyne Analytical Instr
335. pressure as the sample gas and with the same flow rate 800 cm min EXHAUST OUTLET Attach an exhaust line to the analyzer s EXHAUST outlet fitting The exhaust line should be e PTEF tubing minimum 1 4 e A maximum of 10 meters long e Vented outside the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer s enclosure 3 3 2 2 PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR BASIC CONFIGURATION E INSTRUMENT CHASSIS INLET Particulate Filter GFC Wheel Housing SAMPLE CHAMBER SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR EXHAUST GAS OUTLET I Sample Gas i l T Flow Control Figure 3 20 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Internal Gas Flow j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 62 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 3 3 2 3 PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS FOR ZERO SPAN VALVE OPTION Calibrated COGas atspan gas concentration Adjust to 30 psig MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator This valve option is intended for applications where e Zero air is supplied by a zero air generator like the TAI s T701 and e Span gas is supplied by Gas Dilution Calibrator like the TAI s T700 Internal zero span and sample cal valves control the flow of gas through the instrument but because the generator and calibrator limit the flow of zero air and span gas no shutoff valves are required See Figure 3 4 for the location of gas inlets Sample and cal gas input pressure to be a fraction Source of of a PSI above atm SAMPLE GAS Removed du
336. r 5 SETUP MENU The SETUP menu is sued to set instrument parameters for performing configuration calibration reporting and diagnostics operations according to user needs 5 1 SETUP gt CFG CONFIGURATION INFORMATION Pressing the CFG button displays the instrument s configuration information This display lists the analyzer model serial number firmware revision software library revision CPU type and other information e Special instrument or software features or installed options may also be listed here e Use this information to identify the software and hardware installed in your GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer when contacting customer service To access the configuration table press SAMPLE RANGE 50 00 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS PASS CLK MORE Press NEXT or PREV to move back and forth through the following list of Configuration information SETUP T300 CO Analyzer Press EXIT at MODEL TYPE AND NUMBER i PART NUMBER PREV NEXT eran tothe SERIAL NUMBER SETUP menu SOFTWARE REVISION LIBRARY REVISION iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION CPU TYPE amp OS REVISION DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION SAVED iY 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 2 SETUP gt ACAL AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION Instruments with one of the internal valve options installed can be set to automatically run cali
337. r Circuit Gain CO MEAS 284 12 6 3 1 Checking the Sync Demodulator Circuit Gain eese ene 284 12 6 3 2 Adjusting the Sync Demodulator Circuit Gain eee 285 12 6 4 Disk On Module 286 12 7 Frequently Asked t a aaao ee aaee Naaa nnn sn 287 12 8 Technical Assistante is ieee ea Rien ed s alas A 288 13 THEORY OF OPERATION 3 cesa ctccsseschvsaecsccscsansaiviavoncteccavscaesisvedcutanctateagavversceewscen 289 13 1 Measurement Method eere iter tert ote de rte et Ene e hne ge Fa re ee La gu de Pu a ads 289 19 d T BOCR SIE AW 5 tte a SUPPE PEDEM tI Ld ate 289 13 2 Measurement Fundamentals itecto iste der tee 290 13241 Gas Filter GorrelatiOn a delia titre 291 13 2 1 1 The GFO WhLieel ect ee ies e exi ete e qc tet quin a 291 13 2 1 2 The Measure Reference et UD dened Eten eiue thus 292 13 2 1 3 Summary Interference Rejection mener enne 294 13 9 Elow Rate itp th dn EHE IM 295 13 3 1 1 Critical Flow OFIfIGe rore ettet der t e RR ere e m D re 295 1
338. r o pater vide urs sn focos 275 12 5 7 6 Pressure Flow Sensor Assembly ssssssssssesese nee enemies 275 12 5 8 Motherboard RR OE PO EC HER FOL HUNE e ge a a annette decade 276 12 5 8 1 A D EUnCtlonis uscite rotto eti tet e erdt E ER Ov 276 12 5 8 2 Test Channel Analog Outputs Voltage seems 276 12 5 8 3 Analog Outputs Current Loop ssssssssssssssssese eene eene 278 12 5 8 4 Status Outputs 2 HB DIA DO 278 12 5 8 5 Control Inputs Remote Zero 279 12 5 9 hint nU IRI ON Ded dre NNNM 279 12 5 10 RS 232 nennen nen e nnne nnne nennen nnne nennen 279 12 5 10 1 General RS 232 Troubleshooting ene mnes 279 12 5 10 2 Troubleshooting Analyzer Modem or Terminal Operation 280 12 5 11 The Optional GOs Sensor sene deeem tete ttr dier cR ina ehe ta Pese sie ed desino aeu daas 280 12 6 Repair Procedures atn eeu eet ace ec eee ee le eR einen ud 281 12 6 1 Repairing Sample Flow Control Assembly 281 12 6 2 Removing Replacing the GFC Wheel ssssssssessssseeeee nenne nennen nnnm enne 282 12 6 3 Checking and Adjusting the Sync Demodulato
339. rameters For example the display line 0 CONC ATIMER 1 800 Translates to the following configuration Channel No 0 NAME CONC TRIGGER EVENT ATIMER PARAMETERS One parameter is included in this channel EVENT This channel is set up to store 800 records j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 169 DAC and APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 7 1 4 1 EDITING DAS DATA CHANNEL NAMES To edit the name of a DAS data channel follow the instruction shown in Section 7 1 4 1 then press Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 1 800 NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X NAME CONC SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X NAME CONC C C ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new E setting ENTR accepts the new setting J Press each button repeatedly to cycle through the available character set 0 9 A Z space amp _ lt gt j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 170 DAC and APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 7 1 5 EDITING DAS TRIGGERING EVENTS Triggering events define when and how the DAS records a measurement of any given data channel Triggering events are firmware specific and are listed in Appendix A 5 The most commonly used triggering events are ATIMER Sampling at regular intervals specified by an automatic timer Most trending information is usually stored at such regular intervals which can be i
340. rate are monitored as a test function to assist the user in predicting and troubleshooting failures 13 4 5 3 THERMISTOR INTERFACE This circuit provides excitation termination and signal selection for several negative coefficient thermistor temperature sensors located inside the analyzer They are as follows SAMPLE TEMPERATURE SENSOR The source of this signal is a thermistor located inside the sample chamber of the Optical Bench It measures the temperature of the sample gas in the chamber This data is used to during the calculation of the CO concentration value BENCH TEMPERATURE SENSOR This thermistor is attached to the sample chamber housing It reports the current temperature of the chamber housing to the CPU as part of the bench heater control loop WHEEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR This thermistor is attached to the heatsink on the GFC Wheel motor assembly It reports the current temperature of the wheel motor assembly to the CPU as part of the Wheel Heater control loop j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 308 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Box TEMPERATURE SENSOR A thermistor is attached to the motherboard It measures the analyzer s internal temperature This information is stored by the CPU and can be viewed by the user for troubleshooting purposes via the front panel display see Section 12 1 2 13 4 5 4 ANALOG OUTPUTS The analyzer comes equipped with four analog outputs Al A
341. rated Removed during of a PSI above atm CO Gas Model 700 Gas calbration at span gas Dilution Calibrator I MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator GFC 7001T Figure 9 2 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Gas Dilution Calibrator j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 196 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 2 2 PERFORMING A BASIC MANUAL CALIBRATION CHECK Analyzer display continues to cycle through all of the available gas measurements throughout this procedure Wait until STABIL falls below 0 2 PPM for T300 or 1 0 PPM for T300M This may take several minutes SAMPLE RANGE 50 0PPM CO XX XX Set the Display to show the STABIL test function This function calculates the stability of the CO measurement lt TST TST gt CAL MSG SETUP Toggle TST gt button until SAMPLE STABIL XXXX PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer Wait until STABIL falls below or 0 2 PPM for T300 or 1 0 PPM for T300M This may take several Record CO zero point readings minutes Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer The ZERO and or SPAN keys will appear at various points of this process It is not necessary to press them Record CO span point readings j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 197
342. re is no apparent external shipping damage If damage has occurred please advise the shipper first then TAI Included with your analyzer is a printed record Final Test and Validation Data Sheet PN 04307 PN 04311 of the final performance characterization performed on your instrument at the factory This record is an important quality assurance and calibration record for this instrument It should be placed in the quality records file for this instrument With no power to the unit craefully remove the top cover of the analyzer and check for internal shipping damage by carrying out the following steps 1 Carefully remove the top cover of the analyzer and check for internal shipping damage by e Removing the setscrew located in the top center of the Front panel e Removing the two flat head Phillips screws on the sides of the instrument one per side towards the rear e Sliding the cover backwards until it clears the analyzer s front bezel and e Lifting the cover straight up 2 Inspect the interior of the instrument to make sure all circuit boards and other components are in good shape and properly seated 3 Check the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and pneumatic hoses to make sure they are firmly and properly seated 4 Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed These are listed on the paperwork accompanying the analyzer WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Nev
343. rement Fundamentals Upon exiting the sample cell the beam shines through a band pass filter that allows only light at a wavelength of 4 7 um to pass Finally the beam strikes a solid state photo detector that converts the light signal into a modulated voltage signal representing the attenuated intensity of the beam 13 2 1 GAS FILTER CORRELATION Unfortunately water vapor absorbs light at 4 7 um too To overcome the interfering effects of water vapor the GFC7001T GFC7001TM adds another component to the IR light path called a Gas Filter Correlation GFC Wheel Measurement Cell Pure Reference Cell N with CO Figure 13 2 GFC Wheel 13 2 1 1 THE GFC WHEEL A GFC Wheel is a metallic wheel into which two chambers are carved The chambers are sealed on both sides with material transparent to 4 7 um IR radiation creating two airtight cavities Each cavity is mainly filled with composed gases One cell is filled with pure the measurement cell The other is filled with a combination of and a high concentration of CO the reference cell j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 291 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer IR unaffected by in Measurement Cell 1 IR is affected by CO in Reference Cell a 42 GFC Wheel Photo Detector Figure 13 3 Measurement Fundamentals with GFC Wheel As the GFC Wheel spins the IR light alternately passes through the tw
344. ress CALZ and CALS If the flow increases then suspect a bad sample cal valve 12 2 2 3 HIGH FLOW The most common cause of high flow is a leak in the sample flow control assembly If no leaks or loose connections are found in the fittings or the gas line at the orifice replace the critical flow orifice s inside the sample flow control assembly 12 2 2 4 DISPLAYED FLOW WARNINGS This warning means that there is inadequate gas flow There are four conditions that might cause this 1 A leak upstream or downstream of the flow sensor 2 A flow obstruction upstream or downstream of the flow sensor 3 Bad Flow Sensor Board To determine which case is causing the flow problem view the sample pressure and sample flow functions on the front panel If the sample pressure is reading abnormally low then the cause is likely a flow obstruction upstream of the flow sensor First check the sample filter and make sure it is not plugged and then systematically check all the other components upstream of the orifice to ensure that they are not obstructed If the sample pressure is reading normal but the sample flow is reading low then it is likely that there is an obstruction downstream of the flow sensor 12 2 2 5 ACTUAL FLOW DOES NOT MATCH DISPLAYED FLOW If the actual flow measured does not match the displayed flow but 1s within the limits of 720 880 cm min adjust the calibration of the flow measurement as described in Section 11 3 3
345. revious display If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being used toggle these buttons to set the correct ENTR accepts the new concentration of the CO setting and returns to calibration gas the CONCENTRATION MENU IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA For this Initial Calibration it is important to independently verify the PRECISE CO Concentration Value of the SPAN gas If the source of the Span Gas is from a Calibrated Bottle use the exact concentration value printed on the bottle 9 3 3 2 ZERO SPAN POINT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE The zero and cal operations are initiated directly and independently with dedicated buttons CALZ amp CALS j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 206 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE 50 0PPM CO XX XX Set the Display to show the STABIL test function This function calculates the stability of the NO CO measurement lt TST TST gt CAL CALZ CALS SETUP Toggle TST gt button until SAMPLE STABIL XXXX PPM CO XXXX Front panel display simultaneously shows CO NO and NO measurements throughout this procedure lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer This may take several SAMPLE STABIL XXXX PPM CO XXXX minutes Wait until STABIL falls below 0 2 PPM for T300 or 1 0 PPM for T300M lt TST TST gt CAL CALZ SETUP ES ee
346. ring calibration calibrator outlet must Note All vents on the be capped Model 700E gas Dilution Calibrator SAMPLE GFC 7001T EXHAUST VENT SPAN PRESSURE SPAN ZERO AIR Figure 3 21 Pneumatic Connections Option 50A Zero Span Calibration Valves SAMPLE GAS SOURCE Attach a sample inlet line to the sample inlet port The SAMPLE input line should not be more than 2 meters long e Maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should not exceed 1 5 in hg above ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure e Flow rate should meet the demand of the instrument 800 cm min CALIBRATION GAS SOURCES SPAN GAS e Attach a gas line from the source of calibration gas e g a Teledyne s T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator to the SPAN inlet ZERO AIR e Zero air is supplied via a zero air generator such as a Teledyne s T701 e An adjustable valve is installed in the zero air supply line to regulate the gas flow j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 63 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer INLET PRESSURE RATING CONSIDERATION This instrument has no significant internal restriction other than the flow control device and pressure sensor shown in Figure 3 20 Sample must be introduced to the inlet fitting at a fraction of a PSI above ambient pressure just enough to drive the flow to the proper value range Depending on the ultimate sample or cali
347. ro Calibration Status and is energized in zero calibration mode TEST OPTIONS The following optional tests with data reports must be requested at the time of order 10 Point Linearity Test For enhanced accuracy a 10 point linearity test is performed at the factory during the setup and testing phase for this analyzer Data results are included 4 Temperature Compensation Test Thermal testing is performed at the factory to accurately determine the temperature coefficient to be used in specific applications Data results are included PROFIBUS MOUNTING OPTION RS232 to Profibus Circuit Board Special RS232 to Profibus PCB card for Profibus communication using the existing RS232 port BACKGROUND GAs NOTES 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments iv Model GFC7001T Carbon Monoxide Analyzer ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual describes operation specifications and maintenance for the Model GFC 7001T In addition this manual contains important SAFETY messages for this instrument It is strongly recommended that you read that operation manual in its entirety before operating the instrument ORGANIZATION CONVENTIONS USED ATTENTION IMPORTANT Note This manual is divided among three main parts and a collection of appendices at the end Part I contains introductory information that includes an overview of the analyzer descriptions of the available options specifications installation and connection instructions
348. rogram offered by Teledyne API to its customers ASSY Assembly CAS Code Activated Switch CD Corona Discharge a frequently luminous discharge at the surface of a conductor or between two conductors of the same transmission line accompanied by ionization of the surrounding atmosphere and often by a power loss CE Converter Efficiency the percentage of light energy that is actually converted into electricity CEM Continuous Emission Monitoring Chemical formulas that may be included in this document CO carbon dioxide C5Hg propane CH4 methane H O water vapor HC general abbreviation for hydrocarbon HNO nitric acid H5S hydrogen sulfide NO nitric oxide NO nitrogen dioxide NOx nitrogen oxides here defined as the sum of NO and NO nitrogen oxides often called odd nitrogen the sum of NOy plus other NO compounds such as HNO definitions vary widely and may include nitrate NO PAN N5O and other compounds as well NH ammonia molecular oxygen O5 ozone SO sulfur dioxide 4i Teledyne Analytical Instruments 323 Teledyne Technical Manual Model T300 Family CO Analyzers ESD metric abbreviation for cubic centimeter replaces the obsolete abbreviation CPU Central Processing Unit DAC Digital to Analog Converter DAS Data Acquisition System DCE Data Communication Equipment DFU Dry Filter Unit DHCP Dynamic Host Conf
349. s setting the DCE DTE switch on the rear panel Section 6 1 provides DCE DTE information j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 110 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 8 SETUP VARS VARIABLES SETUP AND DEFINITION The GFC7001T GFC7001TM has several user adjustable software variables which define certain operational parameters Usually these variables are automatically set by the instrument s firmware but can be manually redefined using the VARS menu The following table lists all variables that are available within the 818 password protected level See Appendix A 2 for a detailed listing of all of the GFC7001T GFC7001TM variables that are accessible through the remote interface Table 5 3 Variable Names VARS VARS VARIABLE DESCRIPTION ALLOWED DEFAULT VALUES Changes the Internal Data Acquisition System DAS HOLDOFF timer Section 7 1 11 ded cM DAS HOLD OFF No data is stored in the DAS channels during situations between when the software considers the data to be questionable 0 5 20 min such as during warm up of just after the instrument returns from one of its calibration mode to SAMPLE Mode Allows the user to set the number of significant digits to the AUTO 1 2 CONC PRECISION right of the decimal point display of concentration and stability Ma e values 3 4 Dynamic zero automatically adjusts offset and slope of the DYN ZERO CO response when performing a zero point calibration during ON O
350. s without running the entire calibration routine IS NOT sufficient This will also counteract any discrepancies between STP definitions j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 103 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 5 4 5 DILUTION RATIO OPTION This feature is a optional software utility that allows the user to compensate for any dilution of the sample gas that may occur before it enters the sample inlet Typically this occurs in continuous emission monitoring CEM applications where the sampling method used to remove the gas from the stack dilutes it Using the dilution ratio option is a 4 step process 1 Select the appropriate units of measure see Section 5 4 4 2 Select the reporting range mode and set the reporting range upper limit see Section 5 4 3 e Ensure that the upper span limit entered for the reporting range is the maximum expected concentration of the UNDILUTED gas 3 Set the dilution factor as a gain e g a value of 20 means 20 parts diluent and 1 part of sample gas SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP RANGE CONTROL MENU MODE SET UNIT DIL SETUP X X CO DIL FACTOR 1 0 Gain 0 0 0 0 1 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to select dilution ratio gain factor for CO gas SETUP X X O2DIL FACTOR 1 0 Gain Default 1 e g 1 1 p gt EXIT discards the new 0 0 0 0 1 0
351. sentations of these connections and do not reflect actual physical locations of equipment and fitting location or orientation Contact your regional EPA or other appropriate governing agency for more detailed recommendations 9 1 CALIBRATION PREPARATIONS The calibration procedures in this section assume that the range mode analog range and units of measure have already been selected for the analyzer If this has not been done please do so before continuing see Section 5 7 for instructions 9 1 1 REQUIRED EQUIPMENT SUPPLIES AND EXPENDABLES Calibration of the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer requires specific equipment and supplies These include but are not limited to the following e Zero air source e Span gas source e Gas lines All Gas lines should be PTFE Teflon FEP glass stainless steel or brass e A recording device such as a strip chart recorder and or data logger optional For electronic documentation the internal data acquisition system DAS can be used e Traceability Standards 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 1 1 1 ZERO AIR Zero air or zero calibration gas is defined as a gas that is similar in chemical composition to the measured medium but without the gas to be measured by the analyzer For the GFC7001T GFC7001TM zero air should contain less than 25 ppb of CO and other major interfering gases such as CO and Water
352. sh drive with a storage capacity up to 128 MB It is used to store the computer s operating system the TAI firmware and most of the operational data generated by the analyzer s internal data acquisition system DAS 13 4 1 2 FLASH CHIP This non volatile embedded flash chip includes 2MB of storage for calibration data as well as a backup of the analyzer configuration Storing these key data on a less heavily accessed chip significantly decreases the chance of data corruption i Teledyne Analytical Instruments 299 Theory of Operation Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer In the unlikely event that the flash chip should fail the analyzer will continue to operate with just the DOM However all configuration information will be lost requiring that the unit be recalibrated 13 4 2 OPTICAL BENCH amp GFC WHEEL Electronically in the case of the optical bench for the GFC7001T Analyzer GFC Wheel and associated components do more than simply measure the amount of CO present in the sample chamber A variety of other critical functions are performed here as well 13 4 2 1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL Because the temperature of a gas affects its density resulting in the amount of light absorbed by that gas it is important to reduce the effect of fluctuations in ambient temperature on the GFC7001T s measurement of CO for the GFC7001T Analyzer To accomplish this both the temperature of the sample chamber and the GFC Wheel are mainta
353. sor output press SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ALRM SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X 0 DAS_HOLD_OFF 15 0 Minutes lt PREV NEXT gt JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT Press EXIT 3 Continue pressing NEXT until times to return to SAMPLE SETUP 2 STABIL GAS CO menu PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT CO and SETUP X X STABIL GAS CO options only appear if cO CO2 C2 ENTR EXIT associated sensors are installed 7 SETUP X X STABIL GAS CO2 CO2 02 ENTR EXIT Note Use the same procedure to reset the STB test function to co when the CO2 calibration procedure is complete j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 224 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 9 7 2 4 CO2 ZERO SPAN CALIBRATION To perform the zero span calibration procedure SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 PPM CO XX XX Set the Display to show lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP the CO2 STB test function This function calculates the stability of the CO Toggle TST gt button until measurement SAMPLE CO2 STB X XX lt TST TST gt CAL Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer SAMPLE CO2 STB X XX Wait until CO2 STB falls below 0 01 This may take several minutes lt TST TST gt CAL GAS TO CAL CO2 Press CO2 ENTR
354. stem Adequate ink amp paper Legible ink traces Correct chart speed and range Correct time Replenish ink and paper supply Weekly visual inspection Adjust time to agree with clock note on chart Recorder TEST measurements at nominal values Weekly visual inspection Adjust or repair as needed 2 GFC7001T in Sample Mode Zero and span within tolerance Level 1 zero span every 2 Analyzer operational limits as described in weeks Level 2 between Level check Subsection 9 1 3 of Sec 2 0 9 1 checks at frequency desired Handbook Vol II analyzer by user Analyzer operational settings Find source of error and repair After corrective action re calibrate analyzer Assess precision as described Precision check in Sec 2 0 8 and Subsection 3 4 3 Ibid Every 2 weeks Subsection 3 4 3 Ibid Calc report precision Sec 2 0 8 Ibid 10 1 5 LEVEL 1 CALIBRATIONS VERSUS LEVEL 2 CHECKS Essential to quality assurance are scheduled checks for verifying the operational status of the monitoring system The operator should visit the site at least once each week It is recommended Level 1 zero and span check conducted on the analyzer every two j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 229 EPA Calibration Protocol Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer weeks Level 2 zero and span checks should be conducted at a frequency desired by the user Definitions of these terms are given in Table 10 3 To provi
355. sured concentration value is too high ZERO amp talg Concentration offset value to high CONFIG Configuration and Calibration data Failed disk on module INITIALIZED reset to original Factory state User erased data DATA INITIALIZED Data Storage in DAS was erased Failed disk on module User cleared data PHOTO TEMP WARNING PHT DRIVE is gt 4800 mVDC Failed IR photo detector Failed sync demod board IR photo detector improperly attached to the sample chamber Bench temp too high REAR BOARD NOT Motherboard not detected on power Warning only appears on serial I O com port s up Front panel display will be frozen blank or will not respond DET 3 Massive failure of motherboard 2 RELAY BOARD The CPU cannot communicate with 9 pus WARN the Relay Board d Loose connectors wiring SAMPLE FLOW WARN Sample flow rate is 500 cm min or gt 1000 cm min Blocked sample inlet gas line Dirty particulate filter Leak downstream of critical flow orifice Failed flow sensor circuitry j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 252 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer WARNING MESSAGE FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES SAMPLE PRES WARN Sample Pressure is lt 10 in Hg or gt 35 in Hg Normally 29 92 in Hg at sea level decreasing at 1 in Hg per 1000 ft of altitude If samp
356. t introduces you to the instrument then presents the procedures for getting started 1 unpacking and inspection making electrical and pneumatic connections and conducting an initial calibration check 3 1 UNPACKING THE GFC7001T GFC7001TM ANALYZER CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD To avoid personal injury always use two persons to lift and carry the GFC7001T GFC7001TM ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY Printed Circuit Assemblies PCAs are sensitive to electro static discharges too small to be felt by the human nervous system Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty See A Primer on Electro Static Discharge in this manual for more information on preventing ESD damage CAUTION Do not operate this instrument until you ve removed dust plugs from SAMPLE and EXHAUST ports on the rear panel Note TAI recommends that you store shipping containers materials for future use if when the instrument should be returned to the factory for repair and or calibration service Contact TAI for warranty repairs This analyzer is shipped with all the materials you need to install and prepare the system for operation Carefully unpack the analyzer and inspect it for damage Immediately report any damage to the shipping agent j Teledyne Analytical Instruments Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Verify that the
357. t the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION submenu see Figure 5 3 then press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET gt CAL DISPLAYED AS CONC_OUT_1 CONC_OUT_2 CONC OUT 3 TEST OUTPUT CHANNEL Continue pressing SET until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 5V CONC2 NOCAL SET SET EDIT EXIT CONC OUT 3 is only active on analyzers with the optional or O2 sensor installed DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 RANGE CURR SET EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET until DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CALIBRATED NO SET SET CAL EXIT Analyzer automatically DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC OUT 2 calibrates the DCV signal output from the analog output channel to the VDC to mA converter L DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CURR Z 0 mV U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTREXIT These buttons increase decrease the analog output signal level not the value on the These menus display adjust the mAmp by 100 10 or 1 counts DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CURR S 5000 mV signal output Continue adjustments until the current signal measured at the output of the analyzer matches the zero and span points of the intended current range e g OmA 20 mA 4 mA 20 mA DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CALIBRATED YES U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTREXIT SET SET CAL EXIT j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 128 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T
358. t the motor is bolted to 12 5 7 5 IR SOURCE The IR source can be checked using the following procedure 1 Disconnect the source and check its resistance when cold e When new the source should have a cold resistance of more than 1 5 Ohms but less than 3 5 Ohms e f not then the source is bad 2 With the source disconnected energize the analyzer and wait for it to start operating e Measure the drive Voltage between pins 1 and 2 on the jack that the source is normally connected to it should be 11 5 0 25 VDC e fnot then the problem is with the wiring the relay board or the 12V power supply 3 Ifthe drive voltage is correct in step 2 then remove the source from the heat sink assembly 2 screws on top and connect to its mating connector e Observe the light being emitted from the source e It should be centered at the bottom of the U shaped element e If there is either no emission or a badly centered emission then the source is bad 12 5 7 6 PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY The pressure flow sensor PCA located on the top of the absorption bench can be checked with a voltmeter using the following procedure which assumes that the wiring is intact and that the motherboard and the power supplies are operating properly 1 For pressure related problems e Measure the voltage across it should be 5 0 25 VDC If not then the board is bad e Measure the voltage across TP4 and e It should be 45
359. the instrument rack hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point e If you are at an anti ESD workbench lay the container down on the conductive work surface e In either case wait several seconds Place the item in the container Seal the container If using a bag fold the end over and fastening it with anti ESD tape e Folding the open end over isolates the component s inside from the effects of static fields e Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the device Once you have arrived at your destination allow any surface charges that may have built up on the bag or bin during travel to dissipate e Connect your wrist strap to ground e If you are at the instrument rack hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point e If you are at a anti ESD workbench lay the container down on the conductive work surface e neither case wait several seconds Open the container 14 4 2 4 OPENING SHIPMENTS FROM TELEDYNE CUSTOMER SERVICE Packing materials such as bubble pack and Styrofoam pellets are extremely efficient generators of static electric charges To prevent damage from ESD Teledyne ships all electronic components and assemblies in properly sealed anti ESD containers Static charges will build up on the outer surface of the anti ESD container during ship
360. the three 3 screws holding the GFC Wheel motor heat sink assembly to the GFC Wheel housing 9 Carefully remove the GFC Wheel motor heat sink assembly from the GFC Wheel housing GFC WHEEL HOUSING Figure 12 17 Removing the GFC Wheel Housing j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 283 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 10 Remove the one 1 screw fastening the GFC Wheel mask assembly to the GFC motor hub Figure 12 18 Removing the GFC Wheel 11 Remove the GFC Wheel mask assembly 12 Follow the previous steps in reverse order to put the GFC Wheel motor assembly back together 12 6 3 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE SYNC DEMODULATOR CIRCUIT GAIN CO MEAS 12 6 3 1 CHECKING THE SYNC DEMODULATOR CIRCUIT GAIN The GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzers will operate accurately as long as the sync demodulator circuit gain is properly adjusted To determine if this gain factor is correct 1 Make sure that the analyzer is turned on and warmed up Set the analyzer display to show the STABIL or CO STB test function Apply Zero Air to Sample Inlet of the analyzer Wait until the stability reading falls below 1 0 ppm Change the analyzer display to show the CO MEAS e The value of CO MEAS must be gt 2800 mV lt 4800 mV for the instrument to operate correctly NE j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 284 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO A
361. three reference points and a zero point are recommended to define this relationship All monitoring instrument systems are subject to some drift and variation in internal parameters and cannot be expected to maintain accurate calibration over long periods of time Therefore it is necessary to dynamically check the calibration relationship on a predetermined schedule Zero and span checks must be used to document that the data remains within control limits These checks are also used in data reduction and validation Calibration can be done by either diluting high concentration CO standards with zero air or using individual tanks of known concentration Details of documentation forms and procedures should be maintained with each analyzer and also in a central backup file as described in Section 2 6 2 of the Quality Assurance Handbook j Teledyne Analytical Instruments EPA Calibration Protocol Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer The reliability and usefulness of all data derived from any analyzer depends primarily upon its state of calibration To ensure accurate measurements of the CO levels 1 analyzer must be calibrated at the time of installation and recalibrated as necessary 2 Inorder to insure that high quality accurate measurement information is obtained at all times the analyzer must be calibrated prior to use 3 Calibrations should be carried out at the field monitoring site 4 The analyzer shoul
362. tic calibration of all channels which is useful for clearing any analog calibration warnings associated with channels that will not be used or connected to any input or recording device e g datalogger Manual calibration should be used for the 0 1V range or in cases where the outputs must be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device Manual calibration requires the AUTOCAL feature to be disabled Automatic calibration can be performed via the CAL button located inside The AOUTS CALIBRATION submenu By default the analyzer is configured so that calibration of analog outputs can be initiated as a group with the AOUT CALIBRATION command The outputs can also be calibrated individually but this requires the AUTOCAL feature be disabled 5 9 3 3 ENABLING OR DISABLING THE AUTOCAL FOR AN INDIVIDUAL ANALOG OUTPUT To enable or disable the AutoCal feature for an individual analog output elect the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION submenu see Figure 5 3 then press 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 121 SetupTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer NOTE ANALOG OUTPUTS configured for 0 1V full scale should always be calibrated manually Toggle this button to turn AUTO CAL ON or OFF OFF manual calibration mode gt From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET gt CAL EXIT Continue pressing SET gt until you re
363. tion 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 43 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 3 3 1 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Note To maintain compliance with EMC standards it is required that the cable length be no greater than 3 meters for all I O connections which include Analog In Analog Out Status Out Control In Ethernet LAN USB RS 232 and RS 485 3 3 1 1 CONNECTING POWER Attach the power cord to the analyzer and plug it into a power outlet capable of carrying at least 10 A current at your AC voltage and that it is equipped with a functioning earth ground WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD High Voltages are present inside the analyzer s case Power connection must have functioning ground connection Do not defeat the ground wire on power plug Turn off analyzer power before disconnecting or connecting electrical subassemblies Do not operate with cover off CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD The GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer can be configured for both 100 130 V and 210 240 V at either 47 Hz or 63 Hz To avoid damage to your analyzer make sure that the AC power voltage matches the voltage indicated on the analyzer s model specs label See Figure 3 4 before plugging the GFC7001T GFC7001TM into line power 3 3 1 2 CONNECTING ANALOG INPUTS OPTION The Analog In connector is used for connecting external voltage signals from other instrumentation such as meteorological
364. to consider pneumatic components in the gas delivery system outside the GFC7001T GFC7001TM such as e A change in zero air source such as ambient air leaking into zero air line or e Achangein the span gas concentration due to zero air or ambient air leaking into the span gas line 2 Once the instrument passes a leak check perform a flow check see Section 11 3 3 to make sure adequate sample is being delivered to the sensor assembly 3 A failing IR photo detector may be at fault Check the CO MEAS and CO REF test functions via the front panel display to make sure the signal levels are in the normal range See Appendix A and are quiet 4 Confirm the sample pressure wheel temperature bench temperature and sample flow readings are correct and have steady readings 5 Disconnect the exhaust line from the optical bench near the rear of the instrument and plug this line into the SAMPLE inlet creating a pneumatic loop The CO concentration either zero or span now must be constant If readings become quiet the problem is in the external pneumatics supplies for sample gas span gas or zero air 6 If pressurized span gas is being used with a zero span valve option make sure that the venting 1s adequate 12 3 3 INABILITY TO SPAN NO SPAN BUTTON CALS 1 Confirm that the carbon monoxide span gas source is accurate this can be done by switching between two span gas tanks If the CO concentration is different there is a problem wit
365. ts DAC and APICONTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Note Note DAS operation is suspended whenever its configuration is edited using the analyzer s front panel and therefore data may be lost To prevent such data loss it is recommended to use the APICOM graphical user interface for DAS changes Sections Please be aware that all stored data will be erased if the analyzer s disk on module or CPU board is replaced or if the configuration data stored there is reset The DAS can be disabled only by disabling or deleting its individual data channels 7 1 DAS STRUCTURE The DAS is designed around the feature of a record A record is a single data point The type of data recorded in a record is defined by two properties PARAMETER type that defines the kind of data to be stored e g the average of gas concentrations measured with three digits of precision See Section 7 1 6 A TRIGGER event that defines when the record is made e g timer every time a calibration is performed etc See Section 7 1 5 The specific PARAMETERS and TRIGGER events that describe an individual record are defined in a construct called a DATA CHANNEL see Section 7 1 1 Each data channel is related one or more parameters with a specific trigger event and various other operational characteristics related to the records being made e g the channels name number or records to be made time period between records whether
366. ts are unaware that they are connected to a multidrop bus and never initiate Hessen protocol messages They only respond to commands from the host computer and only when they receive a command containing their own unique ID number The Hessen protocol is designed to accomplish two things to obtain the status of remote instruments including the concentrations of all the gases measured and to place remote instruments into zero or span calibration or measure mode TAI s implementation supports both of these principal features The Hessen protocol is not well defined therefore while TAI s application is completely compatible with the protocol itself it may be different from implementations by other companies The following sections describe the basics for setting up your instrument to operate over a Hessen Protocol network For more detailed information as well as a list of host computer commands and examples of command and response message syntax download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne web site http www teledyne api com manuals 6 7 2 1 HESSEN COMM PORT CONFIGURATION Hessen protocol requires the communication parameters of the GFC7001T GFC7001TM Analyzer s COMM ports to be set differently than the standard configuration as shown in Table 6 4 Table 6 4 RS 232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol PARAMETER STANDARD HESSEN Baud Rate 300 19200 1200 To change the baud rate of th
367. ual ranges and auto ranging supported Zero Noise Lower Detectable Limit Zero Drift 24 hours lt 0 02 CO2 lt 0 04 CO2 x 0 02 Zero Drift 7 days x 0 05 Span Noise t 0 1 Span Drift 7 days x 0 1 49i Teledyne Analytical Instruments 30 SpecificationsTeledyne Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Accuracy lt 0 02 2 of reading Linearity t 0 1 CO Temperature Coefficient t 0 01 CO2 PC Rise and Fall Time 60 seconds to 9596 1 As defined by the USEPA Defined as twice the zero noise level by the USEPA 2 2 EPA EQUIVALENCY DESIGNATION Note GFC7001TM EPA equivalency does not apply to this model TAIs Model GFC7001T Carbon Monoxide Analyzer is designated as Reference Method Number RFCA 1093 093 as defined in 40 CFR Part 53 when operated under the following conditions e Range Any range from 10 ppm to 50 ppm e Ambient temperature range of 10 to 40 C e Sample filter Equipped with 5 micron PTFE filter element in the internal filter assembly e Software settings Dilution factor 1 0 AutoCal ON or OFF Dynamic Zero ON or OFF Dynamic Span OFF Dual Range ON or OFF Auto Range ON or OFF Temp Pres Compensation ON Under the designation the analyzer may be operated with or without the following options e Rack mount with slides e Rack mount without slides ears o
368. ue goes back below the concentration set point Even though the relay on the rear panel is a NON Latching alarm amp resets when the concentration goes back below the alarm set point the warning on the front panel of the instrument will remain latched until it is cleared You can clear the warning on the front panel by either pushing the CLR button on the front panel or through the serial port In instruments that sample more than one gas type there could be more than one gas type triggering the Concentration 1 Alarm Alarm 2 Relay For example the GFC7001TM instrument can monitor both CO amp CO gas The software is flexible enough to allow you to configure the alarms so that you can have 2 alarm levels for each gas CO Alarm 1 20 PPM 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 51 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer CO Alarm 2 100 PPM CO Alarm 1 20 PPM CO Alarm 2 100 PPM In this example CO Alarm 1 amp CO Alarm 1 will both be associated with the Alarm 2 relay on the rear panel This allows you do have multiple alarm levels for individual gasses A more likely configuration for this would be to put one gas on the Alarm 1 relay amp the other gas on the Alarm 2 relay CO Alarm 1 20 PPM CO Alarm 2 Disabled CO Alarm 1 Disabled CO Alarm 2 100 PPM ALARM 4 RELAY This relay is connected to the range bit If the instrument is configured for Auto
369. ulate Filter see PRESSURE S SPAN INLET oy 1 Span Gas Flow Control 2 Span Valve SAMPLE CHAMBER TL Sample Gas Flow Control INSTRUMENT CHASSIS SAMPLE GAS INLET I PRESSURE SPAN INLET Sample Cal Particulate Filter SAMPLE CHAMBER ZERO Air Scrubber Sample Pressure Sensor Sample Gas Flow Control Figure 12 9 Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50H Zero Span Valves with Internal Zero Air Scrubber ji Teledyne Analytical Instruments 263 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer INSTRUMENT CHASSIS gt Shutoff Valve Sample Cal Particulate Filter PRESSURE SPAN INLET T Span Gas Flow Control Zero Span Valve SAMPLE CHAMBER Sample Gas Flow Control Figure 12 10 Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50E Zero Span Shutoff w Internal Zero Air Scrubber INSTRUMENT CHassis SAMPLE GAS I INLET 1 y GFC Wheel I EXHAUST Housing GAS OUTLET 2 I O Sensor Sensor Flow Control I i I SAMPLE CHAMBER 1 1 i i I PRESSURE l D SENSOR 1 1 i i b Sample Gas b Flow Control l 5 Figure 12 11 GFC7001T GFC7001TM Internal Pneumatics with O Sensor Option 65A ji Teledyne Analytical Instruments 264 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T30
370. ulty Motherboard Touchscreen or Relay Board Red Watch Dog Faulty Connectors Wiring between Motherboard Circuit Continuously OFF Touchscreen or Relay Board Failed Faulty 5 VDC Power Supply PS1 STATUS LED s DC VOLTAGE TEST POINTS es Figure 12 5 Relay Board Status LEDs ji Teledyne Analytical Instruments 259 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer Table 12 5 Relay Board Status LED Failure Indications SIGNAL I O PARAMETER LED FUNCTION DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUE ACTIVATED BY VIEW RESULT Voltage displayed should change If not D2 Failed Heater Yellow Wheel Heater WHEEL_HEATER WHEEL_TEMP Faulty Temperature Sensor Failed AC Relay Faulty Connectors Wiring Voltage displayed should change If not Failed Heater E Bench Heater BENCH HEATER BENCH TEMP Faulty Temperature Sensor Failed AC Relay Faulty Connectors Wiring D4 Yellow Spare N A N A N A D5 Sample Cal Gas Green Valve Option CAL_VALVE N A Sample Cal Valve should audibly change states If not Failed Valve Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay Board Failed Relay Board Faulty 12 VDC Supply PS2 Faulty Connectors Wiring D6 Zero Span Gas Green Valve Option SPAN_VALVE N A D7 Shutoff Valve Green Option SHUTOFF_VALVE N A Zero Span Valve should audibly change states If not Failed Valve Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay Board Failed Relay Board Faulty
371. ument and do NOT use any cleaning solution j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 248 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 TROUBLESHOOTING AND SERVICE This contains a variety of methods for identifying the source of performance problems with the analyzer Also included in this are procedures that are used in repairing the instrument NOTE QUALIFIED PERSONNEL The operations outlined in this section must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD eRisk of electrical shock Some operations need to be carried out with the instrument open and running eExercise caution to avoid electrical shocks and electrostatic or mechanical damage to the analyzer eDo not drop tools into the analyzer or leave those after your procedures eDo not shorten or touch electric connections with metallic tools while operating inside the analyzer eUse common sense when operating inside a running analyzer 12 1 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING The GFC7001T GFC7001TM Carbon Monoxide Analyzer has been designed so that problems can be rapidly detected evaluated and repaired During operation it continuously performs diagnostic tests and provides the ability to evaluate its key operating parameters without disturbing monitoring operations A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five steps 1 Note any WARNING M
372. uments 280 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 12 6 REPAIR PROCEDURES This contains procedures that might need to be performed on rare occasions when a major component of the analyzer requires repair or replacement 12 6 1 REPAIRING SAMPLE FLOW CONTROL ASSEMBLY The critical flow orifice is housed in the flow control assembly TAI P N 001760400 located on the top of the optical bench A sintered filter protects the jewel orifice so it is unusual for the orifice to need replacing but if it does or the filter needs replacement please use the following procedure see the Spare Parts list in Appendix B for part numbers and kits 1 2 3 Turn off power to the analyzer Locate the assembly See Figure 3 6 Disconnect the pneumatic connection from the flow assembly and the assembly from the pump if present Remove the fitting and the components as shown in the exploded view below Replace the o rings P N OR0000001 and the sintered filter P N FL0000001 If replacing the critical flow orifice itself P N 000941000 make sure that the side with the colored window usually red is facing upstream to the flow gas flow Apply new Teflon tape to the male connector threads Re assemble in reverse order After reconnecting the power and pneumatic lines flow check the instrument as described in Section 11 3 3 Pneumatic Connector Male 1 8 P N FT 70 x Spring 22 PIN HW 20
373. urce of low pressure gas is a tank of span gas with the two stage regulator adjusted to less than 15 psi with a shutoff valve and pressure gauge Do not use bubble solution with vacuum applied to the analyzer The solution may CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD contaminate the instrument Do not exceed 15 PSIG pressure Turn OFF power to the instrument Install a leak checker or tank of gas as described above on the sample inlet at the rear panel Remove the instrument cover and the flow assembly and plug it with the appropriate gas tight fitting Pressurize the instrument with the leak checker allowing enough time to fully pressurize the instrument through the critical flow orifice Check each fitting with soap bubble solution looking for bubbles Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution do not re apply vacuum as it will suck soap solution into the instrument and contaminate it Do not exceed 15 psi pressure If the instrument has one of the zero and span valve options the normally closed ports on each valve should also be separately checked Connect the leak checker to the normally closed ports and check with soap bubble solution Once the leak has been located and repaired the leak down rate should be lt 1 in Hg 0 4 psi in 5 minutes after the pressure is shut off 11 3 3 PERFORMING A SAMPLE FLOW CHECK CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD Always use a separate calibrated flow meter ca
374. ure 3 10 are instructions for converting current loop analog outputs to standard 0 to 5 VDC outputs Information on calibrating or adjusting these outputs can be found in Section 5 9 3 7 CAUTION AVOID INVALIDATING WARRANTY Servicing or handling of circuit components requires electrostatic discharge protection i e ESD grounding straps mats and containers Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty Refer to Section 14 for more information on preventing ESD damage 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 46 Getting StartedTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer J19 J21 J23 Analog Output Setup For voltage output of any one two or all 1 Jumper two leftmost pins 2 Jumper next two leftmost pins 3 Calibrate per Analog Configuration menu J19 J21 J23 For current output of any one two or all 1 Remove jumper shunts 2 Install Current Loop option 3 Calibrate per Analog I O Configuration menu CPU Current Loop option 9 installed on J21 Example setup install jumper shunts for voltage output on J19 and J23 remove jumper shunts and install Current Loop option for current output on J21 Figure 3 10 Current Loop Option Installed on Motherboard CONVERTING CURRENT LOOP ANALOG OUTPUTS TO STANDARD VOLTAGE OUTPUTS To convert an output configured for current loop operation to the standard 0 to 5 VDC output operation 1
375. ure sample pressure The output of the sensor is used to compensate the concentration measurement for changes in air pressure This sensor is mounted to a printed circuit board with the Sample Flow Sensor on the sample chamber see Section 13 3 3 2 and Figure 3 4 13 3 3 2 SAMPLE FLOW SENSOR A thermal mass flow sensor is used to measure the sample flow through the analyzer The sensor is calibrated at the factory with ambient air or but can be calibrated to operate with samples consisting of other gases such as CO This sensor is mounted to a printed circuit board with the Sample Pressure Sensor on the sample chamber see Section 13 3 3 1 and Figure 3 4 13 4 ELECTRONIC OPERATION Figure 13 9 shows a block diagram of the major electronic components of the analyzer The core of the analyzer is a microcomputer central processing unit CPU that controls various internal processes interprets data makes calculations and reports results using specialized firmware developed by TAI It communicates with the user as well as receives data from and issues commands to a variety of peripheral devices via a separate printed circuit assembly called the motherboard The motherboard is directly mounted to the inside rear panel and collects data performs signal conditioning duties and routes incoming and outgoing signals between the CPU and the analyzer s other major components Data are generated by a gas filter correlation optical bench which
376. ure sensor on the Bench pin 1 is the pointed end 2 Assuming that the bus is working and that there is no other failure with the relay board the solid state relay K2 on the relay board may have failed e Using the BENCH HEATER parameter under the signal I O function as described above turn on and off K2 D3 on the relay board should illuminate as the heater is turned on e Check the AC voltage present between pin 2 and 4 for a 100 or 115 VAC model and pins 3 and 4 for a 220 240 VAC model j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 268 Troubleshooting and ServiceTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Hazardous Voltages are present during this test 3 Ifthe relay has failed there should be no change in the voltage across pins 2 and 4 or 3 and 4 Note K2 is in a socket for easy replacement 4 If K2 checks out OK the thermistor temperature sensor located on the optical bench near the front of the instrument could be at fault e Unplug the connector labeled Bench and measure the resistance of the thermistor e At room temperature it should have approximately 30K Ohms resistance near the 48 C set point it should have 12K ohms 12 4 1 3 GFC WHEEL TEMPERATURE Like the bench heater above there are three possible causes for the GFC Wheel temperature to have failed 1 The wheel heater has failed e Check the resistance between pins 1 and 4 on the white five p
377. ures are the result of damage due to electro static discharge Table 14 2 Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD DAMAGE SUSCEPTIBILITY VOLTAGE DEVICE RANGE DAMAGE BEGINS CATASTROPHIC OCCURRING AT DAMAGE AT MOSFET 10 100 VMOS 30 1800 NMOS 60 100 GaAsFET 60 2000 EPROM 100 100 JFET 140 7000 SAW 150 500 Op AMP 190 2500 CMOS 200 3000 Schottky Diodes 300 2500 Film Resistors 300 3000 This Film Resistors 300 7000 ECL 500 500 SCR 500 1000 Schottky TTL 500 2500 Potentially damaging electro static discharges can occur j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 316 Teledyne Technical Manual Model T300 Family CO Analyzers ESD Any time a charged surface including the human body discharges to a device Even simple contact of a finger to the leads of a sensitive device or assembly can allow enough discharge to cause damage A similar discharge can occur from a charged conductive object such as a metallic tool or fixture When static charges accumulated on a sensitive device discharges from the device to another surface such as packaging materials work surfaces machine surfaces or other device In some cases charged device discharges can be the most destructive A typical example of this is the simple act of installing an electronic assembly into the connector or wiring harness of the equipment in which it is to function If the assembly is carrying a static char
378. urity through the SETUP gt PASS menu Section 5 5 to prevent unauthorized or inadvertent configuration adjustments 4 3 2 PRIMARY SETUP MENU The areas accessible under the SETUP mode are shown in Table 4 4 and Secondary Setup Menu SETUP gt MORE Table 4 5 Table 4 4 Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions CONTROL MANUAL MODE OR FEATURE BUTTON DESCRIPTION SECTION Analyzer Configuration CFG Lists button hardware and software configuration information 5 Used to set up and operate the AutoCal feature 5 2 Auto Cal Feature ACAL Only appears if the analyzer has one of the internal valve and options installed 9 4 DAS Used to set up the DAS system and view recorded data 7 Analog Output Reporting RNGE Used to configure the output signals generated by the 57 Range Configuration instruments Analog outputs Calibration Password Security PASS Turns the calibration password feature ON OFF 5 3 Internal Clock Configuration CLK Used to Set or adjust the instrument s internal clock 5 6 Advanced SETUP features MORE This button accesses the instruments secondary setup menu a j Teledyne Analytical Instruments 91 OverviewTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO AnalyzerTeledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer 4 3 3 SECONDARY SETUP MENU SETUP gt MORE Table 4 5 Secondary Setup Mode SETUP gt MORE Features and Functions CONTROL MANUAL MODE OR FEATURE BUTTON DESCRIPTION SE
379. usting the Internal Clock s Speed sssssssssseseeeem emm ennemis 108 5 7 SETUP Comm Communications Ports 110 5 7 1 ID Machine mener nene enn 110 5 7 2 INET Ethernet ace ieu ceu re ad e e ue c iac ue eae de nace d 110 5 7 3 COM1 and COM2 Mode Baud Rate and Test 110 5 8 SETUP VARS Variables Setup and Definition essssssssssssseeeeeneenen nemen 111 5 9 SETUP Diag Diagnostics 112 A mie M 115 5 9 2 Analog Output iue e nf oa te ER ER PREMO dense 116 5 9 3 Arialog O ConfIgUFatiOri sciet eot rie frr eet etate e node eee tae enar Reds das 116 5 9 3 1 Analog Output Voltage Current Range Selection sss 119 5 9 3 2 Analog Output Calibration etr Pret p n e eU M EE 121 5 9 3 3 Enabling or Disabling the AutoCal for an Individual Analog 121 5 9 3 4 Automatic Calibration of the Analog Outputs sss eem eem 122 5 9 3 5 Individual Calibration of the Analog Outputs ssesseeee memes 124 5 9 3 6 Manual Calibration of the Analo
380. vent tre effectu es uniquement par du personnel de maintenance qualifi Mise la terre Ce symbole l int rieur de l instrument d termine le point central de la mise la terre s curitaire de l instrument ODF PPP MISE EN GARDE Cet instrument doit tre utilis aux fins d crites et de la mani re d crite dans ce manuel Si vous utilisez cet instrument d une autre mani re que celle pour laquelle il a t pr vu l instrument pourrait se comporter de facon impr visible et entrainer des cons quences dangereuses NE JAMAIS utiliser un analyseur de gaz pour chantillonner des gaz combustibles 4 Teledyne Analytical Instruments viii Table of Contents Teledyne API Model T300 T300M CO Analyzer TABLE OF CONTENTS ABOUT THIS MANUAL p ch vic EE scans EE hud cans ON SR XO E dees ER V IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION VII CONSIGNES DE SECURITE t piens nerd E dabei waking viii TABLE OF Eee Hn p m stance aa aae a aK Aea e iaaa e aAa aaa i ai IX LIST OF ABPENDIGES trit cota en ee AT dees ee aes A ad eee ido XV List of FIgures ene ee ee eget oe dc cert de vL uet eb xvi List of Tables octo nage edge denen eode iege dva get es Se e dotate ees ed xvii PART GENERAL INFORMATION XXI 1 INTRODUCTION FEATURES AND OPTIONS
381. x inet M OD d ed eden 185 8 2 Interactive Mode 5 enc ett td e tsp vent c tdi t Mes ed 185 8 2 1 Remote Control via a Terminal Emulation Program esses eene 186 8 2 1 1 Help Commands in Interactive Mode 186 9 2 1 2 Gommand Syntax iod bremen Pen Ie MM Rs 186 9 2 1 3 Data Types s dco eine eh 187 ga kA Status o oda etr eee IP ine 188 8 2 1 5 General Message Fortrlat inne iret ir si e tete RE epa das 188 8 3 Remote Access by Modem 5 erede cha de eu edo e 188 8 4 Password Security for Serial Remote Communications ssssssssssseeeneeens 191 9 CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 1 iececsecsndeansainvecectoncestccantesncetedadnutabeeanstaetecnccasuncrs 193 9 1 Calibration Preparations ote asc ec bete tee E taeda tiet 193 9 1 1 Required Equipment Supplies and Expendables ene 193 SNAP 194 SN V2 Span GaSe me 194 9 1 1 3 Calibration Gas Standards and 194 9 1 2 Data Recording Devos rtr 195 9 2 Manual Calibratie ssn en Du iets 195 9 2 1 Setup for Basic Calibration Checks and Calibration
382. xide Analyzer has a high performance VortexX86 based microcomputer running Windows CE Inside Windows CE special software developed by TAI interprets user commands via the various interfaces performs procedures and tasks stores data in the CPU s various memory devices and calculates the concentration of the sample gas API FIRMWARE Analyzer Operations Memory Handlin Calibration Procedures DAS Records Configuration Procedures Calibration Data Autonomic Systems System Status Data Diagnostic Routines PC 104 BUS ANALYZER HARDWARE Interface Handling Sensor input Data Measurement Touchscreen Display Algorithm Analog Output Data RS232 amp RS485 PC 104 BUS External Digital I O Linearization Table Figure 13 18 Basic Software Operation 13 5 1 ADAPTIVE FILTER The GFC7001T GFC7001 TM software processes the CO MEAS and CO REF signals after they are digitized by the motherboard through an adaptive filter built into the software Unlike other analyzers that average the output signal over a fixed time period the GFC7001T GFC7001TM averages over a set number of samples where each sample is 0 2 seconds This technique is known as boxcar averaging During operation the software automatically switches between two different length filters based on the conditions at hand Once triggered the short filter remains engaged for a fixed time period to prevent
383. zer 9 5 CO CALIBRATION QUALITY After completing one of the calibration procedures described above it is important to evaluate the analyzer s calibration SLOPE and OFFSET parameters These values describe the linear response curve of the analyzer The values for these terms both individually and relative to each other indicate the quality of the calibration To perform this quality evaluation you will need to record the values of both test functions see Section 3 4 3 or Appendix A 3 all of which are automatically stored in the DAS channel CALDAT for data analysis documentation and archival Make sure that these parameters are within the limits listed below and frequently compare them to those values on the Final Test and Validation Data Sheet that came attached to your manual which should not be significantly different If they are refer to the Troubleshooting Section 11 Table 9 5 Calibration Data Quality Evaluation FUNCTION MINIMUM VALUE OPTIMUM VALUE MAXIMUM VALUE SLOPE 0 700 1 000 1 300 OFFS 0 500 0 000 0 500 These values should not be significantly different from the values recorded on the Teledyne Final Test and Validation Data Sheet that was shipped with your instrument If they are refer to the troubleshooting Section 11 The default DAS configuration records all calibration values in channel CALDAT as well as all calibration check zero and span values in its internal memory e U

Teledyne GFC7001T User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents